Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Whats New NX9.0.0 PDF
Whats New NX9.0.0 PDF
Contents
Chapter 1: Fundamentals ..........................................................................................................................................1
Ribbon bar interface The NX Window (Ribbon bar) ................................................................................................1
Show Ribbon bar tabs and commands ..................................................................................................................3
Add commands to the Quick Access toolbar ........................................................................................................4
Add commands to Border bars .............................................................................................................................5
Customize the Ribbon bar interface ......................................................................................................................7
Add a tab and group to the Ribbon bar .................................................................................................................9
Save Ribbon bar layouts ..................................................................................................................................... 12
Export and import your interface layout ............................................................................................................. 13
Ray Traced Studio ................................................................................................................................................... 14
Issue Management enhancements ........................................................................................................................... 15
Generate support logs for IR or PR ......................................................................................................................... 17
Integrated web browser enhancement ..................................................................................................................... 18
View section enhancements .................................................................................................................................... 19
Display facet enhancements .................................................................................................................................... 21
Measure Point .......................................................................................................................................................... 23
Raster Image enhancements .................................................................................................................................... 25
Lock Rotations ........................................................................................................................................................ 26
Synchronize Views .................................................................................................................................................. 27
Stereo Display Visualization preference ................................................................................................................. 28
CSYS tool enhancements ........................................................................................................................................ 29
Edit attributes in bulk .............................................................................................................................................. 30
Chapter 2: CAD ........................................................................................................................................................ 31
Sketching ................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Sketch enhancements .......................................................................................................................................... 31
Sketch dimensions .............................................................................................................................................. 32
2D Synchronous Technology .............................................................................................................................. 35
Rigid sketch groups ............................................................................................................................................ 37
Part Module ............................................................................................................................................................. 39
Additional Part Module workflow ...................................................................................................................... 39
Shared Body enhancement .................................................................................................................................. 40
Controlling Part Module updates ........................................................................................................................ 41
Nest and Un-nest Part Module ............................................................................................................................ 42
Save As and Part Modules .................................................................................................................................. 42
Synchronize Links enhancement ........................................................................................................................ 43
Modeling ................................................................................................................................................................. 44
Snip into Patches................................................................................................................................................. 44
Rib ...................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Mirror Geometry ................................................................................................................................................. 46
Extract multiple bodies enhancement ................................................................................................................. 47
Analyze Pockets and Blend Pocket..................................................................................................................... 48
Combine or separate tool bodies ......................................................................................................................... 52
Interrupt feature updates ..................................................................................................................................... 53
Load Rollback Data ............................................................................................................................................ 55
Sorting model views ........................................................................................................................................... 56
Select intersection edges in Edge Blend and Draft ............................................................................................. 59
Replace Edge ...................................................................................................................................................... 61
iii
vii
ix
xi
xiii
NX 9.0
Chapter 1: Fundamentals
Ribbon bar interface The NX Window (Ribbon bar)
The NX Ribbon bar interface provides access to frequently used commands with a minimum number of mouse clicks
while maintaining a maximum graphics window area. It combines the functionality of the Advanced role with the
discoverability of the Essentials role. The tabs and groups on the Ribbon bar logically organize commands, using a
mix of icon sizes and informative text. You can customize the interface to suit your workflows, for example, by
undocking tabs or by adding frequently used commands to the border bars. Command Finder is embedded in the
Ribbon bar and provides additional capabilities such as showing hidden commands, starting other applications, and
letting you easily add commands to a tab, to the border bars, or to the Quick Access toolbar.
NX window
Component
Description
Ribbon bar
Resource bar
Graphics window
What's New in NX 9
NX 9.0
Cue/Status line
Component
Description
Tab
Group
NX Ribbon bar
3
4
5
6
7
Command Finder
Full Screen
Minimize Ribbon
Help
Toolbar Options
Finds commands.
Maximizes screen space.
Collapses the groups on the Ribbon tab.
Displays on-context Help (F1).
Lets you turn on or turn off commands in each
group.
NX 9.0
Rightclick the File tab and select the Developer check box.
1.
2.
Move your cursor to Design Feature Drop-down and then select the commands you want to show.
NX remembers your layout until you change to a different NX Role. To save multiple layouts, create your own Role for
each layout.
Tip
When you use Command Finder to find a command that is currently hidden, you can use the Show on
Ribbon option to show the command.
What's New in NX 9
NX 9.0
2.
arrow.
In Command Finder
In the Command Finder dialog box, right-click Layer Settings and choose Add to Quick Access
Toolbar.
Right-click the command to remove and choose Remove From Quick Access Toolbar.
NX 9.0
2.
Right-click Measure Distance
3.
Right-click Measure Angle
What's New in NX 9
NX 9.0
In Command Finder
2.
In the Command Finder dialog box, right-click Screen distance
Border bar.
Right-click the command to remove and choose Remove From Right Border Bar or select a different NX
Role.
NX 9.0
2.
The Cue/Status line moves to the top of the graphics window, just below the Top Border bar.
2.
3.
4.
In the Categories list, expand the Menu node and select Analysis.
In the Commands list on the right side of the dialog box, NX displays the Analysis commands.
5.
From the Commands list, drag the Measure Bodies command to the Tools tabUtility group, and drop
the icon next to the Expression command.
6.
What's New in NX 9
NX 9.0
1.
2.
In the Home tabSynchronous Modeling group, right-click Move Face and choose Ribbon Style:
Small Icon and Text.
3.
Right-click Offset Region and choose Ribbon Style: Small Icon and Text.
4.
Right-click Delete Face and choose Ribbon Style: Small Icon and Text.
To save your changes, create a new Role. You can create multiple customized layouts for different workflows and save
your customized layout in different Roles. You can then switch between Roles depending on your workflow.
NX 9.0
2.
3.
You can optionally follow the same steps to add a WCS group and a Show group to the new Visibility tab.
2.
In the Customize dialog box, click the Ribbon Tabs tab and then click New.
3.
What's New in NX 9
NX 9.0
2.
3.
4.
From the Commands list, drag New Group into the Visibility tab.
5.
Right-click your new group and in the Name box type Layers and press Enter.
The new Layers group is added to the Visibility tab.
2.
3.
In the Categories list, expand the Menu node and select Format.
In the Commands list on the right side of the dialog box, NX displays the Format commands.
4.
From the Commands list, drag the layer commands you want to add one at a time into your new Layers group.
NX 9.0
Additional groups
If you use WCS commands, repeat the steps above to create a WCS group on the Visibility tab.
Drag the desired WCS commands from the Format menu into the WCS group.
If you use Show and Hide commands, repeat the steps to create a Show group on the same tab.
Drag the desired commands from the Edit Show and Hide menu into the Show group.
What's New in NX 9
11
NX 9.0
This example shows how to save your current interface as a new Role called Analysis.
1.
On the Resource bar, click the Roles
tab.
2.
3.
Right-click in the background of the Roles palette and choose New User Role.
4.
In the Role Properties dialog box, in the Name box, type Analysis and click OK.
The new Role saves the changes you made to the Ribbon bar interface.
NX 9.0
2.
3.
Browse to a convenient folder location and type a file name for the .mtx file and click OK.
4.
Supply a name for the interface, select the check boxes for the NX applications to which the layout should apply,
and click OK.
You can e-mail the exported file or place it in a shared file location so that other users can use your customized layout.
2.
3.
What's New in NX 9
13
NX 9.0
View the changes to the photorealistic rendering of the part updated in the Ray Traced Studio window
dynamically as you make changes to your scene.
NX renders your part progressively in the Ray Traced Studio window and you can simultaneously work on
your model in the main graphics window.
Render high quality static ray traced images in the TIFF, PNG, or JPEG formats.
Command Finder
Ray Traced Studio
NX 9.0
Start a workflow for an issue using a configured workflow template that you can obtain using Teamcenter
preferences.
Create issues from the Check-Mate application using Teamcenter validation results.
Issue List enhancements
You can:
Create or edit a new issue list using search query criteria and save the list as a new issue list in Teamcenter.
Use the Quick Search option to search issues by property and value.
Improve the search by using the Issues Related to Part option to limit the issues in the issue list. For
example, you can search for issues related to the work part, assembly, loaded parts, and so on.
Attachment enhancements
Attachments are now organized under folders that indicate the relation to the issue.
You can now:
Create a 3D snapshot of the current assembly in Teamcenter and attach it to the issue. To do this, use the
Create and Attach Snapshot option.
Update the 3D snapshot of the current assembly in Teamcenter. To do this, use the Recapture Snapshot
option.
Restore the assembly from 3D snapshot to NX. To do this, use the Open option.
Add the dataset as an attachment to the issue. To do this, use the Add Teamcenter File option.
Import the file from the local machine to a dataset in Teamcenter and add the dataset as an attachment to the
issue. To do this, use the Import and Attach File option.
Show Info View window enhancements
In the Show Info View window, you can now view:
Detailed information of the workflow and the current task in the workflow.
What's New in NX 9
15
NX 9.0
Tooltip enhancements
You can now view detailed information of the current task in the workflow.
New customer defaults
You can now use customer defaults to:
Specify the supported Teamcenter Issue Report Revision type. To do this, use the Teamcenter Issue Report
Revision Type customer default.
Specify the location of the mapping file that maps the information in NX to external databases such as
Teamcenter community collaboration or Teamcenter. To do this, use the Issue Properties Mapping File
customer default.
Specify if the modified issues and the newly created issues should always be displayed in the Issue
Management tool. To do this, use the Always Show Modified and New Issues customer default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Issues group:
NX 9.0
activeDebugToken.txt
Contains the debug tokens activated for the current log files.
DialogMemory.dlx
Contains the last used setting of the dialog box.
env_variables.txt
Contains the environment variables set for the current session of NX.
.syslog files
Contain internal diagnostic messages that are useful for analyzing events that occurred in the current NX
session.
tc_server_log.syslog
Contains internal diagnostic messages that are useful for analyzing events that occurred in the current
Teamcenter session.
tc_journal_log.jnl
Teamcenter journaling log file.
user.mtx
Contains information related to the role used or any subsequent user interface customization.
WntRegistryFile.reg
Windows registry file.
nxxx_drafting_standard.dpv
nxxx_user.dpv
nxxx_site.dpv
nxxx_group.dpv
tcPrefForNX.txt
Contains Teamcenter user preferences.
tc_server_comlog.comlog
Contains the communication logs between NX and Teamcenter.
Command Finder
What's New in NX 9
17
NX 9.0
NX 9.0
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find Default
1 = section curves
Layer Information
In the Information window, the layer information for the view section and datum plane grid sections is now labeled
View Section and Datum Grid Section respectively.
What's New in NX 9
19
NX 9.0
NX 9.0
Save the display facets along with the part file using the Save Display Facets Visualization Performance
preference. NX displays a part quickly if that part contains saved display facets.
NX caches the facets for shaded views in a session for faster performance and avoids unnecessary tesallations.
NX does not cache the facets for advanced shaded views.
Adjust how the faceting tolerances are scaled using the Facet Scale options.
Fixed
Part
Adjusts the Resolution Tolerances settings based on the bounding box for the part.
The larger the part, the coarser the tolerance.
NX uses this as the default option for consistent faceting and reuse of facets.
Adjusts the Resolution Tolerances settings based on the view scale.
View
Note
For legacy parts, NX converts Facet Scale type from View to Part.
Refinement Factor = 1
Refinement Factor = 10
What's New in NX 9
21
NX 9.0
NX 9.0
Measure Point
Use the Measure Point command to calculate the location of the X, Y, and Z coordinates of a point relative to a
reference CSYS. When you specify the Absolute Work Part or Selected CSYS as your reference CSYS, NX creates
a Point Measurement feature and an associative Point Measurement expression. You can use the Point Measurement
expression in downstream operations.
Example
In cases where freeform trims create a vertex that is not easily defined numerically, you can extract the location as
a Point Measurement expression. You can then place a feature associatively and parametrically using the Point
Measurement expression as a reference.
The example shows a sphere placed 30 mm above the vertex.
Example
When you import a non-parametric model of a circular array of bosses, you can use this command to quickly
reverse engineer the pattern. You can extract the relative coordinates of the holes even if the pattern is located on
an inclined or oblique face for which normal distance measurements would not work well. You can obtain the X
and Y coordinates simultaneously. You can also validate that the holes of the corresponding array are properly
placed by comparing a couple of Point Measurement expressions with each other.
In this example, a Point Measurement expression that measures the distance of each instance of the boss from the
reference CSYS is created. The corresponding holes are created using these Point Measurement expressions as
reference.
What's New in NX 9
23
NX 9.0
Point Measurement features under the Model History node if Timestamp Order is turned on.
NX 9.0
Apply color modes and transparency to the raster image and change its orientation.
Resize the raster image by defining reference points on the image and matching them with corresponding
reference points on the model. To do this, use the new Reference Scaling method.
What's New in NX 9
25
NX 9.0
Lock Rotations
Use the Lock Rotations shortcut menu option to prevent a view from being rotated when you use the middle mouse
button or any other 3D hardware device.
In a multiple view layout, use this option to prevent a view from being rotated accidently. If you lock rotation for an
orthogonal view, NX locks rotations for all the other orthogonal views in the layout.
Graphics window
NX 9.0
Synchronize Views
In a multiple view layout, you can synchronize rotate, pan, and zoom operations in the views using the Synchronize
Views shortcut menu option. You can view the changes that you make to the part, simultaneously in all the views.
If you choose Synchronize Views in a non-orthogonal view, NX synchronizes all the non-orthogonal views.
If you choose Synchronize Views in an orthogonal view, NX synchronizes all the orthogonal views.
Note
If the multiple view layout has only one view in the non-orthogonal orientation, the Synchronize
Views option is not available for that view.
If the multiple view layout has only one view in the orthogonal orientation, the Synchronize Views
option is not available for that view.
Graphics window
What's New in NX 9
27
NX 9.0
Note
Limitations in the Windows 7 desktop user interface can temporarily suspend the rendering of a 3D display.
If a desktop user interface item, for instance the Widows Taskbar button thumbnail or a NVIDIA nView
Desktop Manager title bar button, is displayed in the NX graphics window, this may suspend the 3D
display. This may happen frequently when NX is displayed in the full screen mode. NX restores the 3D
display when you remove the user interface item from the graphics window.
The use of transparency in the NX user interface can prevent the rendering of a 3D display. Hence NX
automatically disables user interface transparency when Stereo Display is enabled.
AMD
NVIDIA
Note
The Stereo Display Visualization preference is not available in the following display modes.
Command Finder
Location in dialog box
A Windows workstation.
Relevant stereo settings enabled in the control panel of the graphics card.
Visualization Preferences
Special Effects tabSession Settings groupStereo Display
NX 9.0
NX displays the handles and on-screen input boxes for the Dynamic CSYS only when the Specify CSYS option is the
current selection option in a command dialog box.
What's New in NX 9
29
NX 9.0
The lifecycle of the attributes in the Attributes Group is the same as the lifecycle of the
design element.
For every Attribute Group that contains a common attribute, NX displays a separate group
on the Attributes tab in the Properties dialog box.
If you edit an attribute, NX applies the changes to all instances of that Attribute Group for
all selected objects.
Managed Attribute
Group
The lifecycle of the attributes in the Managed Attributes Group is independent of the
lifecycle of the design element. The lifecycle of these attributes depends on effectivity and
variant configuration.
For every Managed Attribute Group that contains a common attribute, NX displays a
separate group on the Attributes tab in the Properties dialog box.
If you edit an attribute NX, applies the changes to all instances of that Managed Attribute
Group for all selected objects.
Assembly Navigator
NX 9.0
Chapter 2: CAD
Sketching
Sketch enhancements
What is it?
Direct Sketch and the Sketch Task Environment are now more distinct from each other in the Ribbon bar interface.
Direct Sketch
Sketch commands are organized in a Direct Sketch group on the Home tab. The commands used to
create most basic sketches are directly visible in the group. More advanced commands are included in the
More gallery.
The commands in the Sketch Task Environment are organized into multiple groups on the Home tab. This
makes advanced commands more accessible on the Ribbon bar.
You can access the Sketch Task Environment using one of these methods:
o
From a feature creation dialog box, click the Sketch Section button. This creates a sketch
internal to the feature using the Sketch Task Environment.
When editing a sketch using Direct Sketch, select the command Open in Sketch in Task
Environment
Right-click an existing sketch and choose Edit with Rollback to edit the sketch using the Sketch
Task Environment.
Command Finder
Sketch
Sketch in Task Environment
What's New in NX 9
31
NX 9.0
Sketch dimensions
What is it?
Sketch dimensions are enhanced to make the process of creating and editing dimensions simpler and consistent with
the Drafting and PMI applications.
A new Rapid Dimension command is available. It is the default dimension command.
Other dimensioning commands include Linear Dimension, Radial Dimension, and Angular Dimension.
Creating dimensions
When you create dimensions, the shortcut menus are more intuitive. For example, when you select a line,
the shortcut menu includes options to create Horizontal and Vertical constraints, along with options to
create Horizontal, Vertical, and Parallel dimensions.
The dialog boxes are consistent with dimension dialog boxes in Drafting. For example, the References
group lets you select one or two objects for the dimension, and the Origin group lets you place the
dimension text. The Settings group provides dimension style options.
Editing dimensions
Double-click to edit a dimension. The dimension dialog boxes are consistent with the dialog boxes in
Drafting. You can edit the value and other characteristics.
You can change the measurement method. For example, you can change a point-to-point dimension to a
horizontal dimension, and a radial dimension to a diametral dimension.
You can reselect the dimension reference objects to reattach the dimension to different objects.
When you reattach a dimension or change the measurement method, you can either keep the dimension
value constant, or change the dimension value to keep the geometry the same.
Dimension settings
When you edit a dimension, you can change dimension settings including arrowheads and extension lines,
which is consistent with Drafting. To change dimension settings, use the Settings button in the Settings
group.
You can directly edit dimension settings using access handles and scene dialog boxes. To enable these
scene dialog boxes, turn on Enable Dimension Scene dialogs in the Settings group. For example,
the access handle on the dimension text lets you directly change the text angle, or to add appended text to
indicate your design intent.
NX 9.0
You can use the new Rapid Dimension command to create different types of dimensions with the same
command.
You can explicitly select the first and second object references for the dimension. This allows you to
control the design intent you want to create. For example, the design intent created by a dimension between
two points is different from a dimension between a line and a point, even though they may initially look the
same.
You can change style options of dimensions similar to the settings available in Drafting.
You can add annotation to the sketch dimensions to begin PMI and Drafting workflows when you first
create the sketch. For example, you can modify settings of sketch dimensions; display them as PMI
notation on the 3D model; and then inherit the PMI notation onto a 2D drawing. To display the PMI
notation, right-click a dimension and choose Display as PMI.
All applications that use Direct Sketch or the Sketch Task Environment.
Prerequisite
An active sketch.
Command Finder
Rapid Dimension
What's New in NX 9
33
NX 9.0
Linear Dimension
Radial Dimension
Angular Dimension
Graphics window
Creating Dimensions
Right-click sketch curves and use the shortcut menu.
Editing Dimensions
Double-click the sketch dimensions.
NX 9.0
2D Synchronous Technology
What is it?
Use 2D Synchronous Technology commands to make dynamic modifications to sketches while maintaining
tangency constraints and connectivity.
Move Curve
Resize Curve
Delete Curve
Use 2D Synchronous Technology commands to select and modify 2D sketch curves similar to how you use
Synchronous Modeling commands with 3D surfaces.
Synchronous Modeling
2D Synchronous Technology
Selection
You select faces using the Face Finder subgroup. When you select faces, NX recognizes
other faces that may be inferred to be tangent,
parallel, coplanar, concentric, equal radius, or
symmetric. You have the option to include
any of these inferred faces as part of the
selection.
Modification
What's New in NX 9
35
NX 9.0
Any application that uses Direct Sketch or the Sketch Task Environment.
Prerequisite
An active sketch.
Command Finder
Move Curve
Offset Move Curve
Resize Curve
Delete Curve
NX 9.0
Displays internal dimensions and constraints only when you make the group active.
In the following example, the sketch contains two rigid groups. Neither group is active. The two rigid groups are
positioned with the external dimensions and constraints shown. The two groups are listed in the Part Navigator.
In the following example, the first sketch group is active. Its internal dimensions and constraints are displayed
instead of the rigid constraint symbol. The active group is indicated in the Part Navigator.
After you create a rigid sketch group, use dimensions and constraints to control the translation and rotation of the
group as a rigid object. Internal constraints do not prevent translation or rotation of the group.
What's New in NX 9
37
NX 9.0
To delete the rigid constraint, edit the group, or use the Show/Remove Constraints command.
Constrain logical collections of curves so that they move together as a rigid unit.
Simplify your display by showing only the external dimensions which position the group.
Any application that uses Direct Sketch or the Sketch Task Environment.
Prerequisite
An active sketch.
Command Finder
New Sketch Group
Graphics window
NX 9.0
Part Module
Additional Part Module workflow
What is it?
The user interface and user interactions of part modules are enhanced to make working with part modules easier
within a single part file. If you use part modules to isolate portions of your design, you can now:
Work with geometry and faces inside the part module when the part module is not active.
To see faces, you must use the See-Thru commands. These commands also enable you to see faces outside the part
module when you are in the part module.
Command Finder
Module
Menu
FormatPart Module
What's New in NX 9
39
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Define Part Module Input
Menu
NX 9.0
.
.
Note
NX does not update if you click
Command Finder
What's New in NX 9
41
NX 9.0
Command Finder
In managed mode
In native mode
Command Finder
Save As
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Synchronize Links
What's New in NX 9
43
NX 9.0
Modeling
Snip into Patches
Use Snip into Patches to perform two unique functions on an untrimmed B-surface face:
Split the face into separate sheet bodies that correspond to the patch definition of the surface.
Delete one or more patches from the original sheet. This is a quick way to repair a small area of a larger
sheet, so that you can then create a new surface to fill the gap.
1.
2.
3.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Snip into Patches
NX 9.0
Rib
Use the Rib command to add a thin-wall rib or rib network to a solid body by extruding an intersecting planar
section.
Ribs are created based on a planar section of curves. The section can be any combination of curves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Y-junctions.
You can specify a wall direction where the rib walls are perpendicular to the section plane or parallel to it.
Perpendicular
Parallel
Modeling
What's New in NX 9
45
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Rib
InsertDesign FeatureRib
Menu
Mirror Geometry
What is it?
Use the Mirror Geometry command to create associative or non-associative mirrored geometry about a specified
plane.
Note
The Mirror Geometry command replaces the Mirror type in the Instance Geometry command from
previous releases.
You can mirror the following types of geometry:
Curve
Datums
CSYS
Edge
Solid Body
Plane
Face
Point
Sheet Body
The method of orienting the mirrored axes when CSYS objects are mirrored.
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Mirror Geometry
Modeling
Command Finder
Extract Geometry
Prerequisite
In the Extract Geometry dialog box, the Extract Geometry Type list
must be set to Body or Mirror Body
What's New in NX 9
47
NX 9.0
Analyze Pockets
Blend Pocket
Analyze Pockets
Use Analyze Pockets to identify blending issues based on a specified type of machine tool. Areas with blending
issues are tagged in the display and presented in the HD3D Tools navigator.
HD3D Tools
Results
Undercuts
Object Name
Analyze Pocket
Undercuts
Face: <#>
Part
Result
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
Passed with...
Passed with...
Passed with...
NX 9.0
HD3D Tools
Results
Acutely Angled Walls
Analyze Pocket
Acutely Inclined Walls
Face: <#>
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
Passed with...
Passed with...
Passed with...
Passed with...
Face: <#>
HD3D Tools
Results
Tool Inaccessible Areas
Analyze Pocket
Tool Inaccessible Areas
Face: <#>
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
<partfile>.prt
Passed with...
Passed with...
Passed with...
Passed with...
Face: <#>
Use this analysis information to make any corrections necessary to the model and determine the proper selection of
tools for machining the blends.
What's New in NX 9
49
NX 9.0
Blend Pocket
After you have analyzed a pocket for machining issues, you can then use Blend Pocket to specify the type of tool
and machining characteristics to yield a blend that can be machined.
The types of tools available in Blend Pocket are:
End Mill
T Cutter
Spherical Mill
When you use the End Mill tool type, you can specify how you want angled walls cut.
Swarf cuts the wall and cuts the floor only until tangent to
the ramped floor near the wall. There are no sharp edges.
Cuts the floor until the tool touches the top of the wall,
and swarf cuts the wall. This leaves a sharp edge.
Cut Floor
Cutter is angled to swarf cut both the wall and floor. This
leaves a sharp edge.
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Analyze Pockets
Blend Pocket
Menu
AnalysisAnalyze Pockets
What's New in NX 9
51
NX 9.0
Remove the volume of one or more tool bodies from a target body using the Convert to Subtract
command.
Combine the volume of two or more solid tool bodies into a single target body using the Convert to
Unite command.
Note
If you created a Unite feature using the Define Regions option, those regions are discarded when the
feature is converted.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Graphics window
Part Navigator
Browser
NX 9.0
The last successfully updated feature, which becomes the current feature and all subsequent features
become inactive.
The state before the update started. Any feature updates that took place are discarded.
Example workflow:
1.
2.
What's New in NX 9
53
NX 9.0
3.
Modeling
Main Menu
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
or
PreferencesModeling
NX 9.0
Assemblies
Menu
What's New in NX 9
55
NX 9.0
Default
Alphanumeric
Model Views
Model Views
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_2
#_tentative_2
#_tentative_2
10_rotated
1_rotated
10_rotated
1_rotated
2_rotated
1_rotated
2_rotated
10_rotated
2_rotated
Back
Back
Back
back_work
back_work
Bottom
Front
Bottom
Front
Bottom
Front
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
Trimetric (Work)
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
_reference_1
top_work
Trimetric (Work)
top_work
Trimetric (Work)
_reference_2
_reference_1
_reference_1
back_work
_reference_2
_reference_2
Model Views
top_work
NX 9.0
In the Part Navigator, you can reorder views if Enable Drag and Drop Reorder is selected
Part Navigator Properties.
You can also use the Explicit Order dialog box to reorder, name, save, and retrieve explicit sorting
schemes.
Example:
PMI views were reordered as the first model views in the Part Navigator
and saved as user_defined_PMI. The saved sorting order was then applied by
selecting it in the Explicit Order dialog box.
in
Part Navigator
Name
Model Views
(Order:user_defined_PMI)
PMI
PMI_FRONT
PMI_TOP
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_2
1.
2.
Saved tab
3.
1_rotated
10_rotated
2_rotated
Back
Bottom
Front
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
Trimetric (Work)
Note
The saved sort order name
is appended to the Model
Views node.
What's New in NX 9
57
NX 9.0
Command Finder
General tab:
Enable Drag and Drop Reorder
Sort Method list
Explicit order
Application
Part Navigator
NX 9.0
What's New in NX 9
59
NX 9.0
With the Draft command the Feature Intersection Edges Selection Intent rule is available with either of the
following Types:
From Edges
To Parting Edges
Available only with a Boolean feature (the child of a tool body and
a target body that were combined in a Boolean operation).
Available in:
o
Command Finder
NX 9.0
Replace Edge
What is it?
Use the Replace Edge command to modify or replace the boundary of a surface.
This command replaces the Edit Sheet Boundary command, but retains only the replace edge functionality from
the Edit Sheet Boundary command.
The options to remove holes and trims are now available in different commands.
To remove holes, use the Edge to Delete option that is available for the new Local Untrim and
Extend command.
To create non-parametric bodies, clear the Associative check box that is now available for the Untrim
command.
Modeling
Command Finder
Replace Edge
What's New in NX 9
61
NX 9.0
Original surface
Extended surface
Trimmed surface
Untrimmed surface
NX 9.0
Deleted hole
Modeling
Command Finder
Local Untrim and Extend
What's New in NX 9
63
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Rough Offset
Location in dialog box
Filter list
Surface Generation MethodRough Fit.
NX 9.0
Geometric matching now uses an improved algorithm that provides a much higher rate of successful
matches.
A new Display Only Unique Inputs during Mapping option supports geometric matching. When
selected, Selection Intent rule settings that were used to specify the input for the original dependent
downstream features are preserved. Selection Intent remains active, but its user interface is hidden to
prevent inadvertent changes.
When the Display Only Unique Inputs during Mapping option is selected, an Automatic
Progression during Mapping option automatically scrolls the list of parent objects to the next
unresolved parent feature.
Menu
EditFeatureReplace...
What's New in NX 9
65
NX 9.0
Unsew enhancements
What is it?
When using the Unsew command you can now use edges to split a body, in addition to faces.
On a sheet body, the selected edges may either form a closed loop or they should extend across the sheet body,
starting and ending on laminar edges.
On a solid body, the selected string of edges must form a closed loop.
Modeling
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Unsew
What's New in NX 9
67
NX 9.0
Draft enhancements
What is it?
The Draft command has been enhanced with an additional Draft Method of Stationary and Parting Face.
Use the Stationary and Parting Face draft method to create draft:
From a planar face to a parting surface. The stationary object is defined by a plane or planar face.
Command Finder
Draft
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
Draft To Isocline
What's New in NX 9
69
NX 9.0
Draft To Isocline
Command Finder
Draft Body
NX 9.0
Thicken enhancements
What is it?
The Thicken command has been enhanced to allow region boundaries of different thicknesses. It also allows
specified areas to be pierced.
The Region Behavior group has been added to the dialog box.
Original surface with curves on the surface.
Command Finder
Thicken
What's New in NX 9
71
NX 9.0
Pattern enhancements
What is it?
The Pattern Face command and the Pattern Geometry command now share common pattern definition options.
You can create patterns of faces or geometry in various patterns and define pattern boundaries, reference points,
orientation, and clocking.
Note
Pattern Geometry replaces the Instance Geometry command of previous releases.
You can create a pattern of faces or geometry using a variety of pattern layouts.
Linear
Polygon
Along
Reference
Circular
Spiral
General
Helix
NX 9.0
For a Linear layout, you can specify a Symmetric pattern in one or both directions. You can also specify
to Stagger columns or rows.
You can define a Pattern Increment by using expressions to specify pattern parameters.
You can export pattern parameter values to a spreadsheet and make positional edits that are propagated
back to your pattern definition.
You can explicitly select individual instance points for deletion or for clocking instances to different
locations.
Delete
Multiple instances of the pattern
can be deleted at one time.
Linear 4 x
4 layout
Clock
Each move shown above is a
separate clocking operation.
What's New in NX 9
73
NX 9.0
Same As Input
Command Finder
Pattern Face
Pattern Geometry
Menu
NX 9.0
Untrim enhancements
What is it?
When you use the Untrim command, you can now create a non-parametric body. To do this, clear the new
Associative check box.
Modeling
Command Finder
Untrim
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
75
NX 9.0
Iso-Parametric Curve
The original method used with Divide Face is still available and now appears as Object in the tool option list.
Command Finder
Divide Face
NX 9.0
You can now control the order of the columns in the spreadsheet by reordering them in the Part Families
dialog box.
Note
You cannot directly reorder columns in the spreadsheet.
You can now assert mass on part family members for Advanced Weight Management calculations.
You can now assign physical materials to part family members. See the Modeling help for more
information, including the format you must use in the part family spreadsheet.
The Part Families command and other part family interactions are now supported in journals.
The Display Message when Modifying Part Family Members customer default lets you control
whether warning messages are displayed when you modify part family members and cannot save the
changes.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Modeling
Command Finder
Part Families
Menu
ToolsPart Families
Column
What's New in NX 9
77
NX 9.0
is a new option on the Top Border that includes or excludes sheet bodies during
On Selection collects solid bodies and sheet bodies.
Single Body
Feature Bodies
Bodies in Group
Prerequisite
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
What's New in NX 9
79
NX 9.0
Synchronous Modeling
Move Edge
What is it?
You can now edit a shape by directly manipulating its edges instead of the usual method of editing its faces. Faces
adjacent to the edges you edit adapt to follow their motion.
1.
2.
3.
NX 9.0
4.
5.
Command Finder
Move Edge
Menu
What's New in NX 9
81
NX 9.0
Offset Edge
What is it?
Designed to work in tandem with the new Move Edge command, Offset Edge lets you offset an edge or a set of
contiguous edges.
You can create new edges using the Divide Face command and offset or morph their basic shape using
Offset Edge.
Original model
An edge is selected, and an offset applied and previewed
Result of offset edge
Command Finder
Offset Edge
Menu
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Delete Face
Menu
What's New in NX 9
83
NX 9.0
Label Notch Blend lets you label such faces as rolling ball blends, allowing NX to properly recognize them as
blends during subsequent face change operations, such as with Move Face and Resize Blend.
Notch blending was introduced in NX 8.5 with the Label Notch Blend command, but it did not support
compound notch blends.
Command Finder
Menu
NX 9.0
An offset from the body by using a clearance or by dragging the sizing handles on the box.
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Create Box
What's New in NX 9
85
NX 9.0
The Point on Facet Vertex snap point is currently available for the following commands:
Point
Line
Arc/Circle
Studio Spline
Fit Curve
Rapid Surfacing
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
A faceted body
Command Finder
Extrude Facet Body
What's New in NX 9
87
NX 9.0
Extrude Profile
Use the Extrude Profile command to extrude a closed profile between two planes.
The curve is extruded along the specified vector and trimmed by limiting planes.
Command Finder
Extrude Profile
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Merge Disjoint Facet Bodies
What's New in NX 9
89
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Merge Overlapping Facet Bodies
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Faceted sheets
Command Finder
Merge Touching Facet Bodies
What's New in NX 9
91
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Rough Offset
Location in dialog box
Filter list
Surface Generation MethodRough Fit.
NX 9.0
Shape Studio
Smooth Curve String
What is it?
The Smooth Curve String
command creates a smooth set of curves that are continuous and simplified.
Specified curves in the string may be designated as fixed elements, and will not be modified.
Command Finder
Smooth Curve String
What's New in NX 9
93
NX 9.0
Old Type
New Type
Mode
Slope Control
Ends-Apex-Shoulder
Conic
Shoulder
By Apex
Ends-Slope-Shoulder
Conic
Shoulder
By Curves
Fillet-Shoulder
Conic
Shoulder
By Faces
Ends-Apex-Rho
Conic
Rho
By Apex
Ends-Slope-Rho
Conic
Rho
By Curves
Fillet-Rho
Conic
Rho
By Faces
Ends-Apex-Hilite
Conic
Hilite
By Apex
Ends-Slope-Hilite
Conic
Hilite
By Curves
Fillet-Hilite
Conic
Hilite
By Faces
Four-Point-Slope
Conic
N/A
Five-Point
Conic
Five Point
N/A
Three-Point-Arc
Circular
Three Point
N/A
Two-Point-Radius
Circular
N/A
End-Slope-Arc
Circular
N/A
Point-Radius-Angle-Arc
Circular
N/A
Circle
Circular
Center Radius
N/A
Circle-Tangent
Circular
Tangent Radius
N/A
Ends-Slope-Cubic
Cubic
Two Slopes
N/A
Fillet-Bridge
Cubic
Fillet Bridge
N/A
Linear-Tangent
Linear
N/A
N/A
The Type, Mode, and Slope Control method can be changed when editing an existing feature.
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Section Surface
What's New in NX 9
95
NX 9.0
Reflection Contour lines are calculated much the same as Reflection lines (without the light placement options),
except you also have control over:
Line Width
Light Diffuseness
Body Color
Light Color
Command Finder
Highlight Lines
NX 9.0
NX calculates the negative inner and outer tolerance values when you compute the deviation using the 3D
option available in the Measurement Definition group.
You can view the deviation value at any point by moving the cursor to the point in the graphics window.
You can display the deviation value as a PMI label. To do this, you must enable the Label with PMI
customer default.
To specify the location of the PMI labels, use the Specify Location for Deviation Label option.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Shape Studio
Command Finder
Deviation Gauge
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
97
NX 9.0
The slope value at any point on the face of an object by moving the cursor to the point.
The slope value as a PMI label. To do this, you must enable the Label with PMI customer default.
You can specify the location of the PMI label. To do this, use the Specify Label Position option in the
Face Analysis Slope dialog box.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Shape Studio
Command Finder
Face Analysis Slope
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
Assign a color attribute to faces that have the same radius. To do this, select a row from the Face Radius
List box, right-click and choose Assign Color.
View the radius of the concave faces as a PMI label. To specify the location of the PMI label, use the
Specify Label for Face Radius option.
Example
The yellow color attribute is assigned to the concave faces whose radii lie within the range of 3 mm
to 6 mm when viewed in a direction normal to the selected faces.
In the Concave Faces dialog box, in the Face Radius List box, you can view a list of faces that
have the same radius.
R = 3.0 mm (3) constant
R = 3.0 mm (4) 3.06 3.45
R = 4.0 mm (1) constant
R = 5.0 mm (2) constant
R = 5.1 mm (1) 5.13 5.53
R = 6.0 mm (9) constant
In the graphics window, you can view each radius as a PMI label.
Specify the number of decimal places up to which the radius of the concave faces is displayed in the Face
Radius List box. To do this, use the Group Interval option in the Face Radius List group.
For example, if Group Interval = 0.01, radius values up to two decimal places are displayed in the Face
Radius List box.
What's New in NX 9
99
NX 9.0
View the radius of the concave faces at any point on the face by moving the cursor to the point in the
graphics window.
Shape Studio
Command Finder
Concave Faces
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
Color Plot
Contours
Both
Gaussian
Absolute
Minimum
Maximum
Mean
Normal
Sectional
Command Finder
Face Curvature Analysis
What's New in NX 9
101
NX 9.0
At the beginning and end of the input curves to complete the surface along the curves.
Command Finder
Ruled
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
Wrap/Unwrap Curve
What is it?
You can now use the Wrap/Unwrap Curve
surface.
Command Finder
Wrap/Unwrap Curve
What's New in NX 9
103
NX 9.0
Assemblies
Pack all components enhancement
What is it?
When you load an assembly, multiple instances of the same parts are now automatically packed for you by default.
Previously you had to do this manually in the Assembly Navigator. You can change the default if you do not
want multiple instances of the same part shown as packed components in the Assembly Navigator.
All NX applications
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
NX 9.0
Assemblies
Command Finder
WAVE Geometry Linker
Prerequisite
In the WAVE Geometry Linker dialog box, the WAVE Link Type list
must be set to Body or Mirror Body
What's New in NX 9
105
NX 9.0
Assemblies
Menu
NX 9.0
You can now calculate the penetration depth of each interference when you run a clearance analysis.
The dialog boxes are updated and reorganized to make them easier to use.
You can specify the units used in a clearance analysis by choosing an option from the analysis validation
units menu, Units Custom.
Penetration depth is calculated using lightweight geometry; therefore the results are approximate. When you study a
hard interference, the approximate maximum interference measurement is displayed using:
What's New in NX 9
107
NX 9.0
Units Custom
Command Finder
Drag one or more selected components to a new location in the Assembly Navigator.
Caution
You can have as many orders as you want, and switch between them as often as you like, without
changing the structure of your assembly. However, you must be very careful when you create an
order by dragging components and subassemblies. If you drag a component or subassembly node
away from its original parent to another location in your assembly, the component or subassembly
changes its parent and your assembly is restructured instead of reordered. See Sorting, reordering,
and restructuring the Assembly Navigator for more information.
Use the Reorder Components command to specify the new location for one or more selected
components. When your assembly structure is large, you may find it easier to reorder selected components
with the Reorder Components dialog box instead of dragging them.
User-defined orders are saved with the assembly so that you can continue to use them in later NX sessions.
NX supplies the following system-defined orders:
Chronological, Alphanumeric, and Alphabetic, which are available in both native NX and managed
modes.
NX 9.0
Assemblies
Command Finder
Reorder Components
Assembly Navigator
Assemblies
Command Finder
Assembly Navigator
What's New in NX 9
109
NX 9.0
Pattern Component
What is it?
Pattern component replaces the component array functionality, providing a greater range of pattern types, a more
dynamic user interaction, and functional and user interface consistency with Pattern Feature. Component patterns
also interact more dynamically and predictably with assembly constraints.
Pattern Component is used for creating copies of components and laying them out in a pattern formation. It is
possible to pattern multiple components together using a single component pattern.
You can create associative patterns of the following types:
Reference creates and positions components using members of an existing pattern (e.g. places bolts in a
pattern of holes).
Once created, these associative patterns can be edited. They can also update in response to changes in the model.
In addition, you can create the following types of non-associative patterns:
After a pattern component has been created, it is listed in the Assembly Navigator in the Component Patterns
folder and can be edited from there. When you have an assembly with existing component arrays, these arrays are
also listed in the Component Patterns folder and are edited from this folder.
NX 9.0
Assemblies
Command Finder
Pattern Components
What's New in NX 9
111
NX 9.0
After you finish your edits, you can unsuppress the constraint to remove the conflict.
Assemblies
Assembly Navigator
Constraint Navigator
NX 9.0
Align two axes in different components while preventing any rotation about the common axis. The
Align/Lock constraint behaves like an Align constraint except for this lack of rotation.
Align two circular arcs in different components while preventing the components from rotating relative to
each other. The Align/Lock constraint behaves like a Concentric constraint except for this lack of
rotation.
In the following figure, the bolts have the same constraints, except the bolt on the left has an Align constraint
between the centerlines of the bolt and hole. The bolt on the right has an Align/Lock constraint between the same
centerlines. The bolt on the left has one rotation degree of freedom, which means that the bolt can spin around its
centerline. The bolt on the right is locked in place.
You have a component that you want to constrain using an axis, and you want to simultaneously prevent
rotation about that axis.
For example, you can use an Align/Lock constraint to position a bolt in a hole.
Assemblies
Command Finder
Assembly Constraints
Graphics window
Right-click a componentAssembly Constraints
Location in dialog box
Type groupType listAlign/Lock
What's New in NX 9
113
NX 9.0
Tooltip
Toward Fixed Geometry
Away from Fixed Geometry
Fix
The constraint network does not contain any fixed
geometry
Constraints that lead toward fixed geometry are typically those that determine the position of that component.
Constraints that lead away from fixed geometry typically position other components against the component you are
examining.
Some components are referenced by large numbers of constraints, but often only a small number of the constraints
actively influence the position of the components.
Assemblies
Prerequisite
Constraint Navigator
Group by Components
NX 9.0
The Product Interface command now provides a level of indirection between the source object and the
linked object that is in another part file. A linked object links to a public object instead of directly to the
source object.
You can use the new WAVE Interface Linker command to create a linked feature for one or more
selected product interfaces.
You can now use the WAVE Geometry Linker command to create or edit a linked feature for a selected
product interface.
What's New in NX 9
115
NX 9.0
Snap.NX.Component objects, which are used to represent the parent-child relationships in an assembly.
Easy-to-use functions for cycling through an assembly tree without writing complex recursive code
A new chapter of the Getting Started with SNAP guide describes assemblies concepts and provides sample code.
The SNAP Reference Guide describes the new assemblies functionality in detail along with examples.
NX 9.0
Visual reports
Visual report sub-part topology
What is it?
You can now create and run a visual report based on the sub-part topology level of your model. As a result, you can
run a variety of visual reports based on face or body properties in either a single part or an assembly of components.
Some examples of the new reporting capabilities are to identify:
Faces or bodies based on geometric properties such as volume, area, weight, mass, or minimum radius.
Faces or bodies in either an assembly or a single component based on given object attributes. The following
is an example of a visual report based on face types in a single component.
In this example, you can designate all blended faces to be one color, and all B-surfaces another color.
What's New in NX 9
117
NX 9.0
You can create a visual report to give you information about all the components in an assembly. In the following
example, a visual report displays the volume of individual component bodies.
Resource bar
HD3D Tools
Visual Report Definition dialog
box
Visual Reporting
check box
NX 9.0
Effectivity
Object
Type
Design Category
Logical Designator
Source
Source Type
Source Name
In the example shown below, a visual report can identify the reuse design elements contained in a 4GD assembly
that is composed mostly of subordinate design elements.
What's New in NX 9
119
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Assembly Navigator
Resource bar
HD3D Tools tab
Visual Reporting
You can use filters to list reports according to their source (recent, out of the box, or by user) or their target
object type (component or subpart).
You can select an individual face or body in the graphics window and then create and activate a new report
on an attribute for the face or body.
You can use paging controls to display objects in a report group when the object count exceeds the limit.
The new Infoview template supports HTML5, giving you more control over the amount of detail
consolidated in a single template.
NX 9.0
Drafting
Usability enhancements
User interface enhancements
What is it?
Significant enhancements have been made to the way you create and manage dimensions and other annotations.
These enhancements provide a more intuitive, efficient, and interactive environment and include the following
changes:
A single dialog box for setting and changing all dimension and annotation options.
The display of only relevant settings when multiple drafting objects are selected for edit, instead of
displaying all the settings for all the selected objects.
On-screen windows and access handles that provide immediate access to specific settings used to control
and change the appearance of the associated dimension or annotation object.
See the additional Whats New topics in this section for complete details about these enhancements.
Settings for all objects are collected into logical groups of options and exposed in a tiered structure with
multiple, nested nodes.
When a node is selected, options specific to that node are displayed in the Group boxes to the right.
You can use the search tool to quickly locate the option for a specific annotation element or drafting object.
What's New in NX 9
121
NX 9.0
All preference options are initially populated from customer default settings.
Tip
Some customer defaults do not have equivalent preferences, and can only be set or reset in the customer
default dialog box. You can see a list of customer defaults that do not have an equivalent preference in the
NX Log file after you change the part drafting standard using the Drafting Standard command.
NX 9.0
Drafting
Command Finder
Edit Settings
Graphics window
Part Navigator
PMI
Command Finder
Edit Settings
Graphics window
Part Navigator
What's New in NX 9
123
NX 9.0
Contains options for selecting the geometry or other objects for positioning and
measurement of the dimension.
(2) Origin
(3) Measurement
Contains options for controlling the dimension that will be created and, where applicable,
how the dimension will be measured. In general, this group is available for dimension
commands that create more than one type of dimension. For example, Linear dimension.
(4) Driving
Contains options for specifying whether or not the dimension will affect the geometry if it
is changed in the drawing. This is referred to as a driving dimension.
(4) Associated
Objects
(5) Settings
NX 9.0
What's New in NX 9
125
NX 9.0
The ability to let NX automatically position and place a dimension. This lets you create a dimension with
the fewest number of mouse button clicks.
Interactive, on-screen controls for setting and changing the associativity and appearance of dimensions,
dimension lines, and extension lines.
These controls include:
o
Access handles that, when selected, display on-screen lists and windows for modifying frequently
used options and settings for the annotation object.
Note
Only one access handle can be active at a time.
NX 9.0
Settings buttons
Note
You must click the Edit
can place the dimension.
on-screen button again to exit the dimension edit mode before you
Double-click an existing dimension to enter the dimension edit mode, or right-click the dimension and
select Edit.
What's New in NX 9
127
NX 9.0
Rapid Dimension
What is it?
The Rapid Dimension
command is similar to the legacy Inferred Dimension command, and lets
you quickly create different dimensions from a group of general, well-used dimension types. The following
dimension types are supported for creation.
Inferred determines the type of dimension to create based on the selected objects and the cursor location.
Horizontal
Vertical
PointtoPoint
Perpendicular
Cylindrical
Radial
Diametral
Note
The Inferred Dimension command is no longer accessible from the NX user interface.
You can use the Rapid Dimension command to create the dimension from one of the supported dimension types.
In edit mode, the selected dimension will invoke the dialog box associated with its dimension type.
Drafting
PMI
Command Finder
Rapid Dimension
NX 9.0
Linear Dimension
The Linear Dimension
command lets you create one of six different types of linear dimensions as
standalone dimensions, or as a set of chain or baseline dimensions. You can create the following dimension types:
Horizontal
Vertical
PointtoPoint
Perpendicular
Cylindrical
Note
You can create a set of chain or baseline dimensions using horizontal, vertical, point to point, or
perpendicular dimension types.
Let NX infer the type of linear dimension to create based on the selected objects.
Dynamically change the type of linear dimension while creating or editing the dimension.
When dimensioning sketch curves on the drawing, determine whether or not the dimension will affect the
sketch curves if it is changed. This is referred to as a driving dimension. This option is only visible for
appropriate dimension types.
Convert a baseline dimension set to a chain dimension set, and a chain dimension set to a baseline
dimension set.
Manually override the computed value of a dimension while creating or editing the dimension using the
Override Dimension Text option in the Settings dialog box. This override option is available for all
dimensions except driving dimensions and PMI dimensions.
What's New in NX 9
129
NX 9.0
Drafting
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
PMI
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
NX 9.0
Radial dimension
The Radial Dimension
command lets you create one of five different types of radial dimensions.
Diametrical
Radial
Radius to center
Folded radius
Let NX infer the type of radial dimension to create based on the selected objects.
Dynamically change the type of radial dimension while creating or editing the dimension.
When dimensioning sketch curves on the drawing, determine whether or not the dimension value will
affect the sketch curves if it is changed. This is referred to as a driving dimension. This option is only
visible for appropriate dimension types.
Manually override the computed value of a dimension while creating or editing the dimension using the
Override Dimension Text option in the Settings dialog box. This override option is available for all
dimensions except driving dimensions and PMI dimensions.
Drafting
Command Finder
Radial Dimension
PMI
Command Finder
Radial Dimension
What's New in NX 9
131
NX 9.0
command
The Angular Dimension command is now presented in a dialog box with groups of task-based options.
You can now apply the Alternate Angle option while editing an angular dimension.
A Lock Angle option is available from the shortcut menu when creating or editing an angular dimension.
When set, this option locks the angle in the current quadrant, and then lets you place the dimension in any
quadrant.
Measured angle
Drafting
PMI
Command Finder
Angular Dimension
Lock Angle option
Application
Drafting
PMI
Graphics window
NX 9.0
Hole Callout
What is it?
Linear and radial dimensioning is enhanced to include a new Hole Callout option which creates associative callouts
for holes and threads based on the holes feature data.
The Hole Callout option is available in both Drafting and PMI when creating a linear or a radial dimension. Hole
callouts can be applied to:
Symbolic Threads
General Holes
Threaded Holes
What's New in NX 9
133
NX 9.0
Note
Parts that contain hole features must be fully loaded in order to create Hole Callouts.
The default format is governed by the currently used drafting standard and can be applied in accordance with:
ISO
ASME
DIN
JIS
GB
ESKD
Note
The legacy Feature Parameters command will eventually be retired.
Drafting
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
or Radial Dimension
Menu
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
PMI
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
Location in dialog box
or Radial Dimension
PMI
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
135
NX 9.0
To use these margins you must set the Position on Margin option in the Origin group of the dialog box for the
dimension or annotation you are creating.
You can control the initial margin offset and subsequent spacing in the drafting Preferences dialog box by doing
the following:
Geometry margins are recognized only when all other alignment options are not met or are unavailable.
Note
Annotations attached to other annotations (for example, Datums on stubs) will not snap to geometry
margins.
If a dimension or annotation has no measurable dimension line or dimension text, or the annotation
is attached to multiple views, margins are not available for placement.
Once it is placed, there is no associativity between the annotation or dimension object and the
margin. If the margin changes, the object remains in its current position.
Drafting
PMI
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
NX 9.0
Drafting
PMI
What's New in NX 9
137
NX 9.0
This command works for any dimension created between two arcs that conform to the following criteria:
The dimension is between two open ended arcs that lay on the same plane. Circles or other cylindrical face
types are not valid candidates for selection.
The dimension is linear, and measured in a direction which is parallel to the arc centers.
NX 9.0
Drafting
PMI
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
Linear Dimension
Location in dialog box
Shortcut Menu
What's New in NX 9
139
NX 9.0
You can define the origin of an ordinate dimension using the Point Constructor dialog box.
You can display dimensions, with or without appended text, above the stub of the leader line
You can combine the limits and fits tolerances for both a shaft (H7) and the mating hole (g6) in one
dimensional callout, with or without a separator and parentheses. Three display styles are available.
Drafting
PMI
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
Drafting
PMI
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
PMI
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Graphics window
Double-click the dimension, click the Extension Line access handle, and
then click and drag the extension line handle.
What's New in NX 9
141
NX 9.0
Regenerate lightweight data for bodies containing NX 7.5 or earlier lightweight data.
The Drafting preference setting for Handling Bodies without Smart Lightweight Data determines the course
of action taken when you place a smart lightweight view on a drawing for which no lightweight data exists.
For Exact views, you can now utilize:
Interference Curves
Referenced Edges
Shadow Outlines
Simplified Curves
Framebar (Shipbuilding)
Perspective
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
Customer Default
To set the Handling Bodies without Smart Lightweight Data preference or customer default:
Application
Drafting
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
Customer Default
What's New in NX 9
143
NX 9.0
vector option.
All of these dimension types can now be attached to lightweight objects in the view and still reflect the true
dimensional data of exact model objects.
Drafting
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
Dimension
, Angular Dimension
, and Ordinate
NX 9.0
No
Drafting
Command Finder
Projected View
Location in dialog box
Settings groupSettings
Projected nodeSettings
What's New in NX 9
145
NX 9.0
Customer default
Menu
NX 9.0
Simple
Stepped
Revolved
Half
Oriented
What's New in NX 9
147
NX 9.0
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
Customer defaults:
Menu
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
NX 9.0
Tip
To rearrange the callout list, select a callout from the list, and then click Move Up
Down
or Move
Drafting
Menu
Shortcut Menu
What's New in NX 9
149
NX 9.0
Drafting
Command Finder
Feature Control Frame
Location in dialog box
PMI
Command Finder
Feature Control Frame
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
New perpendicular, equal, and cross symbols appropriate for the ESKD standard are available for the Lay
(d) attribute.
Added a Tertiary Roughness (f) attribute. Available Tertiary Roughness values are similar to values
for the previously available Roughness (a) and Secondary Roughness (b) attributes.
All Around, Machining (e) and Machining Tolerance options no longer appear, as they are not part
of the ESKD standard.
Legacy ESKD surface finish symbols are unchanged and cannot be upgraded. To get the new ESKD surface finish
symbol functionality, delete the legacy symbol and add a new one.
PMI
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Surface Finish
Drafting
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Surface Finish Symbol
What's New in NX 9
151
NX 9.0
More consistent repositioning behavior for datum symbols using the Shift+drag gesture
You can create more than seven jogs in a datum leader line.
A new Datum Arrow Display Style customer default that lets you set the triangular shape of the datum
arrowhead symbol. You can choose an isosceles or equilateral triangle.
Note
This default is controlled by the Drafting standard. To set the shape of the datum arrowhead, edit the
default drafting standard or create a custom drafting standard.
NX 9.0
What's New in NX 9
153
NX 9.0
Drafting symbols
What is it?
Several new drafting symbols are available for placement in a note or in dimension text. They are:
Approximate Dimension
Right Pitch
Sphere
Left Taper
Left Pitch
Right Taper
Drafting
Command Finder
Note
Location in dialog box
PMI
Command Finder
Note
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
Note
Please refer to the NX Open Help collection for the correct NX Open API routine name and input and output
parameters.
Drafting
Command Finder
Image
What's New in NX 9
155
NX 9.0
Hole Table
What is it?
The Hole Table command now utilizes a block-based dialog box to create ordinate style hole locations arranged in
a table. The table can contain individual columns for labels, category IDs, hole types, diameters and depth. The table
can cover all general hole types, including drill size holes, screw clearance holes, and threaded holes. Complete
circles in model or drafting sketches can also be tabulated.
Be edited from the same dialog box that was used to create it.
Note
The previous hole table interface, available only under the environment variable
156 What's New in NX 9.0
NX 9.0
Drafting
Command Finder
Hole Table
Set hole table preferences
Application
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Menu
What's New in NX 9
157
NX 9.0
Bend Table
What is it?
Use the Bend Table command to insert a bend table in a drawing that you create using the flat pattern view of a
Sheet Metal or FPCD part. The tabular format makes the bend information easy to read in downstream applications.
To display the bend parameters that you want in the bend table, you must set preferences in the Drafting
Preferences dialog box. You can display any or all of the following bend parameters:
Bend Sequence ID
Bend Name
Bend Radius
Bend Angle
Bend Direction
Included Angle
NX derives the values of the bend parameters from the flat pattern view.
Note
NX 9.0
The contents of the bend table are locked and cannot be edited.
Drafting
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Bend Table
Drafting preferences
Application
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
159
NX 9.0
Inheriting of PMI dimensions that originate from revolved sketch dimensions set to Display as PMI is
enhanced. If the revolved sketch is on a plane that is not parallel to the view plane, NX can now optionally
orient the dimensions to the drawing view.
Status checking of drawing views is enhanced. If a drawing view includes inherited PMI that changed in
the model since the drawing view was last updated, NX now marks the drawing view out-of-date.
Control of PMI object values is enhanced. NX now converts values displayed for inherited PMI objects that
reference attributes or expressions to simple values. The inherited PMI do not have any active reference to
attributes or expressions. On update, the inherited PMI values are reconverted from the current model PMI.
If the text of inherited PMI is modified during bi-directional edit, the change is reflected to the model PMI.
If the model PMI was linked with an attribute or expression, such linkage is removed.
NX 9.0
Crosshatch enhancements
What is it?
Crosshatch dependencies on feature data have been removed, so you can create, edit and update crosshatches for
partially loaded parts. There is no need to fully load the part when editing or updating a crosshatch.
Note
A crosshatch created in earlier releases is converted to an enhanced crosshatch on edit, but conversion does
require full loading of the part. Once a legacy crosshatch has been converted and saved, full loading of the
part is not required for editing or updating the crosshatch.
Drafting
Command Finder
Crosshatch
Graphics window
What's New in NX 9
161
NX 9.0
A single dialog box for setting and changing all dimension and annotation options.
The display of only relevant settings when multiple drafting objects are selected for edit, instead of
displaying all the settings for all the selected objects.
On-screen windows and access handles that provide immediate access to specific settings used to control
and change the appearance of the associated dimension or annotation object.
See the additional Whats New topics in this section for complete details about these enhancements.
Settings for all objects are collected into logical groups of options and exposed in a tiered structure with
multiple, nested nodes.
When a node is selected, options specific to that node are displayed in the Group boxes to the right.
You can use the search tool to quickly locate the option for a specific annotation element or drafting object.
NX 9.0
All preference options are initially populated from customer default settings.
Tip
Some customer defaults do not have equivalent preferences, and can only be set or reset in the customer
default dialog box. You can see a list of customer defaults that do not have an equivalent preference in the
NX Log file after you change the part drafting standard using the Drafting Standard command.
What's New in NX 9
163
NX 9.0
PMI
Command Finder
Edit Settings
Graphics window
Part Navigator
Chamfer
Thivkness
Arc Length
Ordinate
Contains options for selecting the geometry or other objects for positioning and
measurement of the dimension.
(2) Origin
(3) Measurement
Contains options for controlling the dimension that will be created and, where applicable,
how the dimension will be measured. In general, this group is available for dimension
commands that create more than one type of dimension. For example, Linear dimension.
NX 9.0
(5) Settings
What's New in NX 9
165
NX 9.0
The ability to let NX automatically position and place a dimension. This lets you create a dimension with
the fewest number of mouse button clicks.
Interactive, on-screen controls for setting and changing the associativity and appearance of dimensions,
dimension lines, and extension lines.
These controls include:
o
Access handles that, when selected, display on-screen lists and windows for modifying frequently
used options and settings for the annotation object.
Note
Only one access handle can be active at a time.
NX 9.0
Settings buttons
Note
You must click the Edit
can place the dimension.
on-screen button again to exit the dimension edit mode before you
Double-click an existing dimension to enter the dimension edit mode, or right-click the dimension and
select Edit.
What's New in NX 9
167
NX 9.0
Rapid Dimension
What is it?
The Rapid Dimension
command is similar to the legacy Inferred Dimension command, and lets you
quickly create different dimensions from a group of general, well-used dimension types. The following dimension
types are supported for creation.
Inferred determines the type of dimension to create based on the selected objects and the cursor location.
Horizontal
Vertical
PointtoPoint
Perpendicular
Cylindrical
Radial
Diametral
Note
The Inferred Dimension command is no longer accessible from the NX user interface.
You can use the Rapid Dimension command to create the dimension from one of the supported dimension types.
In edit mode, the selected dimension will invoke the dialog box associated with its dimension type.
PMI
Command Finder
Rapid Dimension
NX 9.0
Linear Dimension
The Linear Dimension
command lets you create one of six different types of linear dimensions as
standalone dimensions, or as a set of chain or baseline dimensions. You can create the following dimension types:
Horizontal
Vertical
PointtoPoint
Perpendicular
Cylindrical
Note
You can create a set of chain or baseline dimensions using horizontal, vertical, point to point, or
perpendicular dimension types.
Let NX infer the type of linear dimension to create based on the selected objects.
Dynamically change the type of linear dimension while creating or editing the dimension.
Convert a baseline dimension set to a chain dimension set, and a chain dimension set to a baseline
dimension set.
PMI
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
What's New in NX 9
169
NX 9.0
Radial dimension
The Radial Dimension
command lets you create one of five different types of radial dimensions.
Diametrical
Radial
Radius to center
Folded radius
Let NX infer the type of radial dimension to create based on the selected objects.
Dynamically change the type of radial dimension while creating or editing the dimension.
PMI
Command Finder
Radial Dimension
NX 9.0
command
The Angular Dimension command is now presented in a dialog box with groups of task-based options.
You can now apply the Alternate Angle option while editing an angular dimension.
A Lock Angle option is available from the shortcut menu when creating or editing an angular dimension.
When set, this option locks the angle in the current quadrant, and then lets you place the dimension in any
quadrant.
Measured angle
PMI
Command Finder
Angular Dimension
Lock Angle option
Application
PMI
Graphics window
What's New in NX 9
171
NX 9.0
Hole Callout
What is it?
Linear and radial dimensioning is enhanced to include a new Hole Callout option which creates associative callouts
for holes and threads based on the holes feature data.
The Hole Callout option is available in both Drafting and PMI when creating a linear or a radial dimension. Hole
callouts can be applied to:
Symbolic Threads
General Holes
Threaded Holes
NX 9.0
Note
Parts that contain hole features must be fully loaded in order to create Hole Callouts.
The default format is governed by the currently used drafting standard and can be applied in accordance with:
ISO
ASME
DIN
JIS
GB
ESKD
PMI
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
Location in dialog box
or Radial Dimension
PMI
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
173
NX 9.0
To use these margins you must set the Position on Margin option in the Origin group of the dialog box for the
dimension or annotation you are creating.
You can control the initial margin offset and subsequent spacing in the drafting Preferences dialog box by doing
the following:
Geometry margins are recognized only when all other alignment options are not met or are unavailable.
Note
Annotations attached to other annotations (for example, Datums on stubs) will not snap to geometry
margins.
If a dimension or annotation has no measurable dimension line or dimension text, or the annotation
is attached to multiple views, margins are not available for placement.
Once it is placed, there is no associativity between the annotation or dimension object and the
margin. If the margin changes, the object remains in its current position.
PMI
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
PMI
What's New in NX 9
175
NX 9.0
This command works for any dimension created between two arcs that conform to the following criteria:
The dimension is between two open ended arcs that lay on the same plane. Circles or other cylindrical face
types are not valid candidates for selection.
The dimension is linear, and measured in a direction which is parallel to the arc centers.
NX 9.0
PMI
Command Finder
Linear Dimension
Location in dialog box
Shortcut Menu
What's New in NX 9
177
NX 9.0
You can define the origin of an ordinate dimension using the Point Constructor dialog box.
You can display dimensions, with or without appended text, above the stub of the leader line
You can combine the limits and fits tolerances for both a shaft (H7) and the mating hole (g6) in one
dimensional callout, with or without a separator and parentheses. Three display styles are available.
PMI
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
PMI
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Graphics window
Double-click the dimension, click the Extension Line access handle, and
then click and drag the extension line handle.
What's New in NX 9
179
NX 9.0
You can associate the cutting plane to geometry. If the plane is associative, it moves with the associated
geometry when the geometry location or orientation is changed.
You can display a crosshatch pattern on cut bodies. Crosshatching is typically used in conjunction with a
cap. The crosshatching option is available for One Plane type sections. You can specify a crosshatching
pattern, or you can have NX apply a pattern based on the material assigned to the bodies.
Note
Material definitions are enhanced to include a Crosshatch Pattern property. You can edit
materials to add or change the assigned crosshatch pattern. For more information about materials,
see the Materials topic in the NX CAE Advanced Simulation help.
Associated cutting planes can automatically adjust the cutting plane position when associated geometry is
moved or reoriented.
NX 9.0
Hatch patterns can show cut bodies and can provide material information.
You can look at cutting plane symbols to visualize what the section will look like without having to switch
to the view.
PMI
Command Finder
Lightweight Section View
Location in dialog box
Location in Plane View dialog box
Crosshatch
Application
PMI
Command Finder
Lightweight Section View
Location in dialog box
Crosshatch group
PMI
Command Finder
Lightweight Section View
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
181
NX 9.0
New perpendicular, equal, and cross symbols appropriate for the ESKD standard are available for the Lay
(d) attribute.
Added a Tertiary Roughness (f) attribute. Available Tertiary Roughness values are similar to values
for the previously available Roughness (a) and Secondary Roughness (b) attributes.
All Around, Machining (e) and Machining Tolerance options no longer appear, as they are not part
of the ESKD standard.
Legacy ESKD surface finish symbols are unchanged and cannot be upgraded. To get the new ESKD surface finish
symbol functionality, delete the legacy symbol and add a new one.
PMI
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Surface Finish
NX 9.0
Inheriting of PMI dimensions that originate from revolved sketch dimensions set to Display as PMI is
enhanced. If the revolved sketch is on a plane that is not parallel to the view plane, NX can now optionally
orient the dimensions to the drawing view.
Status checking of drawing views is enhanced. If a drawing view includes inherited PMI that changed in
the model since the drawing view was last updated, NX now marks the drawing view out-of-date.
Control of PMI object values is enhanced. NX now converts values displayed for inherited PMI objects that
reference attributes or expressions to simple values. The inherited PMI do not have any active reference to
attributes or expressions. On update, the inherited PMI values are reconverted from the current model PMI.
If the text of inherited PMI is modified during bi-directional edit, the change is reflected to the model PMI.
If the model PMI was linked with an attribute or expression, such linkage is removed.
What's New in NX 9
183
NX 9.0
Region enhancement
What is it?
The PMI Region command is enhanced so that when a PMI region with crosshatching is projected onto more than
one surface, the crosshatch pattern now maintains the direction of the crosshatching across all of the surfaces.
PMI
Prerequisite
Command Finder
PMI Region
NX 9.0
Default
Alphanumeric
Model Views
Model Views
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_2
#_tentative_2
#_tentative_2
10_rotated
1_rotated
10_rotated
1_rotated
2_rotated
1_rotated
2_rotated
10_rotated
2_rotated
Back
Back
Back
back_work
back_work
Bottom
Front
Bottom
Front
Bottom
Front
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
Trimetric (Work)
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
_reference_1
top_work
Trimetric (Work)
top_work
Trimetric (Work)
_reference_2
_reference_1
_reference_1
back_work
_reference_2
_reference_2
Model Views
top_work
What's New in NX 9
185
NX 9.0
In the Part Navigator, you can reorder views if Enable Drag and Drop Reorder is selected
Part Navigator Properties.
You can also use the Explicit Order dialog box to reorder, name, save, and retrieve explicit sorting
schemes.
Example:
PMI views were reordered as the first model views in the Part Navigator
and saved as user_defined_PMI. The saved sorting order was then applied by
selecting it in the Explicit Order dialog box.
in
Part Navigator
Name
Model Views
(Order:user_defined_PMI)
PMI
PMI_FRONT
PMI_TOP
#_tentative_1
#_tentative_2
1.
2.
Saved tab
3.
1_rotated
10_rotated
2_rotated
Back
Bottom
Front
Isometric
Left
"Right
Top
Trimetric (Work)
Note
The saved sort order name
is appended to the Model
Views node.
NX 9.0
Command Finder
General tab:
Enable Drag and Drop Reorder
Sort Method list
Explicit order
Application
Part Navigator
What's New in NX 9
187
NX 9.0
More consistent repositioning behavior for datum symbols using the Shift+drag gesture
You can create more than seven jogs in a datum leader line.
A new Datum Arrow Display Style customer default that lets you set the triangular shape of the datum
arrowhead symbol. You can choose an isosceles or equilateral triangle.
Note
This default is controlled by the Drafting standard. To set the shape of the datum arrowhead, edit the
default drafting standard or create a custom drafting standard.
NX 9.0
What's New in NX 9
189
NX 9.0
Drafting symbols
What is it?
Several new drafting symbols are available for placement in a note or in dimension text. They are:
Approximate Dimension
Right Pitch
Sphere
Left Taper
Left Pitch
Right Taper
PMI
Command Finder
Note
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
PMI
Command Finder
Feature Control Frame
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
191
NX 9.0
When added to a PMI object, the Feature Identification business modifier and its value appear in the Details
area of the Part Navigator.
The following values are available for the Feature Identification business modifier:
Hole
Counterbore
Thru-Hole
Special Hole
Pocket
PMI
Part Navigator
NX 9.0
For more information about controlling which PMI object properties update, see PMI Property Tool in the Help.
Note
In managed mode, every time a part is opened, NX reads tracking properties from the current
tracking file.
In native mode, when a part is created, NX reads tracking properties from the tracking file and saves
them in the part.
Example
Here are some of the controllable PMI tracking properties added or changed in recent releases.
NX 8.5 to NX 9
o
o
o
ExtensionLineLengthPastDimensionLine2
DimensionTextPosition
DisplayAttributes
NX 8 to NX 8.5
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
RegionDisplayCrosshatch
RegionCrosshatchPattern
RegionCrosshatchDistance
RegionCrosshatchAngle
LeaderCount
LeaderJogCount
LeaderJogPosition
LeaderType
LeaderStubSide
LeaderStubLength
LeaderArrowheadType
Command Finder
PMI Preferences
Location in dialog box General tabPMI Property groupUpdate Tracking Properties from XML
What's New in NX 9
193
NX 9.0
Sheet Metal
Bend Table
What is it?
Use the Bend Table command to insert a bend table in a drawing that you create using the flat pattern view of a
Sheet Metal or FPCD part. The tabular format makes the bend information easy to read in downstream applications.
To display the bend parameters that you want in the bend table, you must set preferences in the Drafting
Preferences dialog box. You can display any or all of the following bend parameters:
Bend Sequence ID
Bend Name
Bend Radius
Bend Angle
Bend Direction
NX 9.0
Included Angle
NX derives the values of the bend parameters from the flat pattern view.
Note
The contents of the bend table are locked and cannot be edited.
Drafting
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Bend Table
Drafting preferences
Application
Drafting
Command Finder
Drafting Preferences
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
195
NX 9.0
Use the Unbend and Rebend commands to unbend and rebend non-uniform thickness bends.
In sheet metal, non-uniform thickness bends are created when you apply blends or chamfers, or create
counterbored holes, countersunk holes, or tapered holes in the bend region. After the unbend or rebend
operation, NX retains the features that you apply or create in the bend region.
You can unbend and rebend non-uniform thickness bends that are created across cylindrical or conical
bends, Closed Corner features, and Three Bend Corner features.
The example shows a part modeled in the Sheet Metal application using features such as Extrude, Revolve,
Draft, and Edge Blend, in the bend region. These features are retained when you rebend the Sheet Metal
part into the formed state.
Use the Unbend command to flatten Gusset features by specifying the boundary edges of the gussets as
additional curves. The boundary edges of the gusset are displayed as curves in the flattened state.
The example shows the boundary edges of a gusset displayed as curves in the unbent state.
Sheet Metal
Command Finder
Unbend
Rebend
196 What's New in NX 9.0
NX 9.0
Note
You can only resize the bend radius of cylindrical bends connected to planar faces.
What's New in NX 9
197
NX 9.0
If you resize the bends in flanges that are created with a relief, the existing relief on the bend is maintained.
Note
The existing bend reliefs are maintained only if the relief dimensions of the selected bend are less
than or equal to the relief dimensions specified in the Resize Bend Radius dialog box.
You can also individually change the bend radius of adjacent bends that are not connected, but their bends
caps are, and do not form a corner. The bend end caps remain connected after you change the bend radius.
NX 9.0
Three adjacent bends that are connected to form a corner and which do not have any corner
treatment
You can individually change the radius of the adjacent bends. If you change the radius of one of the bends,
the end caps are adjusted to keep the corner intact.
Note
You cannot change the radius of adjacent bends on which a Three Bend Corner feature already
exists.
Bends that have deform features and cutouts created across cylindrical bends
The feature across the bend region is adjusted accordingly.
The example shows a Dimple feature created across the bend region perpendicular to the bend centerline.
When you increase the bend radius, the Dimple feature is adjusted accordingly.
What's New in NX 9
199
NX 9.0
Non-uniform thickness bends created by chamfers, blends, counterbored holes, countersunk holes,
tapered holes and so on.
The example shows a countersunk hole created across the bend region. When you decrease the bend radius,
the hole is adjusted accordingly.
Sheet Metal
Command Finder
Resize Bend Radius
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
You can mirror additional features. These include curve features, datum features, and pattern features
created using the Pattern Feature command in the Sheet Metal application.
The example shows instances of the Pattern Feature mirrored across a datum plane.
NX creates a new Sheet Metal body when you mirror a base tab, a base contour flange, or a base lofted
flange, and not otherwise.
You can mirror existing features except for legacy instance arrays, legacy instance features, and legacy
mirror features.
The Mirror Feature dialog box is changed to accommodate the enhancements. The pre-NX 9 Mirror Feature
dialog box is available only when you edit a legacy Mirror Feature.
Sheet Metal
Command Finder
Mirror Feature
What's New in NX 9
201
NX 9.0
NX 9.0
Note
If either the target body or the tool body is a non-sheet metal body, you must use the Convert to
Sheet Metal command to convert the resulting united body to a valid Sheet Metal part.
Sheet Metal
Command Finder
Unite
What's New in NX 9
203
NX 9.0
The central bend does not touch one of the side bends. In such cases, the central bend is extended to close
the corner.
The example shows a Three Bend Corner feature created across bends where the central bend does
not touch one of the side bends. The corner is closed using the Closed type of corner treatment
option.
NX 9.0
Central bend
The cutout diameter is such that the cutout partially trims off the corner region.
The example shows a Three Bend Corner feature with a circular cutout. The cutout region partially
trims off the corner region.
Create a mitered three bend corner. NX extends the flanges of the side bends until they intersect, and then
trims them such that the flanges touch each other along their entire length in the formed state. To do this,
select the new Miter Corner check box.
You can specify the value of the miter root radius at the tip of the miter. To do this, use the Miter
Root Radius option.
Blend the mitered edges and create a smooth transition from the mitered edge to the cutout edge to avoid
any jerks or jitters while tracing the tool path. To do this, select the new Blend Miter check box.
You can specify the radius for the blend to be created on the mitered edges. To do this, use the
Blend Miter Radius option.
What's New in NX 9
205
NX 9.0
Specify the origin of the cutout treatments. You can specify if you want to create the relief from the center
of the bend or from the corner point of the bend. To do this, use the Bend Center or Corner Point
options in the new Relief Properties group.
Add offsets to the cutouts that are created at the corner where three adjacent bends meet. To do this, specify
the offset value in the Offset box.
Offset = 0 mm
Offset (1) = 6 mm
NX 9.0
Flange Clearance = 0 mm
Flange Clearance = 3 mm
Sheet Metal
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Three Bend Corner
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
207
NX 9.0
NX 9.0
Sheet Metal
Command Finder
Mirror Body
What's New in NX 9
209
NX 9.0
Create a callout for the bend sequence ID when you select the Bend Sequence ID
check box.
You can also use the new Custom Callout 8 Sheet Metal customer default to create a customized callout
for the bend sequence ID.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults and click Find
Default
Specify the callouts that you want to create in the Flat Pattern view of the Sheet Metal or FPCD part. These
preferences are available on the Callout Configuration tab.
Specify the orientation of callouts, using the options in the Orientation list.
Customize the callouts in a drawing of the flat pattern view of the Sheet Metal or FPCD part. These
Drafting preferences are available on the Callout Configuration node.
Sheet Metal
Menu
PreferencesSheet Metal
NX 9.0
Menu
Drafting preferences
Application
Drafting
Menu
PreferencesDrafting
What's New in NX 9
211
NX 9.0
Assign the Bend Sequence ID and Bend Name attributes to the bend center lines in a Modeling Flat
Pattern view.
Determine the minimum sheet size required to form the Sheet Metal part using the Minimum X and
Minimum Y attributes.
Editing Flat Pattern callouts
You can edit the style and orientation of the leader lines created for flat pattern callouts.
Flat Pattern support for non-uniform thickness bends
You can create a flattened representation of non-uniform thickness bends that are created when you apply
blends or chamfers, or create counterbored holes, countersunk holes, or tapered holes in the bend region.
The features that you apply are treated as interior feature curves in the Flat Pattern feature.
Sheet Metal
Part Navigator
NX 9.0
Sheet Metal
Graphics window
What's New in NX 9
213
NX 9.0
Pattern Face
What is it?
You can now use the Pattern Face command in the Sheet Metal and FPCD application.
You can:
Create patterns of faces in various layouts and define the pattern boundaries, reference points, orientation,
and clocking.
Linear
Polygon
Along
Reference
Circular
Spiral
General
Helix
The example shows a linear pattern created by selecting all the faces of the dimple. In the Part Navigator, under
the Model History node NX displays a single Pattern Face feature.
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Tab (1)
Dimple (2)
Pattern Face [Linear] (3)
Command Finder
Pattern Face
NX 9.0
Note
The Wrap command works in the same way as the Sheet Metal from Solid command in the Sheet Metal
application.
Command Finder
Wrap
What's New in NX 9
215
NX 9.0
Bend Taper
Use this command to create a bend taper feature on one or both sides of the bend or web faces. You can
create symmetric or non-symmetric tapers on either side of a bend or web region.
Break Corner
Use this command to round off sharp external or internal corners of FPCD bodies, and avoid tearing of
FPCD material during manufacturing or usage.
Chamfer
Use this command to trim sharp external or internal corners of FPCD bodies, and avoid tearing of FPCD
material during manufacturing or usage.
Mirror Body
Use this command to create a copy of a body that is a mirror image of the original body across a specified
plane. You can use the Mirror Body command in conjunction with the Unite command to create
symmetric FPCD parts.
Mirror Feature
Use this command to create a copy of specified FPCD features on a body by mirroring the features across a
plane.
The bend angles of bodies that are imported from other CAD systems.
The individual bend angles in features that create multiple bend regions such as the Bridge, Wrap, or
Contour Transition features.
The bend radius of bodies that are imported from other CAD systems.
The individual bend radius in features that create multiple bend regions such as the Bridge, Wrap, or
Contour Transition features.
NX 9.0
Unite
Use this command to combine the volume of two or more solid bodies into a single body.
These commands work in the same way as they do in the Sheet Metal application.
Command Finder
What's New in NX 9
217
NX 9.0
Pattern Face
What is it?
You can now use the Pattern Face command in the Sheet Metal and FPCD application.
You can:
Create patterns of faces in various layouts and define the pattern boundaries, reference points, orientation,
and clocking.
Linear
Polygon
Along
Reference
Circular
Spiral
General
Helix
The example shows a linear pattern created by selecting all the faces of the dimple. In the Part Navigator, under
the Model History node NX displays a single Pattern Face feature.
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Tab (1)
Dimple (2)
Pattern Face [Linear] (3)
Command Finder
Pattern Face
NX 9.0
Data Reuse
Double-clicking folders and reusable objects
What is it?
You can double-click a folder in the Reuse Library dialog box to open it and display reusable objects,
reusable components, or sub-folders in the Member Select group.
You can double-click a reusable object or reusable component in the Member Select group to add it to
your assembly.
What's New in NX 9
219
NX 9.0
You can organize folders A, B, C, and D into three separate groups according to different design
department needs.
For the users in Departments A, B, and C, add the appropriate Group folder to their reuse library.
NX 9.0
Toolbar
Undo
Redo
What's New in NX 9
221
NX 9.0
After a search index is created for a reuse library, you can perform searches for data in the library based on search
fields. In a native NX environment, you can use the following search criteria:
Descriptive Name
File Name
Descriptive Name
Item ID
Item Name
Item Description
You can combine multiple fields as search criteria. You can also use wildcard characters in a search and use a
Boolean such as OR, AND, and IN.
You can define search criteria according to part attributes or part expressions by using the Define Search Criteria
command.
The open-source search engine, Solr 4.0 or above, and JRE 1.6 or above
must be installed.
NX 9.0
Toolbar
Menu
The example below shows a reuse library before you map the structure:
What's New in NX 9
223
NX 9.0
Boolean order
Boolean operation
NX 9.0
check box.
What's New in NX 9
225
NX 9.0
Resource bar
Reuse Library
Member Select group
If you set the default revision rule for a reusable object or reusable component to Precise Only, you can
select a certain revision of the object or component when you add it to your assembly from the reuse library
if you choose the Asking to Select option.
NX 9.0
URL link
Excel spreadsheet
Word document
PDF file
An example of an item revision structure with the new dataset types is shown below:
Resource bar
Reuse Library
Member Select group
What's New in NX 9
227
NX 9.0
Example
The diameter of the pipe, the size of the loop, the position of the bolt holes on the angled steel, the size of the
angled steel, and the size of the nuts are all dependent on each other. If the diameter of the pipe changes, the
other items may also need to change.
PTS checks and modifies the interpart expressions recursively, so that all the correct family relationships are
maintained.
In previous releases, a change to the pipe diameter caused PTS to update the size of the loop, but the other
expressions continued to reference the original pipe diameter.
You can use PTS to create an interpart expression that supplies the initial formula for a parameter in a PTS template.
Other enhancements
You can use data from part family tables as option values in a PTS template.
You can initiate updates to part families in a PTS template using a visual rule.
PTS alerts you to the existence of more than one possible option when multiple selections match your
specified criteria. This occurs primarily when combinations of part family members exist.
When you use a list expression to specify the elements of an option menu, you can supply a tooltip image
for each option.
NX 9.0
Menu
What's New in NX 9
229
NX 9.0
Routing
Configuring Routing applications
Equipment parts support
You can import and use equipment parts while using P&ID tools.
You can also import your own equipment parts into NX or model the parts in NX. To list these equipment parts in
the Routing Reuse Library correctly, you must update the Application View (APV) file.
In the APV file, you must add Start_Equipment_Node and Start_Standard_Equipment_Node after the
Start_Cable_Conduit_Node node as shown below.
Start_Fitting_Node
Start_Stock_Node
Start_Space_Reservation_Node
Start_Filler_Node
Start_Overstock_Node
Start_Cable_Conduit_Node
Start_Equipment_Node
Start_Standard_Equipment_Node
You must specify the Start_Fitting_Node and the Start_Stock_Node, but other nodes are optional. NX does
not provide all the nodes for every discipline by default. However, if you need to use them, you must add the nodes
in the order shown above.
The following is the syntax for the new nodes in the schema validation file (apv.xsd) to support equipment parts:
<xsd:sequence minOccurs="0" maxO+ccurs="1">
<xsd:element name="Start_Equipment_Node" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0"/>
</xsd:sequence>
<xsd:sequence minOccurs="0" maxOccurs="1">
<xsd:element name="Start_Standard_Equipment_Node" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0"/>
</xsd:sequence>
Routing
Resource bar
NX 9.0
Routing Mechanical
Routing Electrical
Routing Logical
For example, you can set your default discipline for the Routing Mechanical application to Piping, for the Routing
Electrical application to Wiring, and for the Routing Logical application to HVAC.
When you start these applications, NX loads the default discipline that you specified for that application.
Routing
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
What's New in NX 9
231
NX 9.0
NX now creates a single specification XML file and saves it in the folder specified on the Specifications
Folders tab in the Customer Defaults dialog box, and assigns the single specification XML file to the
current active discipline.
Specification Author: NX
Edit Specification
You can edit a specification imported into NX. To do this, you must set the following properties in the
specification XML file:
Specification Author: NX
Note
You cannot edit legacy specifications in the APV file for your Routing applications from within
NX.
Specification Author: NX
Display Specification
When you display the Information window, you can view additional properties such as Author, Released,
and so on.
Delete Specification
You can delete a specification in NX only if the following properties are set:
NX 9.0
Specification Author: NX
You cannot delete legacy specifications from within NX. You need to manually delete the APV file for
your Routing application.
Set As Active Specification
NX validates the specification nodes only when you run the Set as Active Specification command
from the Reuse Library. NX does not validate a specification if you use any other command, for example
Active Run. During validation, if the specification nodes are not found in the Reuse Library, NX
displays a message.
You can detect incompatible differences in specification filter types. When you apply the specification to
the Reuse Library, if there are differences in the type of the part attribute being filtered and the
specification filter type, NX displays a message. You can correct the specification filter types to remove the
violations.
Routing
Reuse Library
What's New in NX 9
233
NX 9.0
Routing
Prerequisite
Reuse Library
Routing
Reuse Library
NX 9.0
Specify a real value up to two decimal places in the Filter Attributes table.
View the values for NPS and NPS Branch up to two decimals places and arrange them in an ascending
order in the Branch Compatibility table.
Navigate easily to the required node as the Part Library Items node is no longer expanded by default.
Increase the width of the Value column in the Filter Attributes table to see long relationships.
Routing
Reuse Library
What's New in NX 9
235
NX 9.0
Validate the specifications while they are loaded. To do this, select the
Validate
check box.
Set a filter to load the specifications for the current discipline. To do this, select
from the filter options for a particular discipline.
o
Note
The From Work Part Runs option is not available for Routing Electrical.
Specifications
Folders tab
Set the authoring source from where you want to load the specifications. The
default authoring source is NX. To add a new authoring source, enter the name of
the authoring source in the Authoring Source text box. If you want to add more
than one authoring source, use a comma separated list.
Specify the folder path to the specification XML files for the Routing Electrical,
Routing Mechanical, and Routing Logical applications. To do this, browse to the
folders where you want to place these files.
Note
The folder to which you save the files must have read and write permissions.
Load and save the specifications files in folders on your computer when you work
in Teamcenter Integration. To do this, select the Use Native Folders when
Connected to Teamcenter
check box.
If you do not select this check box, to allow loading of specifications, you need to set the
Teamcenter specification folder using Teamcenter preferences.
Routing
Ribbon bar
RoutingPart Library
NX 9.0
To load the specifications into the Routing Reuse Library, you need to set the Specification Folders customer
defaults to specify the output folder in which you want to save the individual specifications files for a particular
discipline. The folder must have read and write permissions.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults and click Find
Default
Note
After you convert the multiple specifications file into individual specification files, you must remove the
reference to the multiple specifications file in the APV file under the Part_Specification_Preferences
node.
Example
Suppose you have a multiple specifications file for Routing Mechanical called Mech_Inch_Specs.xml which
is located in the ugroute_mech\appview folder. You want to convert this file into individual specifications
files and place them in the D:\single_specification_files folder and have the single specifications load into
NX.
1.
Set the D:\single_specification_files as the path to your individual Routing Mechanical specification
files using the Specification Folders customer defaults.
2.
3.
Remove any reference to the Mech_Inch_Specs.xml in the APV file under the
Part_Specification_Preferences node.
What's New in NX 9
237
NX 9.0
Note
The Routing administrator must set up the parts in the Routing Reuse Library with the PREFERRED_PORT
attribute.
The following table lists the placement solutions when you place a part.
Placement Location
Placement Solution
NX places the part along the axis of the selected arc or edge, or in a
direction opposite to the axis of the selected arc or edge.
NX places the part along the tangent to the selected point on the
circular edge or arc, or in a direction that is opposite to the tangent
direction.
NX places the part along the tangent to the circular edge or arc, or in a
direction that is opposite to the tangent direction.
NX places the part along the axis of the cylindrical face or surface, or
in a direction that is opposite to the axis of the cylindrical face or
surface.
On any surface
CSYS
NX places the part with the Port origin coincident with the CSYS
origin and the Port vector aligned with the +Z, Z,+X, X, +Y, Y
axes.
In cases where the placement intent is not obvious, NX places the part in a location that is aligned with the datum
axis and datum planes that are specified at the selected point.
When you place a part:
NX displays information in the Status line about an engaged port as it goes through the placement solutions
in the Place Part dialog box.
NX 9.0
Routing
Command Finder
Place Part
Routing Electrical
Command Finder
Spline Path
What's New in NX 9
239
NX 9.0
Routing Electrical
Orienting formboard components
What is it?
Use the Formboard Placement Coordinate System command to assign a CSYS for a component in a harness
assembly to properly orient it to the formboard plane. To do this, in the Qualify Part dialog box, you need to create
a new node for your assigned CSYS under the Formboard Placement Coordinate System node. NX aligns
the XY plane of the assigned CSYS with the formboard plane.
When you place the components using the assigned CSYS method, as there are no limitations on the location of the
coordinate system, you must verify that the placement of the component in the sample formboard is correct.
Component with an
assigned CSYS
Routing Electrical
Command Finder
Qualify Part
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
Routing Mechanical
Comos integration with Routing Mechanical
What is it?
You can connect Routing Mechanical to Comos using the Comos integration commands. Use these commands to
ensure that NX incorporates all the features of a schematic drawing created in Comos in a 3D model or assembly.
Integration commands in Routing Mechanical
Command
Description
Connect
Disconnect
Opens Comos and navigates to the P&ID symbol linked to the selected
component in the Routing Mechanical assembly.
Navigate to 3D
Description
Assign
Unassign
Navigate to NX
Lets you jump from the Comos P&ID symbol to the assigned
component in your Routing Mechanical assembly.
Routing Mechanical
Command Finder
Schematics
Menu
ToolsSchematics[Integration commands]
What's New in NX 9
241
NX 9.0
Routing Mechanical
Command Finder
Compare
Run Navigator
Right-click a runCompare
Import runs
You can share runs between schematics applications such as COMOS and NX.
Use the Import Runs command to import runs that are saved as XML datasets in Teamcenter or on your hard disk.
NX imports the runs into the work part and displays them in the Run Navigator.
Routing Mechanical
Command Finder
Import Runs
Run Navigator
NX 9.0
HVAC
Duct Reinforcement
Use the Duct Reinforcement command to reinforce rectangular ducts by creating stiffeners inside or outside the
ducts. If you change the dimensions of a duct, NX automatically updates the reinforcements.
Note
The default style of stock representation for the reinforcement stock placed on ducts is Simple and cannot be
changed.
You can:
Create inside or outside reinforcements that are parallel or perpendicular to the axis of a rectangular parent
duct.
To specify if you want to create reinforcements inside or outside the duct by default, set the Force Duct
Reinforcement Type customer default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults and click Find
Default
What's New in NX 9
243
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Duct Reinforcement
Graphics window
NX 9.0
Shipbuilding
Knuckled plates
What is it?
The Plate and plate system commands are enhanced to automatically identify knuckles when you select mold faces
or bodies that are not tangent continuous.
You can specify a split or bend manufacturing process for the knuckle.
You can select a highlighted knuckle edge to split a plate into two separate plates with mitered edges.
If you select a knuckle edge to split a plate system in basic design, a seam is created at the knuckle location
and separate plates will be generated when you transition the plate system to the detailed design.
If you do not select a knuckle edge, the plate or plate system is bent and you can define a fillet. You can
specify the ratio of the fillet radius to the plate thickness.
What's New in NX 9
245
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Hull
Bulkhead
Location in dialog box
, Deck
, Transverse Bulkhead
, Longitudinal
Application
Command Finder
Plate
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
The Stiffener System command identifies a knuckle when you select placement geometry or paths that
are not tangent continuous.
You can create a seam at a knuckle location to control whether a split or bend manufacturing process is
applied. When you transition the stiffener system to the detailed design, NX splits it into multiple stiffeners
if a seam is present, and bends the resulting stiffener if no seam is present. Wedge cuts are added to bent
stiffeners when they are transitioned to the detailed design.
You can specify the maximum height of stiffeners that can be bent in the customer defaults. If you try to
transition a stiffener system that exceeds the maximum height, the transition report includes a message that
the bending knuckle is not allowed and you must split the system.
The Edge Reinforcement System command identifies a bent knuckle when you select a path that
includes an arc with a small radius. You can specify the maximum radius using the Knuckle Edge
Reinforcement Maximum Bend Radius option in the customer defaults.
You can create a seam at a knuckle location to split the edge reinforcement system when you transition it to
the detailed design.
What's New in NX 9
247
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Stiffener System
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
NX 9.0
Knuckled profiles
What is it?
The Stiffener/Edge Reinforcement command is enhanced to automatically identify knuckles when you select
placement geometry or paths that are not tangent continuous.
If you choose None, NX creates a single profile with sharp corners at the knuckle locations and you can
manually apply knuckle treatments.
If you choose Split, NX creates two separate profiles with mitered edges.
If you choose Bend, NX adds a wedge cut to the stiffener. The wedge cut can be in the web of the stiffener
when the placement faces are knuckled, or in the flange of the stiffener when the path is not tangent
continuous. You can specify wedge cut parameters in the customer defaults.
To apply a bend to a knuckle in an edge reinforcement, the path must contain a radius with a small arc. You
can specify the Knuckle Edge Reinforcement Maximum Bend Radius in the customer defaults.
NX assigns an attribute, MK_KNUCKLE_TYPE=Bend to the edges produced by the knuckles so they can be
identified downstream in structural drawings. If a wedge cut is applied, NX also assigns attributes to the
wedge cut faces for the parameters.
You can specify the maximum height of stiffeners that can be bent in the customer defaults. The Bend
option is not available if a stiffener exceeds the maximum height or if the stiffener section cannot be bent in
the specified direction.
What's New in NX 9
249
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Stiffener/Edge Reinforcement
Location in dialog box
Knuckles group
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
NX 9.0
In most cases, you select a start support object and an end support object to define the boundaries. These objects can
be stiffeners, edge reinforcements, or plates.
For example, if you use the Aligned to Start Support method, you can select a stiffener (1) as the start support
and a plate (2) as the end support. The new stiffener (3) is aligned with the start support and its path terminates at the
end support.
Command Finder
Stiffener System
Location in dialog box
What's New in NX 9
251
NX 9.0
Application
Command Finder
Stiffener/Edge Reinforcement
Location in dialog box
NX 9.0
You can:
Normal to Surface
Orthogonal
Linear Twist
Cubic Twist
Along Vector
Planar at Angle
Use the Linear Twist or Cubic Twist method to transition the stiffener between two different orientation
methods.
Command Finder
Stiffener System
What's New in NX 9
253
NX 9.0
Orientation group
Application
Command Finder
Stiffener/Edge Reinforcement
Location in dialog box
Orientation group
NX 9.0
Built-up profiles
What is it?
The profile and profile system commands are enhanced so you can define and manufacture profiles composed of
two or more plates welded together.
You can:
Use the Seam command to split the flanges and the webs of the profiles at independent locations.
Replace reference sets to display the built-up profiles as single solid bodies or separate web and flange
plates.
Assign a manufacturing mode to specify whether the web and flanges of the built-up profiles are cut and
bent to shape before they are joined or, joined before they are bent to the correct shape. You can assign the
manufacturing mode automatically when you create the profiles or assign them manually using the
BuiltUp Manufacturing Mode command.
Command Finder
Stiffener System
Location in dialog box
, Seam
, or Pillar System
Application
Command Finder
Stiffener/Edge Reinforcement
or Pillar
What's New in NX 9
255
NX 9.0
Application
Command Finder
BuiltUp Manufacturing Mode
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
NX 9.0
By default, when you select multiple plates for the placement geometry, NX infers the attachment plate based on the
thickness and offset differences, the stiffener length over each plate, and the number of thickness changes along the
path.
NX can account for a thickness change in one of the following ways:
Attach the stiffener to a thicker plate and maintain a gap with a thinner plate. The gap can later be filled
with a weld.
Attach the stiffener to a thinner plate and include a notch to avoid interference with a thicker plate.
Attach the stiffener to both plates so it sags from a thicker plate to a thinner plate.
You can specify the sag type, sag distances, and sag plate lengths in the customer defaults to control the
behavior for this condition.
You can also override the inferred behavior by explicitly selecting an attachment plate. In this case, you can only
create one stiffener at a time.
What's New in NX 9
257
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Stiffener/Edge Reinforcement
Location in dialog box
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
NX 9.0
After you select a single reinforcement face, NX automatically detects the other plates the bracket crosses. You can
use the Across Multiple Thicknesses option to de-select the plates. Material is added or subtracted from the
bracket to conform to the varying thicknesses of the selected plates.
Command Finder
Standard Part
Location in dialog box
Placement group
What's New in NX 9
259
NX 9.0
You can:
Select a seam, frame, or ship structure as a tool to split the standard part.
Control the split location by specifying an offset and angle from the selected tool.
Command Finder
Split Standard Part
NX 9.0
You can:
Split built-up profiles and specify a different offset for the flanges and webs.
Split standard parts using the same options that are available in the Split Standard Part command.
Command Finder
Split Ship Structure
What's New in NX 9
261
NX 9.0
Profile Transition
What is it?
Use the Profile Transition command to create transitions between adjacent profiles of different sizes. You can
select adjacent stiffeners, built-up profiles, or built-up pillars.
You must select at least one target profile and one boundary profile. The height and width of the boundary
cross section must be less than or equal to the height and width of the target cross section.
You can add the transition to the selected target or create separate web and face plates. The following rules
apply to the section types:
If the target and boundary are both extruded or rolled profiles and the transition is added to the
target, both profiles must have the same cross section type.
If the target is an extruded or rolled profile, the boundary cannot be a built-up profile.
You can customize the rules to determine the length of the transition in the parameter spreadsheet for
Profile Transition feature types specified in the Registration Spreadsheet. The remaining dimensions
of the transition are calculated from the target and boundary.
Command Finder
Profile Transition
NX 9.0
The default limit type is Neat Trim and you can select the type of connection between the target and the
selected limit object from a Connection Type list. The list includes the same connection types that are
currently available in the Stiffener System command.
Connected
Flange Free
Sniped
You can define custom rules in the registration spreadsheet to automatically filter the available section
types and determine parameters based on the selected stiffener and bounding geometry.
You can add an end cut to a built-up profile consisting of multiple parts. Selecting the end face of one of
the parts automatically selects the corresponding ends of the other parts. You can define three separate cuts
(web, flange, and toe) and the sections can be customized in the registration spreadsheet.
If you select edge reinforcements, they are automatically detected as special cases and only flange cuts are
applied. The options for web and toe cuts are hidden.
You can apply flared end cuts to edge reinforcements and built-up profiles. These end cuts can be defined
and controlled in the registration spreadsheet.
Command Finder
End Cut
What's New in NX 9
263
NX 9.0
Use the new Select Intersecting Profile check box to automatically find stiffeners that intersect the
selected target object. This saves time since you do not have to manually select the stiffeners.
Use a separate option to specify tightness when you edit a profile cutout.
Automatically choose the profile cutout based on the tightness and section type as defined in the
registration spreadsheet.
Define rules to automatically choose the profile cutout parameters. You can customize these rules in a
spreadsheet located at NXSHIP_DIR\data\steelfeature\Rule\nxship_profile_cutout_rule.xls.
Optionally apply corner cuts when you create a profile cutout. When you edit a profile cutout, you can
specify the shape of the corner cuts in the Corner Cuts group in the dialog box.
Automatically create collar plates as you add profile cutouts. You can specify rules in a spreadsheet to
determine the correct collar plate.
Edit the TOP_OFFSET (1) and BASE_OFFSET (2) parameters of a profile cutout to produce a wide
profile cutout.
NX 9.0
The angle produced by the offset must be equal to or less than 30 degrees. You can use the Examine
Steel Features command to validate this rule.
Command Finder
Profile Cutout
What's New in NX 9
265
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Standard Part
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Examine Steel Features
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
What's New in NX 9
267
NX 9.0
Paint Parameters
What is it?
Paint Parameters lets you copy the parameters of a source feature and paste (paint) them onto existing target
features of the same type. The geometric inputs (selections) remain the same.
Source Feature
Target Features
Once you select a source feature, you can use the Use Component Selection to Select Features option to
select all compatible target features from a selected component.
If the features are in different parts, wave links are created to support the painting of geometric limits if required.
Feature parameters are painted only onto the same type features (such as stiffener to stiffener).
Only a limited set of features in the Ship Structure Detail Design application is supported at this time:
Plate
End Cut
Profile Cutout
Corner Cut
Edge Cut
Weld Joint
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Only certain Ship Structure Detail Design features currently support Paint
Parameters
Command Finder
Paint Parameters
Menu
MenuEditFeaturePaint Parameters
What's New in NX 9
269
NX 9.0
Vehicle Design
Vehicle loading input to vision tools
What is it?
You can now specify the vehicle loading factor as an input to the vision tools in one of these ways:
Note
To find the customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults and click Find
Default
When you use the Vehicle Packaging wizard, for all the vision tools in this wizard, NX uses the default vehicle
loading defined for the Eyellipse command.
Modeling
Command Finder
Mirror Certification
Eyellipse
Windshield Vision Zones
Direct Field of View
A-Pillar Obstruction
Glazing Shade Bands
Vision Planes
NX 9.0
You can filter validation results by their status. For example, you can view only the results that are passed or failed.
You can view the following vehicle design validation results.
Vehicle design validation result
What's New in NX 9
271
NX 9.0
[Wizard or dialog box for any command that generates a vehicle design
validation result]View Results in Vehicle Packaging
Validation
NX 9.0
Head Impact
Use the Head Impact command to define the upper roof zone and to generate head impact data such as target
points and approach angles on the upper interior components of a vehicle. This command generates head impact
data that complies with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 201U.
You can generate the target points and approach angles to the specifications of international vehicle design standards
or in accordance with user-defined dimensions.
You can generate head impact data for the following interior components of a vehicle:
A-pillar
Upper roof
You must generate this data after the A-pillar data and before you generate head impact data for any of the
following components.
B-pillar
Rear pillar
Additional pillars
Front header
Rear header
Side rail
You can use the generated head impact data in various head impact tests that are performed to reduce the likelihood
of severe head injuries regardless of the type of vehicle collision.
Modeling
Command Finder
Head Impact
What's New in NX 9
273
NX 9.0
Chinese
Perform upper leg impact tests on the bonnet and the bumper.
Specify the diameter of the testing rod and the leg impact spreadsheet file.
You can specify these values in the Standards Settings dialog box or set default values using
the Leg Impact References and Leg Impact Spreadsheet customer defaults.
NX 9.0
Headform grid points are generated along the centerline at a distance of 100 mm from the 1000 Wrap
Around Distance (WAD) line to the 2100 WAD line.
Headform circles are generated around each headform grid point and have the diameter of the headform.
For each headform grid point, a tooltip displays the coordinates for each headform grid point with
respect to the centerline. It also displays the alphabet A or C to indicate if the grid point is created
for an adult or a child.
What's New in NX 9
275
NX 9.0
View information in the test results on headform circles and on the headform grid points including their
tooltips.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Pedestrian Protection
Customer defaults
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
NX 9.0
Eyellipse enhancements
What is it?
You can now use the Eyellipse command to:
Create an eyellipse feature that is consistent with SAE standard J941 revised in March 2010.
Create head contours consistent with SAE standard J1052 revised in September 2010.
Specify the ground line as an input to create eyellipse, head contours, and ECE vision points.
On the Class & Percentile page of the wizard, the Inclusive Eyellipse 99% and Both Inclusive Eyellipse
options are added to the Eyellipse Percentile list. Use these options to create an eyellipse for class A vehicles.
On page 2 of the Vehicle Parameter step, the BOFRP Length Coordinate (L1) and BOFRP Height
Coordinate (H1) options are added. Use these option to define the length and height of the eyellipse centroid with
respect to the Ball of Foot Reference Point (BOFRP).
Note
You cannot use the PRP Length Coordinate (L1) option on page 2 of the Vehicle Parameter
step to define the eyellipse centroid consistent with SAE standard J941 revised in March 2010.
You cannot use the EEC 77/649 standard to define vision points.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Eyellipse
What's New in NX 9
277
NX 9.0
2D Manikin enhancements
What is it?
You can now use the 2D Manikin command to:
Create a 2D manikin that is consistent with the SAE standard J826 revised in November 2008.
Create a standard Chinese 2D manikin by using one of the four standard dimension files for a Chinese
human body.
You can access the standard dimension files from the following location:
$UGII_BASE_DIR\ugautomotive\packaging\$UG_VPACK_DIR\Data
Display the driving posture and joint angle check results in the new Vehicle Packaging Validation
HD3D tool.
The Back Angle (A40) and Pedal Plane Angle (A47) options are renamed as Torso Angle (A40) and Shoe
Plane Angle (A47) respectively on the Posture Definition page in the Manikin wizard.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
2D Manikin
NX 9.0
Create seat position lines that are consistent with the SAE standard J1516 revised in October 2011.
The range of the seat lines height relative to the heal point is changed to 127-405 mm.
Create seat position lines for class A vehicles by defining the Ball Of Foot Reference Point (BOFRP)
length.
Note
The PRP Length Coordinate (L1) option is removed from the Input Parameters page in the
Driver Selected Seat Position Lines wizard.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Toolbar
Seat Lines
What's New in NX 9
279
NX 9.0
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Vehicle Design
NX 9.0
Create a direct field of view that complies with SAE standard J1050 revised in February 2009.
Display the check results of the left, right, up, and down angle in the new Vehicle Packaging
Validation HD3D tool.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Vehicle Design
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Instrument Panel Visibility
What's New in NX 9
281
NX 9.0
Calculate and validate the percentage of the wiped area based on SAE standard J902 revised in August
2011 and SAE standard J198 revised in July 2003.
Specify the ground line as an input to define the windshield vision zone.
Display the A, B, and C percent wiped area validation results in the new Vehicle Packaging Validation
HD3D tool.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Windshield Vision Zones
NX 9.0
Certify the rear view, the driver side, and the passenger side mirrors for the following stsndards:
o
Define the instruction field position either on a target wall or on the surface of the road.
Display the mirror certification results in the new Vehicle Packaging Validation HD3D tool.
Vision cones
You can now create the following vision cones:
Eye to Mirror
Displays the vision cone originating from the eyes to the mirror.
What's New in NX 9
283
NX 9.0
Mirror to Target
Displays the vision cone originating from the mirror to the target.
1 Side mirror
2 Target wall
3 Mirror to target vision cone for left eye
4 Mirror to target vision cone for right eye
Vision fields
You can now define the shape of the vision field for the target wall as a triangle or rectangle.
Triangle
Rectangle
Modeling
Prerequisite
You must define the vehicle coordinate system and create the Eyellipse
feature.
Command Finder
Mirror Certification
NX 9.0
PCB Exchange
User interface enhancements in PCB Exchange
What is it?
All existing NX PCB Exchange dialog boxes have been upgraded to have a consistent look-and-feel with the rest of
NX.
This enhancement introduces the following improvements:
In particular, when you want to modify the attributes of components, areas, or holes, the selection is now
done in the same dialog box as the modification of attributes.
In previous releases, this was done in two steps using two different dialog boxes.
When importing the ECAD model, you can now filter the board file extension directly in the Open dialog
box.
In previous releases, you set the ECAD file extension for the board and component library in the PCB
Exchange Settings dialog box prior to import.
In previous releases, the command opened a first Compare and Update PCA dialog box to let you set
the compare options and run the comparison, then a second Compare and Update PCA dialog box to let
you set the update options and run the update.
What's New in NX 9
285
NX 9.0
Tag Model as
Baseline
Tags the current model as the baseline file for the ECAD MCAD collaboration with IDX.
This command replaces the Track Changes command from NX 8.5.
Import
Incremental Data
Imports the incremental data from the IDX incremental file to let you accept or reject the
changes. This command replaces the Import Changes command from NX 8.5.
Export
Incremental Data
Exports the current design changes to the IDX incremental file. This command replaces the
Export Changes command from NX 8.5.
Import External
Data
Imports electrical data such as traces, pads, and solder mask from an external IDX file.
This information is read-only and cannot be collaborated. Electrical data is overwritten
each time this command is invoked.
Export Current
Baseline
PCB Exchange
Command Finder
Import Baseline or Tag Model as Baseline
Incremental Data
Import External Data
Menu
or Import
or
NX 9.0
What's New in NX 9
287
NX 9.0
Copper Area
What is it?
Use the new Copper Area
command to assign attributes to copper area. A copper area can be a sketch,
sheet body, or solid body. The copper area may have a thickness.
Copper areas can be used in the ECAD MCAD collaboration with IDX.
PCB Exchange
Command Finder
Copper Area
Menu
NX 9.0
where Xbounding box and Ybounding box are distance tolerances in X and Y directions that are defined in
NxComparePinToleranceX and NxComparePinToleranceY variables in the pcbx_ug_model.ini file.
When at least one of these conditions is not true, PCB Exchange:
Generates an HTML report in the working directory and loads it into the Web Browser navigator.
PCB Exchange
Menu
PCB ExchangeSettings
What's New in NX 9
289
NX 9.0
PCB Exchange
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Show Test Points
Menu
NX 9.0
Chapter 3: CAM
CAM general
Notes in Manufacturing
What is it?
You can add multiple lines of informative text to any operation.
The Notes dialog box is available in all operation dialog boxes. It is also available from the shortcut menu in the
Operation Navigator.
In the Operation Navigator the Notes column can be added by right-clicking in the navigator column area and
the selecting ColumnNotes. The
the note, pause your cursor on the icon.
icon Indicates that there are notes stored with the operation. To display
Within the Notes dialog box you can cut, paste, copy, insert text from a file, and save your notes as a text file.
Note
The mom variable mom_operation_notes outputs operation notes for post and shop documents.
CAM
291
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Notes
Operation Navigator
Right-click an operationNotes
CAM
292
NX 9.0
Descriptions in Manufacturing
What is it?
You can add a description to any program, operation, geometry group, or method. The description can be viewed in
all four views of the operation navigator.
The Description box is displayed on the tool, program, operation, method, and geometry dialog box by default. If
the Description box is not displayed, you must customize the dialog box.
Note
The mom variables mom_operation_description, mom_geometry_description,
mom_method_description, mom_program_description,and
mom_carrier_descriptionmom_head_description, and mom_pocket_description output the descriptions
for post and shop documentation. The variable mom_operation_notes outputs operation notes post and shop
documentation.
CAM
293
NX 9.0
After
Note
From a geometry group or operation dialog, the geometry is displayed in the color used for the blank, with
the translucency of the display properties of the object.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Some or all of the solid geometry selected for the CAM object is hidden.
Operation Navigator
CAM
294
NX 9.0
NX automatically closes gaps in the boundary as you select the boundary segments.
CAM
295
NX 9.0
The graphics display clearly shows the boundary plane and the projection vector.
You can easily identify the start point, end point, boundary direction, and tool side for each boundary.
Boundary selected:
1 Start point
2 Tool side indicator (left)
3 Direction arrow
4 Tool position indicator (Tanto)
5 End point
The graphics display includes any custom offsets for the boundary and for individual members.
Boundary member selected:
1 Section label
2 Custom boundary Offset input box
3 Custom boundary Member Offset input box
4 Selected boundary member
Usage
The new boundary user interface is available in Milling when you do the following:
Specify part, blank, check or trim boundaries within a Mill Bnd geometry group.
Specify trim boundaries inside Floor Wall, Plunge Milling, Cavity Milling, Zlevel, Zlevel 5axis, and
surface contouring operations.
CAM
296
NX 9.0
The old interface is currently used for all other boundaries defined within Milling and all boundaries in Turning and
Wire EDM. When you create boundaries with the old interface, NX now automatically closes gaps in the boundary
as you select the boundary segments.
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Create Geometry
Location in dialog box
[Milling operation] dialog boxGeometry groupCreate New
Create Geometry or New Geometry dialog boxType
listmill_planar, mill_contour, mill_multi-axisGeometry
Subtype groupMILL_BND
CAM
297
NX 9.0
Extend
Direct
Member 1
Member 2
Manufacturing
CAM
298
NX 9.0
Name
Path
Dependencies
GEOMETRY
Unused Items
MCS_MAIN
WORKPIECE_1
MCS
MILL_CONTROL
FLR_WALL_TOP
FLR_WALL_WALL
CAVITY_MILL
DRILLING
MILL_BND
WORKPIECE_2
MCS_1
MILL_CONTROL_1
FLR_WALL_TOP_1
CAM
299
NX 9.0
FLR_WALL_WALL_1
CAVITY_MILL_1
DRILLING_1
MILL_BND_1
MCS
HOLE_BOSS_GEOM
MILL_AREA
DRILL_GEOM
MILL_BND
MILL_GEOM
The Paste Inside with Reference option will be available for most milling and drilling operations.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Menu
CAM
300
NX 9.0
Set minimum and maximum limits for the analysis to limit the fringe plot to a thickness range.
Set precise range divisions to control the plot color for each defined range.
The following examples show fringe plots and measurements from cuts taken on the part shown:
CAM
301
NX 9.0
When Specify Point is active, you can click the screen at any point. The remaining stock at that point is shown as
a Distance measurement from the selected IPW facet to the part surface.
Manufacturing
Operation Navigator
CAM
302
NX 9.0
If you set the values, NX saves the machining record with the specified values.
To set the values, select the Cut Depth
or Stepover
check boxes.
If you do not set the values, NX saves the machining record with a -1 entry in the Cut Depth and
Stepover columns. The -1 tells NX not to set a value.
LIbref
Diameter
Length
Cut Depth
Stepover
THSO_00...
2.5
7.5
-1
-1
THSO_00...
.3
.3
THSO_00...
12
.4
.4
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Operation Navigator
CAM
303
NX 9.0
NX 9
Manufacturing
Operation Navigator
CAM
304
NX 9.0
Milling enhancements
Machining with a T-Cutter
Machining with a T-Cutter
NX now provides the following support for machining slots, grooves, and underneath ledges with a T-Cutter.
CAM
A new Groove Milling operation to efficiently machine linear slots and grooves.
Positioning, geometry selection, engage, and retract enhancements in Fixed Contour operations using the
Boundary drive method.
305
NX 9.0
When you use the Boundary drive method in Fixed Contour operations, you can now do the following:
Position the top edge of a T-Cutter to cut under different ledge shapes. The ledges can be flat or contoured.
To project the tool axis up from underneath ledges, use the new Tool Axis Up projection vector.
Note
This Tool Axis Up projection vector is also available in variable-axis surface contouring
operations.
Select solid or sheet body ledge faces as part geometry and project the boundary curves to create drive
geometry for the operation.
Specify separate values for the linear extensions before and after arc engages or retract moves.
NX applies the neck and shank clearance according to the collision check status.
CAM
306
NX 9.0
You can also select sheet bodies as part geometry and project the edge curves to create the drive boundary.
1 Sheet body selected as part geometry
2 Boundary plane
3 Drive boundary
4 Tool path
For arc engage moves, the option is now called Extend before Arc.
For arc retract moves, the option is now called Extend after Arc.
For arc engage moves, the new option is Extend after Arc.
For arc retract moves, the new option is Extend before Arc.
These options let you specify separate values for the extensions before and after an arc move.
CAM
307
NX 9.0
2 Final retract
For legacy operations, the previous Linear Extension value is the default value for both Extend before Arc and
Extend after Arc.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use a Fixed Contour operation with the Boundary drive
method.
CAM
308
NX 9.0
Groove geometry
You define the groove geometry once. NX subtracts the in-process feature for each operation from the material
remaining in the groove. You can:
Specify the areas to machine from within the operation using the Groove Geometry
inherit the groove geometry from a feature group.
Control how NX calculates the in-process feature by using the in-process workpiece options.
o
CAM
command, or
To extend the in-process feature to the end of the in-process workpiece, select the Use 3D option.
309
NX 9.0
To include only the material in the groove, select the None option.
Preview
Preview
Display
CAM
310
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Create Operation
Location in dialog box
CAM
311
NX 9.0
Duplicates the original corner pass, including cut direction, to create a floor or ceiling pass and a wall pass.
2.
Offsets the floor or ceiling pass away from the wall by the specified value.
3.
Offsets the wall pass away from the floor or ceiling by the specified value.
4.
In the cutting sequence, replaces the single original corner pass with the offset pair. The floor or ceiling
pass is first. The wall pass is second.
The following example uses a Relief Clearance value of 1 mm so that you can see how the option affects the tool
path. This value is typically around 0.01 mm.
Result
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
312
NX 9.0
NX lists the tracking point names in the Tracking Points dialog box.
For Planar Profile and Groove Milling operations, you can select one of these tracking points to output tracking
data or you can select Contact Point to output contact data. For Groove Milling operations, there are two
additional options:
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Tracking points:
Create Tool dialog boxTool Subtype groupT CutterMilling
Tool-T Cutter dialog boxMore tabTracking groupTracking
PointsTracking Points dialog box
Output tracking data:
[Operation dialog box]Path Settings groupNon Cutting
Moves
Non Cutting Moves dialog boxMore tabCutter
Compensation groupOutput Contact/Tracking
Data
Tracking Data list
CAM
313
NX 9.0
1 Drive point
2 Boundary geometry
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
314
NX 9.0
You can also select one of the automatic Tracking Data options for NX to automatically use the appropriate
tracking point. When the cutter machines with the top of the tool, it uses one of the top tracking points. When the
cutter machines with the bottom of the tool, it uses one of the bottom tracking points.
The tracking point that NX uses depends on the following, and can change between each cutting pass.
P1 = SYS_CL_Bottom
P2 = SYS_CL_Top
P3 = SYS_OD_Bottom
P4 = SYS_OD_Top
CAM
315
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
316
NX 9.0
In-process features
What is it?
An in-process feature represents the volume of material to remove in a single operation. All of the in-process
features must be removed to completely machine the feature.
If you select the Local or 3D IPW in-process workpiece options, NX tracks the volume remaining in a feature after
each operation of the machining sequence. Each subsequent operation in the machining sequence subtracts its inprocess feature volume from the remaining volume.
The following example shows a feature to machine and the in-process feature volume for a drilling operation. The
initial feature volume minus the drilling in-process feature equals the remaining feature volume.
NX infers the in-process feature dimensions for each operation. You can modify the dimensions from the Hole or
Boss Geometry dialog box. If you select the 3D IPW option, the in-process feature volume extends to the end of
the in-process workpiece.
Each displayed in-process feature depends on the following:
The type of hole: Hole, Threaded Hole, Centered Hole, or Chamfered Hole.
CAM
317
NX 9.0
2.
3.
The MILL_FINISH operation finishes the counter bore floor and wall.
4.
Operation
Initial feature
volume
Remaining
feature volume
DRILL
MILL_ROUGH
MILL_FINISH
REAM
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Tapping, Thread Milling, or Groove
Milling.
CAM
318
NX 9.0
BossDisplay
STEP_2_HOLE example
This example shows the operation sequence to completely machine a STEP2HOLE feature.
Operation Navigator Geometry
Sample part
MCS_MILL
WORKPIECE
FG_STEP2HOLE
SPOT_DRILLING
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING
THREAD_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING_1
The following graphics show the material removed by each operation in the machining sequence.
SPOT_DRILLING
CAM
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
319
NX 9.0
COUNTERSINKING
THREAD_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING_1
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Thread Milling, or Groove Milling
CAM
320
NX 9.0
Ball mills, spherical mills, and end mills with a diameter of twice the cutter radius
CAM
321
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Create Operation
Location in dialog box
CAM
322
NX 9.0
Axis of rotation
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Create Geometry
Location in dialog box
CAM
323
NX 9.0
Manually tilt the entire tool path to any 3+2 axis orientation by specifying spherical angles.
Manually tilt the entire tool path towards or away from a point or 3D curve before NX performs the
collision check and creates avoidance moves.
Specify what NX should do when the initial tool position could cause a tool gouge, or a collision with the
shank or holder. You can automatically do the following:
o
Avoid pole transition by defining a minimum angle for the swing/tilt axis.
Turn off collision checking in the operation and generate an initial tool path that positions the tool in the entire
machining area without considering tool neck, shank, or holder collisions. You can then use the Tilt Tool Axis
command to create a collision-free tool path that considers the machine tool limits and swing/tilt characteristics.
For example, you can create a tool path that positions the ball portion of the tool in undercut areas, and then use the
Tilt Tool Axis command to produce an optimized tool path without collisions.
Eliminate collisions and gouges from any fixed-axis or variable-axis tool path by retracting the tool.
Prevent neck, shank, and holder collisions in a 5-axis machine tool by tilting the tool.
Fit the generated tool path to the rotary axis and swinging axis constraints of the machine tool.
CAM
324
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Operation Navigator
The tool must have a ball shape where the lower radius of
the tool = of the diameter of the tool.
CAM
Check Tool
325
NX 9.0
If there is a valid kinematics model, NX uses the coordinate system of the Machine Zero junction.
2.
If there is no kinematics model, and an MCS geometry group is defined, NX uses the coordinate system of
the parent MCS. If more than one MCS geometry group is defined, NX uses the coordinate system of the
highest level parent MCS. For this example, operations 1 and 2 use the coordinate system defined for
MCS_MILL1. Operations 3 and 4 use the coordinate system defined for MCS_MILL2.
Operation Navigator Geometry
MCS_MILL1
WORKPIECE1
OPERATION_1
MCS_MILL1_TILTED
OPERATION_2
MCS_MILL2
WORKPIECE2
OPERATION_3
MCS_MILL2_LOCAL
OPERATION_4
3.
If MCS geometry groups are not defined, NX uses the absolute coordinate system.
If the rotary axis is not aligned with the +ZM axis of the machine tool coordinate system, use the Main MCS Axis
option to select the appropriate axis.
Prevent tool paths that cannot be milled by your machine. To do this, use the Max Angle option. Usually
this option controls your machine tool A or B limit.
For example, if your machine limits are between +30 and 115 degrees, set Max Angle to 115. Your post
handles the minus sign.
For special machine configurations, such as a rotary table with a 45 degree incline, consult with GTAC.
CAM
326
NX 9.0
(1) Motion is allowed within the Min Angle and Max Angle limits.
(2) Motion is not allowed beyond the Max Angle limit.
(3) Motion near the pole area is high-risk. The machine can do this motion, but the machining results are not
optimal. This limit is set by the Min Angle option.
Manufacturing
CAM
327
NX 9.0
2.
In the Operation Navigator, right-click the operation and choose Tool PathTilt Tool Axis.
3.
In the Tilt Tool Axis dialog box, set the Manual Tilting list to User Defined.
4.
Fixed
Use the Fixed option to define a fixed orientation using spherical angles, such as those used on a B-C dual axis fork
head.
Tilt Angle defines the amount of tilting from the +ZM axis.
Angle from +XM defines the rotation of the tilt plane about the +ZM axis, and is measured from the +XM
axis.
NX first rotates the tool axis around the +YM axis by the Tilt Angle value, then rotates the tool axis around the
+ZM axis by the Angle from +XM value. NX rotates positive angles in the counter clockwise direction.
CAM
328
NX 9.0
Toward Point
The Tilt Angle option sets the tilt angle inside the tilt plane.
The Tilt Rule option controls how NX measures the tilt angle inside the tilt plane. The tilt plane is defined by the
+ZM axis and a line through the tool position that intersects the selected guiding point.
Tilt Angle
Sets the tilt angle inside the tilt plane. How NX measures the value depends on the Tilt Rule setting.
Note
NX limits the applied tilt angle to a range that is within the values you enter for Min Angle and
Max Angle in the Swinging/Tilting Axis Limits group.
Tilt Rule
Controls how NX measures the tilt angle inside the tilt plane. The tilt plane is defined by the +ZM axis and
a line through the tool position that intersects the selected guiding point.
Away
Measures the tilt angle away from the line intersecting the guiding point towards the +ZM axis.
When Tilt Angle = 0, the tool axis intersects the guiding point. This tool axis behavior is similar
to that in variable-axis contouring operations, except for the following:
CAM
Collision avoidance
Limiting tilt to the minimum and maximum angle limits of the swinging/tilting machine axis.
Smoothing
329
NX 9.0
1 Guiding point
2 Line intersecting guiding point
1 Guiding point
2 Line intersecting guiding point
CAM
330
NX 9.0
Toward Snap
Measures the tilt angle from the +ZM axis towards the line intersecting the guiding point. The tool
axis snaps to the guiding point when the tilt angle through the point is smaller than the specified
Tilt Angle value. NX generates a 4+1 axis motion as long as the tool axis does not touch the
guiding point before the subsequent collision check.
Note
The Tilt Angle value for this rule should be larger than zero, or NX will not tilt the tool
axis prior to collision avoidance.
1 Guiding point
2 Line intersecting the guiding point
CAM
Toward Curve
331
NX 9.0
NX calculates the rotation around the +ZM axis by projecting the shortest distance vector from the tool position to a
reference point on the guiding curve.
The Shortest Distance setting controls how NX measures the distance. To generate the tilt plane, NX must
specify a reference point on the selected guiding curve that is the shortest distance from the tool position on the tool
path. The 2D option is best for planar curves. The 3D option is best for complex curves that do not have a single
clear orientation.
Shortest Distance = 2D
Shortest Distance = 3D
1 Reference point, 2 Defined curve, 3 Tool path, 4 Shortest distance, 5 Tilt plane
The Tilt Rule setting controls how NX measures the tilt angle inside the tilt plane. The tilt plane is defined by the
+ZM axis and a line through the tool position that intersects the reference point on the selected guiding curve.
Away with Shortest Distance = 2D
Measures the tilt angle away from the line that intersects the reference point on the selected guiding curve
towards the +ZM axis.
When Tilt Angle = 0, the tool axis intersects the reference point on the selected guiding curve.
1 Guiding curve
2 Line intersecting reference point on guiding curve
Tilt Angle = 0
CAM
332
NX 9.0
1 Guiding curve
2 Line intersecting reference point on guiding curve
Tilt Angle = 30
Toward Snap with Shortest Distance = 2D
Measures the tilt angle from the +ZM axis towards the line that intersects the reference point on the
selected guiding curve. The tool axis snaps to the guiding curve when the tilt angle through the reference
point on the curve is smaller than the specified Tilt Angle value. NX generates a 4+1 axis motion as long
as the tool axis does not touch the guiding curve before the subsequent collision check.
Note
The Tilt Angle value for this rule should be larger than zero, or NX will not tilt the tool axis prior
to collision avoidance.
1 Guiding curve
2 Line intersecting reference point on guiding curve
Tilt Angle = 30
Away with Shortest Distance = 3D
Measures the tilt angle away from the curve along a perpendicular vector.
CAM
333
NX 9.0
The region sizes. Merge or divide the regions as required. NX updates the cut region display as you make
modifications.
The regions to cut, and their cutting sequence. If the current operation is not appropriate for cutting some of
the regions, you can defer cutting the regions and import them into another operation. Delete regions to
completely avoid cutting certain areas.
The cut pattern and other tool path parameters within each cut region. Define a region as steep, non-steep
or flat, and NX applies the appropriate Area Milling Drive Method settings.
The tool and tool axis tilt. When NX identifies tool holder collisions in a region, use a longer version of the
tool, a different holder, or tilt the tool axis to avoid the collisions.
Previously, when you generated a surface contouring operation NX automatically divided the cut area into cut
regions and applied a cut pattern and start point to each region. You could not control what the regions looked like
or their cutting order. Now, you can accept the automatic cut regions, or you can define cut regions, cut patterns, and
start points to suit your workflow before generating the operation. NX uses the regions, cut patterns and start points
you defined instead of generating the automatic cut regions.
NX does the following automatically:
, invalid
, or out of date
A cut region becomes invalid if you change an operation parameter that defines the region. For example, if
you use a different tool. A cut region becomes out of date if you change a parameter that modifies the
region. For example, if you change the part stock.
or is collision-free
If you have not run the collision check, NX indicates that the collision status is unknown
If you manually run the collision check and only a portion of the cut region has collisions, the status is
partially colliding
, non-steep
, or flat
In the following example, cut regions 2, 3, 5, and 6 are cut using the current operation. Cut regions 1 and 4 have tool
holder collisions, and are deferred to cut using another operation.
Name
REGION_1
Type
Collision Status
Parent Operation
CONTOUR_AREA
CAM
334
NX 9.0
REGION_2
CONTOUR_AREA
REGION_3
CONTOUR_AREA
REGION_4
CONTOUR_AREA
REGION_5
CONTOUR_AREA
REGION_6
CONTOUR_AREA
Cut Regions list example
Manufacturing
Prerequisites
You need a fixed-axis surface contouring operation using the Area Milling drive method,
or a Contour Area operation.
A ball-nose mill is required to change the tool axis.
The non-steep Stepover Applied option must be set to On Plane.
To generate the tool path, you must turn off the Multi-Depth Cut cutting parameter
option.
CAM
335
NX 9.0
command to automatically divide the cut area into regions in the following
Based on whether a surface is more or less steep than the Steep Angle value for the operation.
Steep Angle = 45
Based on the surface steepness, with separate regions for flat areas.
Steep Angle = 45
Steep Angle = 45
CAM
336
NX 9.0
Specify a custom start point or change the settings for a selected region using the Edit
command.
CAM
337
NX 9.0
Select a longer version of the tool to avoid holder collisions using the Tool Collision
Avoidance
command.
Tilt the tool axis to avoid holder collisions using the Tool Collision Avoidance
command.
If only a portion of the cut region has collisions, you can use the Divide
command to create separate regions.
This lets you change the tool length or tool axis tilt for only the region with collisions.
CAM
338
NX 9.0
Display the cut regions. The interior lines in each region are selection lines that represent the cut region.
Select the Preview
check box to display the region start point and tool axis vector.
Preview
. If you have out of date regions, delete all the regions and create
Preview
Defer a region so that you can cut it with another Area Milling operation, or delete the region if you will
cut it with another type of operation. NX displays a green check
next to the regions to cut with the
current operation. Clear the check box
to defer a region.
CAM
339
NX 9.0
Filter the deferred regions when you import them into a new operation. The following example imports the
flat regions deferred from a previous operation.
Cut Regions dialog box settings
Result
Status = Deferred
CAM
340
NX 9.0
CAM
Reorder the region cutting sequence. By default, NX orders steep regions before non-steep regions. If you
create separate flat regions, they are ordered last.
Rename a region.
Undo changes. You can undo changes one at a time, from the most recent change to the first change. You
cannot undo changes after you exit the Cut Regions dialog box.
341
NX 9.0
Steep Angle = 35
Steep Angle = 35
CAM
342
NX 9.0
Divide By Holder
Use the Divide By Holder command in a semi-finishing or finishing operation to split the tool path to avoid
collisions and machine the entire cut area. You can split the tool path between tools of different lengths with
different tool holders, but the cutter must have the same shape and diameter. Dividing data can then be modified and
reapplied without having to regenerate the entire operation.
Shortest tool
Longest tool
The Divide by Holder command lets you predefine a sequence of tools and their specific parameters. NX stores
the data in the base operation. You can copy and paste the base operation into the current part or you can import the
tools and parameters as a template from one part file into another part file. The operation brings all the divided
holder data with it.
When using a Zig cut pattern, you can define overlaps, minimum cut length, and other controls, by using the Divide
at Collision option. This operation recognizes part geometry and check geometry but ignores Blank geometry and
the IPW.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
mill_contour operations Zlevel and Fixed Axis that contain a tool path.
Operation tool with a holder and or a shank, with Check Tool and Holder
turned off.
Zig and Zigzag cut patterns.
Command Finder
Divide by Holder
CAM
343
NX 9.0
Operation Navigator
Program Order View
Manufacturing
CAM
344
NX 9.0
CAM
345
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
346
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
A Zlevel operation
CAM
347
NX 9.0
A nominal extension lift that moves the tool off the part.
A maximum stepover distance beyond which the connection becomes a sequence of retract, traversal and
reengage motion.
The tolerance for drive point distribution along the connecting move.
The region distance beyond which the connection departures change to lowest safe Z or clearance plane.
The part safe clearance that assures that approach, departure, and traversal motions are at a safe distance
from the part. You can use this clearance to emulate an IPW.
When the maximum stepover distance is exceeded, the motion changes to a rapid motion at the default height for
transfer between regions. You can also apply corner smoothing to this rapid motion.
(1) Smooth stepover motions length and height are applied in proportion
(2) Smooth traversal motion length and height are fully applied
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Open the Non Cutting Moves dialog box from a contouring or flow cut
operation dialog box.
CAM
348
NX 9.0
Significant savings in machining time in cases where the blank has overhangs.
A more efficient tool path where you cannot use the Level Based IPW option.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
349
NX 9.0
Improves blade and blend finish quality for the helical cut pattern.
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Create Operation
Location in dialog box
Type listmill_multi_blade
CAM
350
NX 9.0
Hole machining
New manual drilling operations
What is it?
There are new dedicated operations for manual drilling.
The Spot Drilling, Drilling, Countersinking, and Tapping operations let you do the following:
Efficiently program holes without using the feature-based machining process to create operations. You can
center drill, drill, countersink, mill, and cut threads on previously recognized machining feature geometry
as well as on manually selected geometry such as points, arcs and cylindrical faces.
Select hole geometry from within the new operation or inherit hole geometry from a geometry parent
group.
You can use the same HOLE_BOSS_GEOM parent group as you do for hole milling and thread milling.
You can also use a feature group to improve efficiency for complex parts.
Choose a specific machining area of a previously recognized feature as the input geometry. The machining
areas let you use multiple operations to machine complex features.
For example, you can use separate operations to drill, counterbore, countersink, and tap on different
machining areas of a feature. You always have a graphical feedback of the in-process feature to show what
each operation machines.
Display the in-process features from the operation. You can display all the features in the feature group or
select individual features.
Create motion output for machine cycles or for single moves. There are additional cycles such as deep
tapping.
CAM
351
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Create Operation
Location in dialog box
, Create Geometry
, Drilling
, Tapping
CAM
352
NX 9.0
1.
2.
Hole Milling
2.
CAM
353
NX 9.0
3.
Create the first operation using a feature group as the geometry parent.
NX automatically adds a Drilling in-process feature to each machining feature.
FG_STEP2HOLE
STEP2HOLE_1
FG_STEP2HOLE_1
STEP2HOLE_2
DRILLING
STEP2HOLE_3
DRILLING
STEP2HOLE_4
DRILLING
4.
Create the next operation using the same feature group as the geometry parent.
NX automatically adds a Hole Milling in-process feature to each machining feature.
FG_STEP2HOLE
STEP2HOLE_1
FG_STEP2HOLE_1
STEP2HOLE_2
DRILLING
HOLE MILLING
STEP2HOLE_3
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
STEP2HOLE_4
CAM
354
NX 9.0
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
5.
View the list of features in each feature group in the Group Features and Hole or Boss Geometry dialog
boxes.
The following example shows features of the drilling_example part selected for grouping.
The graphic on the left shows ungrouped features selected in the feature view of the Machining Feature
Navigator. The graphic on the right shows the same features as part of a feature group in the group view of the
Machining Feature Navigator.
DRILLING_EXAMPLE
STEP2HOLE_29
CAM
MCS_MILL
WORKPIECE
STEP2HOLE_30
FG_STEP2HOLE
STEP2HOLE_31
STEP2HOLE_29
STEP2HOLE_32
STEP2HOLE_30
STEP2HOLE_33
STEP2HOLE_31
355
NX 9.0
STEP2HOLE_34
STEP2HOLE_34
STEP2HOLE_35
STEP2HOLE_35
STEP2HOLE_36
STEP2HOLE_36
Manufacturing
CAM
356
NX 9.0
In-process features
What is it?
An in-process feature represents the volume of material to remove in a single operation. All of the in-process
features must be removed to completely machine the feature.
If you select the Local or 3D IPW in-process workpiece options, NX tracks the volume remaining in a feature after
each operation of the machining sequence. Each subsequent operation in the machining sequence subtracts its inprocess feature volume from the remaining volume.
The following example shows a feature to machine and the in-process feature volume for a drilling operation. The
initial feature volume minus the drilling in-process feature equals the remaining feature volume.
NX infers the in-process feature dimensions for each operation. You can modify the dimensions from the Hole or
Boss Geometry dialog box. If you select the 3D IPW option, the in-process feature volume extends to the end of
the in-process workpiece.
Each displayed in-process feature depends on the following:
The type of hole: Hole, Threaded Hole, Centered Hole, or Chamfered Hole.
CAM
357
NX 9.0
2.
3.
The MILL_FINISH operation finishes the counter bore floor and wall.
4.
Operation
Initial feature
volume
Remaining
feature volume
DRILL
MILL_ROUGH
MILL_FINISH
REAM
CAM
358
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Tapping, Thread Milling, or Groove
Milling.
CAM
359
NX 9.0
STEP_2_HOLE example
This example shows the operation sequence to completely machine a STEP2HOLE feature.
Operation Navigator Geometry
Sample part
MCS_MILL
WORKPIECE
FG_STEP2HOLE
SPOT_DRILLING
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING
THREAD_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING_1
The following graphics show the material removed by each operation in the machining sequence.
SPOT_DRILLING
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
CAM
360
NX 9.0
COUNTERSINKING
THREAD_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING_1
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Thread Milling, or Groove Milling
CAM
361
NX 9.0
Calculates the volume to machine from the selected face, or from the machining area if the
operation uses a machining feature as the geometry parent. You can manually enter a depth
if you selected points or arcs. NX locates the CSYS that defines the start of the in-process
feature on top of the selected object.
Local
Calculates the volume to machine by subtracting the machining area volume from the
volume remaining within the local machining feature. If the geometry selected is a
machining feature, NX includes chamfers and radii.
Calculates the volume to machine by subtracting the machining area volume from the 3D
IPW volume. NX moves the CSYS up to the start of the 3D IPW, and extends the depth to
the bottom of the 3D IPW. This option accounts for previous operations in the same way as
the Local option.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Thread Milling, or Groove Milling
CAM
362
NX 9.0
Workflow
NX automatically creates machining areas for step hole features. You can group and name the faces of other features
into machining areas.
1.
2.
Add a new feature type to the features that NX can recognize. To do this, use the Teach Features command.
This command uses the PMI notes associated with the faces to define the machining areas. This example has
three faces marked as Walls and one face marked as Floor.
CAM
363
NX 9.0
3.
Find instances of the new feature type in the part to machine. To do this, use the Find Features command.
This command recognizes all instances of your new feature type. The feature machining areas are hidden by
default.
4.
Display the machining areas in the Machining Feature Navigator. To do this, use the Show Machining
Area command.
This command expands the machining feature nodes to show the machining areas.
clamp_plate
my_feature_1
clamp_plate
my_feature_1
my_feature_2
WALLS
my_feature_3
FLOOR
my_feature_2
WALLS
FLOOR
my_feature_3
WALLS
FLOOR
CAM
364
NX 9.0
5.
my_feature_1
WALLS
FLOOR
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
365
NX 9.0
Standard drill
Spot drill
Center drill
Step drill
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must set the Type to hole_making in the Create Tool dialog box.
Command Finder
Create Tool
Operation Navigator
CAM
366
NX 9.0
Core Drill
What is it?
Use the Core Drill type to enlarge an existing hole, such as those found in castings.
The Core Drill uses Point Angle and Point Length parameters to determine the shape of the tip. The core drill
has a flat across the tip of the drill.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must set Type to hole_making in the Create Tool dialog box.
Command Finder
Create Tool
Operation Navigator
CAM
367
NX 9.0
Probing
Probing
What is it?
NX now supports on-machine touch probing of turning operations and cutting tools used in milling and turning
operations. Both types of probing operations support the following:
Suboperations that let you rotate a probe about the tool axis and change probe tracking points
Output of probing cycles for Siemens CYCLE976, CYCLE977, and CYCLE978, sixteen HEIDENHAIN
400-series, and Universal Data Exchange (UDE) Fanuc controllers
Suboperations
Use suboperations to:
Inspect specific part areas such as points, cylinders, and planes by moving to safe points and changing the
probe axis, approach direction, and angle as necessary.
When you create a probing operation, the following operation subtypes are now available.
Mill Part Probing
Lets you inspect and measure milled parts. In this release, the tool path display during programming is changed from
the probe tip to the probe center.
CAM
368
NX 9.0
Turn Probe Point, which lets you set the probing direction and approach using a variety of direct and
combined axial/radial options.
Turn Linear Move to Point, which offers a similar variety of direct and combined axial/radial move
types.
Mill Tool Probing and Turn Tool Probing
Let you determine the exact length and diameter of cutting tools before or after they are used to verify whether a tool
is broken, damaged, or can be salvaged using offsets or other program modifications.
Verify the accuracy of dimensions and feature locations relative to other referenced features.
Retrieve final part measurement on a number of critical features to cross reference against Coordinate
Measuring Machine (CMM) results.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Create Operation
Manufacturing Wizards right-click
menu
CAM
369
NX 9.0
Turning enhancements
Centerline Drilling depth enhancement
What is it?
The new Depth Reference option is added to the centerline drilling depth options. This option gives you
additional control of drilling depths.
You can reference the drill depth based on an offset value from the tool tip or shoulder depth.
Tool tip
Shoulder depth
An offset of 20 is measured between the depth point and the tool shoulder.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Operation Navigator
CAM
370
NX 9.0
Clear Radial->Axial->Radial
Notice that the tool does not collide with the part.
Radial->Axial->Radial option
1: Local return point
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
A turning operation
CAM
371
NX 9.0
Cut a groove into the IPW leaving a thin connecting wall that can be easily snapped or cut.
Note
The Part Off Position and Depth will not be shown in the Path Settings group by default. To display
these options, the user has to customize the dialog box.
Use the following options to define the final depth:
Divide: The tool exactly reaches the centerline or the inside wall of the IPW. A depth extend parameter is
available to override the end position. In this situation both walls have remaining material due to the
rounding of the tool insert.
Clean First Wall: The tool stops after reaching the centerline or the inside wall of the IPW and one of the
walls is clean. A depth extend parameter is available to override the end position. In this situation the other
wall can have remaining material due to the asymmetry of the tool.
Clean Both Walls: The tool stops after reaching the centerline or the inside wall of the IPW ensuring
both of the walls are clean. A depth extend parameter can be used to override the end position. In this
situation none of the walls have remaining material due to the rounding of the tool insert.
Stock: The tool reaches a depth so a minimal thickness defined by a distance value will remain between
centerline and the cut surface or the inside wall of the IPW and the cut surface.
Distance: The active tool control point reaches a depth specified by a radius value relating to the
centerline.
CAM
372
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
A groove operation
CAM
373
NX 9.0
1. Infeed motion
2. Engage angle
2. Infeed length
3. Root line
3. Infeed angle
4. Retract motion
4. Start line
5. Crest line
You can now do the following for rough and finish passes of threading operations:
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
A threading operation
CAM
374
NX 9.0
All axes are read-only. The tool tip is positioned according to the
operation or NC Code.
Preview Motion
All axes are read-write. You can position the tool tip freely.
Fixed Contour
Appears when the tool axis is being set using the Dynamic
option.
All axes are read-write. The tool tip is fixed for rotary axes.
Editing a tool
All axes are read-write. You can position the tool tip freely.
Variable Contour
Appears when the tool axis is being set using the Interpolate
Vector option.
Linear axes are read-only. Rotary axes are read-write. The tool tip
is fixed for rotary axes.
Generic Motion
NX retains the opened or closed state of the Machine Axis Positions dialog box until you change it.
The red icon beside the Y-axis shows a limit violation.
The dialog box shows the limit, 250. The slider shows the
axis at the limit, and the text box shows value that caused
the violation, 255.
The mouse cursor is over the icon for the V-axis, and the
tooltip that appears shows the current distances of that
axis to the minimum and maximum limits.
CAM
375
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Operation Navigator
Machine Axis
Machine
CAM
376
NX 9.0
Set the machine axes and components to their position at that point.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
must be available.
Operation Navigator
CAM
377
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
available
CAM
378
NX 9.0
Select one file for each channel that is defined in the machine kinematic model.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
An external machine code file for each channel that is being simulated.
Menu
CAM
379
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Operation Navigator
CAM
380
NX 9.0
Zlevel operations
Fixed axis surface contouring operations with the following drive methods:
o
Area Milling
Streamline
Flowcut
The following example shows a tool path that was verified in Replay mode using these options:
The following example shows the same verified tool path, with:
Tool Trace=None
CAM
381
NX 9.0
You can view previously generated tool contact representations. To do this, select the operation in the Operation
Navigator while the Tool Path Visualization dialog box is open with the Show Tool Contact check
box
selected.
Note
You must generate the operation with the Save Contact Display Data check box
selected.
Manufacturing
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
Verify an operation
Operation Navigator
CAM
382
NX 9.0
CAM
383
NX 9.0
You can now associate axis parameters and dynamic data in kinematic chains in the Machine Tool Builder
application in NX. In previous releases, to do this, you had to open the MCF file in the CSE Machine
Configurator application.
A kinematic chain identifies two branches of the kinematic model. The tool is mounted at the end of one
branch and the part is mounted at the end of the other branch. The intermediate axes are articulated during
simulation. The CSE uses kinematic chains to configure the results for the TRAORI command.
CSE developers can now access the Machine Configurator directly from an NX machine code simulation,
by clicking Start Machine Configurator
The Common Simulation Engine (CSE) Machine Configurator is an external Windows-only application
used by a CSE developer to access the machine configuration files *.mcf and controller configuration files
*.ccf.
A machine tool with co-linear axes like Z and W where one axis is used for positioning and the other for
cutting motions.
Machines with three rotaries, one in the table for pre-positioning, and the other two doing 5-axis cutting
motions.
Machines with changeable heads where the heads alter a fixed tool orientation or add NC axes.
CAM
384
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
385
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
386
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Menu
PreferencesManufacturingVisualization tab
All NX applications
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
CAM
387
NX 9.0
To recalculate the IPW and display it at the currently specified resolution, click OK
To halt the verification, click Cancel. You can then change the current settings to match the reported
needle distance.
The saved IPW is not updated until you choose Save from the IPW list and regenerate the IPW.
The Coarse, Medium, and Fine resolutions are controlled by the Needle Distance and Needle Count
customer defaults. If you change the Needle Distance or the Needle Count customer defaults, you will not see
the changes in the current session. The changes appear in future NX sessions, and the IPW Update dialog box
appears for any resolution setting that was changed.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
388
NX 9.0
Your specified parameters for the tool and holder. To do this, use the Tool Parameters option.
The shape of an entire solid tool assembly. To do this, use the Solid Assembly option.
A solid tool assembly can have components such as inserts for which you do not enter parameters.
Manufacturing
Command Finder
Gouge Check
Operation Navigator
CAM
389
NX 9.0
Create an assembly tree consisting of imported part files, imported STL bodies, or primitives.
Remove geometric features such as slots, holes, chamfers, and fillets from any component.
Define global stock, clearance values, or minimum distance for the collision avoidance geometry of the
machine tool.
Detect potential collisions and collisions during simulated machine tool movement.
This illustration shows a collision being detected between faceted representations of a simplified model of the
machine and the workpiece.
A command to identify placeholder objects to represent the size and shape of cutting tools.
Prerequisite
CAM
390
NX 9.0
CAM
The sim15_millturn_dual_channel sample is enhanced with an updated cam example, improved sub spindle
programming, and movable jaws on the chucks.
The sim05_5axis_xyzac_head sample now includes an Okuma post example and Okuma CSE files.
391
NX 9.0
The sim03_mill_4ax_cam_sinumerik_tombstone sample shows the new Paste with Reference feature,
and the accompanying post outputs subroutines to repeat the cutting moves at the location of each part.
CAM
392
NX 9.0
CCF structure
You can now use a basic CCF for similar machines. This makes it easy for you to share common methods and to
maintain configurations. You can introduce variations for individual controllers in separate CCF files. The MCF file
controls which CCF files are read, and the order in which they are read.
Postprocessor examples
Postprocessor examples are included in your NX ${UGII_CAM_POST_DIR} folder. Additional examples are
available in NX 9.
CAM
The template post for Heidenhain iTNC now outputs CYLCLE 247 and CYCLE 7 to define and set
coordinate systems.
The Fanuc template post includes turning cycles G71, G72, and G70. To output G71 or G72 cycles for
rough turning, set Motion Output to Machine Cycle. To output the G70 cycle in rough turn operations,
turn on Add Profiling, set Strategy to Finish All, and set Profile stock values to zero.
A new Sinumerik840D template post has basic functionality, including TRAORI and CYCLE800, but not
ORIWKS/ORIMKS or 3D cutter compensation. The following commands are in a template .tcl file that
you can import.
o
The DPP_GE_COOR_ROT_AUTO3D command detects if the operation is 3+2 axes without local
CSYS rotation.
393
NX 9.0
NX 9
Manufacturing
Operation Navigator
CAM
394
NX 9.0
NX Post
Adding CAM attributes for shop documentation in the post
What is it?
You can now use a Tcl command to set an attribute on a CAM program or operation. You can read these attributes
in a shop documentation template file.
In Post Builder, the Tcl syntax for the command is
MOM_set_attribute <object_name> <attribute_title> <attribute information array>.
The attribute information array has predefined indices, VALUE, TYPE, and CATEGORY. You must set the value
(VALUE) to the value of the attribute, and the type (TYPE) to the NX attribute type, typically "String".
Optionally, you can set an attribute category (CATEGORY).
The shop documentation template format has not changed. To read an attribute, the format is
${mom_attr_<type><name>[<category>] }, where
<type> is PROGRAMVIEW or OPER
<name> is the same as the attribute name that you assign in Tcl
[<category>] is an optional attribute category
In the shop documentation template file, use program attributes in the title section or in the table section. Use
operation attributes only in the table section.
A post created the attribute category POSTPROCESSOR_ADDED, two attributes, and values for the two
attributes.
Post Builder
CAM
Excel
395
NX 9.0
Post Builder
New Tcl commands in Post Builder
What is it?
Several MOM commands and variables have been implemented to enhance the functionality and performance of NX
Post. The math functions in ugpost_base.tcl have been rewritten to improve performance.
Runs a separate post processor from within a postprocessor on the same operations or programs that are being
postprocessed.
You can call this command during or after the Start of Program event.
The paths must be fully qualified.
Current output units are maintained.
Warning output and the review tool are determined by the post that is called.
The values returned are:
1 if the post that is executing the command is the same as the post being called.
You can supply up to 3 optional button labels. If you supply no label, the OK button is used.
The post job is paused until the user clicks a button.
The command returns 1, 2, or 3, depending which button is clicked.
The command has no effect in batch mode and will not pause the process.
Converts a point from a tool path position to an MCS position in machine tool coordinates, where:
CAM
396
NX 9.0
MOM_check_out_license <license>
mom_operation_type_enum
Returns the number that corresponds to the enumeration of the current operation type in the file
<UGII_BASE_DIR>\UGOPEN\uf_object_types.h.
mom_post_update_synch_manager
Returns value 1 (true) if the update of the information presented in the Synchronization Manager was successful;
otherwise it returns 0 (false).
Post Builder
Prerequisite
CAM
397
NX 9.0
The sim15_millturn_dual_channel sample is enhanced with an updated cam example, improved sub spindle
programming, and movable jaws on the chucks.
CAM
398
NX 9.0
CAM
The sim05_5axis_xyzac_head sample now includes an Okuma post example and Okuma CSE files.
The sim03_mill_4ax_cam_sinumerik_tombstone sample shows the new Paste with Reference feature,
and the accompanying post outputs subroutines to repeat the cutting moves at the location of each part.
399
NX 9.0
CCF structure
You can now use a basic CCF for similar machines. This makes it easy for you to share common methods and to
maintain configurations. You can introduce variations for individual controllers in separate CCF files. The MCF file
controls which CCF files are read, and the order in which they are read.
Postprocessor examples
Postprocessor examples are included in your NX ${UGII_CAM_POST_DIR} folder. Additional examples are
available in NX 9.
The template post for Heidenhain iTNC now outputs CYLCLE 247 and CYCLE 7 to define and set
coordinate systems.
The Fanuc template post includes turning cycles G71, G72, and G70. To output G71 or G72 cycles for
rough turning, set Motion Output to Machine Cycle. To output the G70 cycle in rough turn operations,
turn on Add Profiling, set Strategy to Finish All, and set Profile stock values to zero.
A new Sinumerik840D template post has basic functionality, including TRAORI and CYCLE800, but not
ORIWKS/ORIMKS or 3D cutter compensation. The following commands are in a template .tcl file that
you can import.
o
The DPP_GE_COOR_ROT_AUTO3D command detects if the operation is 3+2 axes without local
CSYS rotation.
CAM
400
NX 9.0
Feature-based Machining
Feature machining areas
A feature machining area is a subset of your feature, such as floor, wall, or drive surface geometry that lets you use
multiple operations to machine a complex feature. You can manually create the operations and select the appropriate
feature machining area for each operation. You can also create rule-based definitions in the Machining Knowledge
Editor to automatically create the operations and select the appropriate feature machining areas.
For example, to define an operation that machines only the faces named WALLS instead of the entire feature, you
create a MILL_AREA add-on with the following new condition:
Cut_Area_Geometry = mwf.WALLS
Workflow
NX automatically creates machining areas for step hole features. You can group and name the faces of other features
into machining areas.
1.
2.
Add a new feature type to the features that NX can recognize. To do this, use the Teach Features command.
This command uses the PMI notes associated with the faces to define the machining areas. This example has
three faces marked as Walls and one face marked as Floor.
CAM
401
NX 9.0
3.
Find instances of the new feature type in the part to machine. To do this, use the Find Features command.
This command recognizes all instances of your new feature type. The feature machining areas are hidden by
default.
4.
Display the machining areas in the Machining Feature Navigator. To do this, use the Show Machining
Area command.
This command expands the machining feature nodes to show the machining areas.
clamp_plate
my_feature_1
clamp_plate
my_feature_1
my_feature_2
WALLS
my_feature_3
FLOOR
my_feature_2
WALLS
FLOOR
my_feature_3
WALLS
FLOOR
CAM
402
NX 9.0
5.
my_feature_1
WALLS
FLOOR
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
403
NX 9.0
View the list of features in each feature group in the Group Features and Hole or Boss Geometry dialog
boxes.
The following example shows features of the drilling_example part selected for grouping.
The graphic on the left shows ungrouped features selected in the feature view of the Machining Feature
Navigator. The graphic on the right shows the same features as part of a feature group in the group view of the
Machining Feature Navigator.
DRILLING_EXAMPLE
STEP2HOLE_29
MCS_MILL
WORKPIECE
STEP2HOLE_30
FG_STEP2HOLE
STEP2HOLE_31
STEP2HOLE_29
STEP2HOLE_32
STEP2HOLE_30
STEP2HOLE_33
STEP2HOLE_31
STEP2HOLE_34
STEP2HOLE_34
STEP2HOLE_35
STEP2HOLE_35
STEP2HOLE_36
STEP2HOLE_36
CAM
404
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
CAM
405
NX 9.0
In-process features
What is it?
An in-process feature represents the volume of material to remove in a single operation. All of the in-process
features must be removed to completely machine the feature.
If you select the Local or 3D IPW in-process workpiece options, NX tracks the volume remaining in a feature after
each operation of the machining sequence. Each subsequent operation in the machining sequence subtracts its inprocess feature volume from the remaining volume.
The following example shows a feature to machine and the in-process feature volume for a drilling operation. The
initial feature volume minus the drilling in-process feature equals the remaining feature volume.
NX infers the in-process feature dimensions for each operation. You can modify the dimensions from the Hole or
Boss Geometry dialog box. If you select the 3D IPW option, the in-process feature volume extends to the end of
the in-process workpiece.
Each displayed in-process feature depends on the following:
The type of hole: Hole, Threaded Hole, Centered Hole, or Chamfered Hole.
CAM
406
NX 9.0
REAM
NX machines this STEP_2_POCKET feature using the following operation sequence.
1.
2.
3.
The MILL_FINISH operation finishes the counter bore floor and wall.
4.
Operation
Initial feature
volume
Remaining
feature volume
DRILL
MILL_ROUGH
MILL_FINISH
REAM
CAM
407
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Tapping, Thread Milling, or Groove
Milling.
CAM
408
NX 9.0
STEP_2_HOLE example
This example shows the operation sequence to completely machine a STEP2HOLE feature.
Operation Navigator Geometry
Sample part
MCS_MILL
WORKPIECE
FG_STEP2HOLE
SPOT_DRILLING
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING
THREAD_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING_1
The following graphics show the material removed by each operation in the machining sequence.
SPOT_DRILLING
CAM
DRILLING
HOLE_MILLING
409
NX 9.0
COUNTERSINKING
THREAD_MILLING
COUNTERSINKING_1
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Thread Milling, or Groove Milling
CAM
410
NX 9.0
Calculates the volume to machine from the selected face, or from the machining area if the
operation uses a machining feature as the geometry parent. You can manually enter a depth
if you selected points or arcs. NX locates the CSYS that defines the start of the in-process
feature on top of the selected object.
Local
Calculates the volume to machine by subtracting the machining area volume from the
volume remaining within the local machining feature. If the geometry selected is a
machining feature, NX includes chamfers and radii.
Calculates the volume to machine by subtracting the machining area volume from the 3D
IPW volume. NX moves the CSYS up to the start of the 3D IPW, and extends the depth to
the bottom of the 3D IPW. This option accounts for previous operations in the same way as
the Local option.
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
You must use one of the following operations: Spot Drilling, Drilling,
Countersinking, Hole Milling, Thread Milling, or Groove Milling
CAM
411
NX 9.0
Wire EDM
Wire EDM tool and guide
What is it?
You can define the wire and guides in a wire EDM operation as you would define a cutter and holder in a milling
operation.
You can export wire guides to the NX tool library and retrieve them when you need them. You can also check the
tool path for potential collisions between the guides and the following objects: the workpiece, the blank, or collision
check geometry.
To support visualization and tool path collision checking, you must provide the following parameters:
Guide clearance values for safe distances between guides and the workpiece
Wire diameter
Guide dimensions
Manufacturing
Prerequisite
CAM
412
NX 9.0
Chapter 4: CAE
Advanced Simulation
Solver version support
For each released version of NX, the following tables list the supported solver versions for import, export, and the
post-processing of results. Note:
The version listed in the Import ASCII and Import Binary rows is the solver version that was generally
available when the NX version was released. In general, the import of the solver ASCII and binary files
should be upwards compatible. Therefore, you should be able to import them into the most recent version
of NX. However, in general:
o
ASCII files are backwards compatible for import into NX. If you import an ASCII file from a
newer version of the solver than is officially supported, the software simply ignores any new
fields/options that aren't supported in the current NX release.
Binary files are not backwards compatible. For example, you can import a binary file created by
NX Nastran 5.0 into NX 6.0.2, but you might not be able to import a binary file created by NX
Nastran 6.1 into NX 5.
The version listed in the Export ASCII rows is the solver version that was available when the NX version
was tested. In general, the exported solver input file is upwards compatible for that solver. Backwards
compatibility is not guaranteed. For NX Nastran, the Model Setup Check function in Advanced
Simulation tries to flag potential version incompatibility issues.
The version listed in the Post-processing Results rows is the version of the solver results that was tested in
the listed NX version. In general, results from earlier solver versions are also supported.
NX 9 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 9
NX Nastran
2013
2013
2013
2013
6.12
Import Binary
N/A
MSC Nastran
Abaqus
CAE
413
NX 9.0
Solver
ANSYS
LS-DYNA
Permas
File Type
NX 9
6.12
6.12-1
6.12
14.5
14.5
14.5
Post-processing of Results
14.5
Import ASCII
971R6.0
Import Binary
N/A
971R6.0
Post-processing of Results
971R6.0
13
NX 8 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 8
NX 8.0.1
NX 8.0.2
NX 8.0.3
NX 8.5
NX 8.5.1
NX 8.5.2
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
Export
8
ASCII (.dat)
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
Postprocessing
of Results
(.op2)
8.1
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2011.1 2011.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
Export
2011.1 2011.1
ASCII (.dat)
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
Post-
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2013
Import
8
NX
Nastran ASCII (.dat)
Import
Binary
(.op2)
Import
2011.1 2011.1
MSC
Nastran ASCII (.dat)
Import
Binary
(.op2)
414
2011.1 2011.1
CAE
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 8
NX 8.0.1
NX 8.0.2
NX 8.0.3
NX 8.5
NX 8.5.1
NX 8.5.2
6.10
Abaqus Import
ASCII (.inp)
6.10
6.10
6.10
6.12
6.12
6.12
Import
Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export
6.10
ASCII (.inp)
6.10
6.10
6.10
6.12
6.12
6.12
Postprocessing
of Results
(.fil)
6.11
6.11
6.11
6.12-1
6.12-1
6.12-1
6.12-1
Postprocessing
of Results
(.odb)
6.10EF1
6.11
6.11
6.11
6.12
6.12
6.12
13
13
14
14
14
14
14.5
Import
13
Binary (.rst,
.rth)
13
14
14
14
14
14.5
Export
13
ASCII (.inp)
13
14
14
14
14
14
Postprocessing
of Results
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
Import
ASCII
971R5.0 971R5.0
971R5.0
971R5.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
Import
Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export
ASCII (.k)
971R5.0 971R5.0
971R5.0
971R5.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
Postprocessing
of Results
971R5.0 971R5.0
971R5.0
971R5.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
processing
of Results
(.op2)
ANSYS Import
ASCII
(PREP7,
CDB)
LSDYNA
CAE
N/A
415
NX 9.0
NX7 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 7
NX 7.5
NX 7.5.1
NX 7.5.2
NX 7.5.3
NX 7.5.4
NX 7.5.5.
Import
6.1
NX
Nastran ASCII (.dat)
7.0
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
Import
Binary
(.op2)
6.1
7.0
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
Export
6.1
ASCII (.dat)
7.0
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
Postprocessing
of Results
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
Export
2008r1
ASCII (.dat)
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
Postprocessing
of Results
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
6.91
6.91
6.9-1
6.10
6.10
6.10
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export
6.8-1
ASCII (.inp)
6.9
6.9
6.9
6.10
6.10
6.10
Postprocessing
of Results
(.fil)
6.8-EF2
6.9.2
6.9.2
6.10-1
6.10-1
6.10-1
6.11-1
Postprocessing
of Results
(.odb)
6.8-EF2
6.9-EF1
6.9-EF2
6.9-EF2
6.10-EF1
6.10-EF1
6.10-EF1
12
12.1
12.1
12.1
13
13
13
Import
12
Binary (.rst,
12.1
12.1
12.1
13
13
13
6.1
Import
2008r1
MSC
Nastran ASCII (.dat)
Import
Binary
(.op2)
2008r1
6.8-1
Abaqus Import
ASCII (.inp)
Import
Binary
ANSYS Import
ASCII
(PREP7,
CDB)
416
N/A
CAE
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 7
NX 7.5
NX 7.5.1
NX 7.5.2
NX 7.5.3
NX 7.5.4
NX 7.5.5.
Export
12
ASCII (.inp)
12.1
12.1
12.1
13
13
13
Postprocessing
of Results
12
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
Import
ASCII
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Import
Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export
ASCII (.k)
971R3.2.1 971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
Postprocessing
of Results
N/A
N/A
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
NX 6
NX 6.0.1
NX 6.0.2
NX 6.0.3
NX 6.0.4
NX 6.0.5
.rth)
LSDYNA
NX 6 releases
Solver
File Type
NX
Nastran
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
7.0
Import Binary
(.op2)
6.0
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
7.0
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
7.0
Post-processing of
Results
6.0
6.1
6.1
7.0
7.0
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
Import Binary
(.op2)
2007r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
Post-processing of
Results
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
Post-processing of
Results (.fil)
6.8-1
6.8-3
6.8-EF2
6.8-EF2
6.8-EF2
MSC
Nastran
Abaqus
CAE
6.0
2007r1
N/A
6.7-5
417
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 6
NX 6.0.1
NX 6.0.2
NX 6.0.3
NX 6.0.4
NX 6.0.5
Post-processing of
Results (.odb)
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.8-EF
6.8-EF2
6.9-EF2
Import ASCII
(PREP7, CDB)
11
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.0
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.0
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.0
Post-processing of
Results
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
971R2
971R2
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
Post-processing of
Results
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ANSYS
NX 5 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 5
NX Nastran
Import ASCII
(.dat)
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
Import Binary
(.op2)
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
Export ASCII
(.dat)
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
Post-processing of 5.0
Results
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
6.0
2005
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2007r1
Import Binary
(.op2)
2005
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2007r1
Export ASCII
(.dat)
2005
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2007r1
Post-processing of 2005
Results
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2008r1
Import ASCII
(.inp)
6.6
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
Abaqus
418
6.6
CAE
NX 9.0
Solver
ANSYS
File Type
NX 5
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export ASCII
(.inp)
6.6
6.6
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
Post-processing of 6.6
Results
6.6
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.8-1
Import ASCII
(PREP7, CDB)
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
10
11
11
11
11
11
Export ASCII
(.inp)
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
Post-processing of 10
Results
11
11
11
11
11
11 SP1
NX 4 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 4
NX 4.0.1
NX 4.0.2
NX 4.0.3
NX 4.0.4
4.0
4.1
4.1
5.0
5.0
4.0
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.0
4.1
4.1
5.0
5.0
Post-processing of
Results
4.0
4.1
4.1
5.0
5.0
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
Post-processing of
Results
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.6
6.6
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.6
6.6
Post-processing of
Results
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.6
6.6-3
10
10
MSC
Nastran
Abaqus
ANSYS
CAE
419
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 4
NX 4.0.1
NX 4.0.2
NX 4.0.3
NX 4.0.4
10
10
10
10
Post-processing of
Results
10
10
General capabilities
Midsurface enhancements
What is it?
This release includes general enhancements to the algorithms used by the Midsurface by Face Pairs command.
These enhancements improve how the software extends, trims, and fills holes in the generated mid-sheets.
This release also includes the following improvements to the Midsurface by Face Pairs dialog box:
When you use the Replacement Mid-Sheet option to select an alternative face or sheet body as a midsheet within a midsurface, you can now also select an existing datum plane.
You can use the new Merge Face Pairs option to merge multiple pairs into a single face pair. The
software merges all side 1 faces into a combined side 1 face and all side 2 faces into a combined side 2
face.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Midsurface by Face Pairs
Location in dialog box
Note
Changes that you make using this command affect only the properties for the mesh and elements associated
420
CAE
NX 9.0
with the selected face, and not for any other mesh or elements. This is different than the standard workflow,
in which you can share and inherit properties across many meshes.
The Mesh Properties command works only with a 2d mesh that is defined on a single polygon face, and only
when the Simulation Navigator is set to Mesh View. For more information about Mesh View, see Mesh view
of the Simulation Navigator.
Element Properties Lets you define element properties such as material orientation, the thickness
source for the elements, and shell offset. This tab corresponds to the Mesh Associated Data dialog box.
Collector Properties Lets you change the type of mesh collector in which this mesh is stored. This
tab corresponds to the Mesh Collector properties dialog box.
Physical Properties Lets you define physical properties such as default thickness, nonstructural
mass, and material properties. This tab corresponds to the Physical Property Table dialog box.
You can define the same properties for several selected faces at the same time. To do this, select the faces and then
open the Mesh Properties dialog box.
When the Simulation file is the Work part, you can select a single polygon face and choose Explore Mesh
Properties
to view the loads, constraints, and simulation objects that are associated with the mesh. The
Mesh Properties Explorer dialog box lists the loads and constraints that are defined on the selected face. To edit
a load or constraint, click
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
You must:
CAE
421
NX 9.0
Select one or more 2D meshed polygon faces to use the Edit Mesh
Properties command.
Make a Simulation file the Work part to use the Explore Mesh
Properties command.
Command Finder
Mesh Properties
Explore Mesh Properties
Graphics window
422
CAE
NX 9.0
All NX applications
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
Location in dialog box
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
CAE
423
NX 9.0
Mesh points
Mesh controls
These options provide improved control over the visibility of different aspects of your model in the graphics
window.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Show and Hide
Location in dialog box
Set LOAD_NX_CAE_STARTUP_LIBRARIES=1 to have NX load the CAE libraries when you first start NX.
Set LOAD_NX_CAE_STARTUP_LIBRARIES=0 (the default) to have NX load the CAE libraries dynamically
when you open a CAE part or start a CAE application.
Fields
Enhancements to table fields
What is it?
Beginning with NX 9, additional options are available when you create a table field by entering (x,y) tabular data in
the Table Field dialog box. You can now:
424
CAE
NX 9.0
Select from new interpolation and extrapolation options for table field data.
The tabular data you enter might represent a boundary condition or a material property. Commonly used
independent variables include time, frequency, and temperature.
Note
The solver you use may not support all of these enhancements.
CAE
To shift the tabular data, select the Independent Value Shift X1 check box and enter a value for the X1
parameter in the Independent Value Shift X1 box. When the solver needs a value at x, the table lookup
returns yT(x X1).
To scale the tabular data, select the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box and enter a value for the
X2 parameter in the Independent Value Divisor X2 box. When the solver needs a value at x, the table
lookup returns yT(x/X2).
To both shift and scale the tabular data, select both check boxes and enter values for the X1 and X2
parameters in the Independent Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 boxes. When the
solver needs a value at x, the table lookup returns yT((x X1)/X2).
425
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
Linear Linear
Log Linear
Linear Log
Log Log
The formula that the solver uses to calculate the table lookup value for the boundary condition or material property
at x depends on the option you select from the Algorithm list.
Linear Linear
If you select Linear Linear, the solver formula is:
where (xi,yi) and (xj,yj) are the two bounding tabular data points nearest to x.
426
CAE
NX 9.0
Log Linear
If you select Log Linear, the solver formula is:
where (xi,yi) and (xj,yj) are the two bounding tabular data points nearest to x.
Linear Log
If you select Linear Log, the solver formula is:
where (xi,yi) and (xj,yj) are the two bounding tabular data points nearest to x.
The Linear Log option is useful when the tabular data approximates a curve of the form y = bemx. Such a curve
plots as a straight line on a semi-log plot, where x is plotted linear and y is plotted logarithmic. Thus, by selecting the
Linear Log option for such data, the number of data points you need to enter to obtain accurate interpolations is
minimized.
Log Log
If you select Log Log, the solver formula is:
where (xi,yi) and (xj,yj) are the two bounding tabular data points nearest to x.
The Log Log option is useful when the tabular data approximates a curve of the form y = bxm. Such a curve plots
as a straight line on a log-log plot, where both x and y are plotted logarithmic. Thus, by selecting the Log Log
option for such data, the number of data points you need to enter to obtain accurate interpolations is minimized.
Note
The solver you use may not support all of the options listed in the Algorithm list.
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
CAE
427
NX 9.0
Note
The solver you use may not support all of the options in the Interpolation and Algorithm lists.
In earlier versions of NX, you could not specify how the solver evaluated boundary conditions or material properties
at values of the independent variable outside the range of tabular data. With NX 9, you can specify the evaluation
method using the following options in the Values outside Table list in the Table Field dialog box.
Undefined Does not assigned a value for the boundary condition or material property at values of the
independent variable outside the range of tabular data.
Extrapolate Calculates the value for the boundary condition or material property at values of the
independent variable that are less than that defined by the tabular data, from the two starting data points.
Calculates the value for the boundary condition or material property at values of the independent variable
that are greater than that defined by the tabular data, from the two ending data points.
The formula that the solver uses to calculate the table lookup value for the boundary condition or material
property at x depends on the option you select from the Algorithm list.
o
where (xi,yi) and (xj,yj) are the two starting or ending data points.
Constant Uses the values of the boundary condition or material property at the starting data point and
ending data point at values of the independent variable outside the range of tabular data.
For example, suppose (100,5) and (200,15) are the starting data point and ending data point values,
respectively. For values of the independent variable less than 100, the boundary condition or material
property is assigned the value 5. For values of the independent variable greater than 200, the boundary
condition or material property is assigned the value 15.
428
CAE
NX 9.0
Note
The solver you use may not support all of the options in the Values outside Table list.
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLED1 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT(x), where the table lookup at frequency or time x returns yT(x) as the value for the dynamic
load.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLED2 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT(x X1), where the table lookup at frequency or time x returns yT(x X1) as the value for the
dynamic load. X1 is a parameter used to shift the data range.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLED3 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT((x X1)/X2), where the table lookup at frequency or time x returns yT((x X1)/X2) as the
value for the dynamic load. X1 is a parameter used to shift the data range and X2 is a parameter used to
scale the data range.
In the TABLED1 bulk entry, you can designate whether the table lookup is from a linear-linear, log-log, or semi-log
representation of the tabular data. In the TABLED2 and TABLED3 bulk entries, you cannot designate that the table
lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data.
For more information on log-log and semi-log representations of tabular data, see New interpolation options for
table field data.
You control which TABLEDi entry NX writes to the Nastran input file from the Table Field dialog box.
CAE
If you want NX to write a TABLED1 entry to the Nastran input file, make sure that the Independent
Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check boxes are not selected. To designate that the
table lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data, select the log option of your
429
NX 9.0
choice from the Algorithm list. Otherwise, the table lookup is from the default linear-linear representation
of the tabular data.
If you want NX to write a TABLED2 entry to the Nastran input file, do the following:
o
Select the Independent Value Shift X1 check box and enter a value for the X1 parameter in the
Independent Value Shift X1 box.
Make sure the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is not selected.
Because TABLED2 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Shift X1 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
If you want NX to write a TABLED3 entry to the Nastran input file, do either of the following:
o
Select the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box and enter a value for the X2 parameter in
the Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Select both the Independent Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check
boxes and enter a values for the X1 and X2 parameters in the Independent Value Shift X1 box
and Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Because TABLED3 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
430
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM1 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT(x), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT(x) as the value for the material property.
CAE
NX 9.0
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM2 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = zyT(x X1), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT(x X1), where X1 is a parameter
used to shift the data range. The returned value is then scaled by z to obtain the value for the material
property, where z is the value of the material property on the corresponding MATi bulk entry.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM3 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = zyT((x X1)/X2), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT((x X1)/X2), where X1 is a
parameter used to shift the data range and X2 is a parameter used to scale the data range. The returned
value is then scaled by z to obtain the value for the material property, where z is the value of the material
property on the corresponding MATi bulk entry.
In the TABLEM1 bulk entry, you can designate whether the table lookup is from a linear-linear, log-log, or semi-log
representation of the tabular data. In the TABLEM2 and TABLEM3 bulk entries, you cannot designate that the table
lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data.
For more information on log-log and semi-log representations of tabular data, see New interpolation options for
table field data.
You control which TABLEMi entry NX writes to the Nastran input file from the Table Field dialog box.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM1 entry to the Nastran input file, make sure that the Independent
Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check boxes are not selected. To designate that the
table lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data, select the log option of your
choice from the Algorithm list. Otherwise, the table lookup is from the default linear-linear representation
of the tabular data.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM2 entry to the Nastran input file, do the following:
o
Select the new Independent Value Shift X1 check box and enter a value for the X1 parameter
in the Independent Value Shift X1 box.
Make sure the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is not selected.
Because TABLEM2 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Shift X1 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM3 entry to the Nastran input file, do either of the following:
o
Select the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box and enter a value for the X2 parameter in
the Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Select both the Independent Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check
boxes and enter a values for the X1 and X2 parameters in the Independent Value Shift X1 box
and Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Because TABLEM3 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
CAE
431
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Select a materialCopy the selected material
FieldTable
Constructor
Command Finder
Manage Materials
Location in dialog box
Nodal results for vector quantities like displacement and reaction force.
Element-nodal results for individual components of second-order tensor quantities like stress and strain.
Element-nodal results that are derived from individual components of second-order tensor quantities like
von Mises stress.
You cannot create a reference field for elemental results or unaveraged element-nodal results.
The dependent domain options for a reference field depend on the result that is displayed in the post view when the
reference field is created. For more information, see Dependent domain options for reference fields.
The independent domain of a reference field is always the global Cartesian coordinates of the nodes and the node
identification numbers.
Reference fields are listed under the Fields node in the Simulation Navigator.
432
CAE
NX 9.0
In situations where you could use either a table field or a reference field, understanding how reference fields differ
from table fields can help you determine which type of field to use. A reference field is unlike a table field in the
following ways.
A reference field has access to the model geometry and the mesh. Consequently, reference fields tend to be
more accurate and less CPU intensive than table fields.
A reference field does not store the actual numerical data. It retrieves data that is already stored in files.
This is an important consideration if the field is very large. While the size of the FEM and Simulation files
increases when you create a field, this increase is minimized when you use a reference field.
A reference field automatically updates itself if you rerun the model. This is clearly beneficial if you intend
to revise and solve a model repeatedly.
A reference field does not allow you to select the interpolation method. The interpolated values in a
reference field are similar to the interpolated values in a table field for which you selected the Delaunay
interpolation method. If you need to use a different interpolation method, use a table field.
A reference field does not reside with the part while a table field does reside with the part. Consequently,
file management tasks are easier with table fields.
Select Parameter to create a reference field that contains the unitless magnitude of the scalar quantity.
The software interprets such a field as dimensionless.
The second option depends on the result. For example, if the scalar nodal result is temperature, the second
option is Temperature. Select this option to create a reference field that contains the magnitude of the
scalar quantity and the associated units.
When the displayed result is a nodal result for a vector quantity, you have four options:
Select Parameter to create a reference field that contains the unitless magnitude of the vector quantity.
The software interprets such a field as dimensionless.
The second option depends on the result. For example, if the vector nodal result is displacement, the second
option is Length. Select this option to create a reference field that contains the magnitude of the vector
quantity and the associated units.
Select Cartesian to create a reference field that contains the magnitudes of the components of the vector
quantity and the associated units.
Select Parameter Space to create a reference field that contains the unitless magnitudes of the
components of the vector quantity. The software interprets such a field as dimensionless.
When the displayed result is an averaged element-nodal result for an individual component of a second-order tensor
quantity or a quantity derived from the components of a second-order tensor quantity, the displayed result is treated
as a scalar quantity. Examples of second-order tensor quantities are stress and strain. Examples of quantities derived
from a second-order tensor are mean stress and von Mises stress. For such cases, you have two options:
CAE
Select Parameter to create a reference field that contains the unitless magnitude of the tensor component
or the derived quantity. The software interprets such a field as dimensionless.
The second option depends on the result. For example, if the tensor averaged element-nodal result is a
stress component, the second option is Stress. Select this option to create a reference field that contains
the magnitude of the tensor component or the derived quantity and the associated units.
433
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Table of Fields
What is it?
Table of fields lets you approximate a function that has two or more independent variables. You can use a table of
fields to define material properties. You can create a table of fields from any combination of table fields, formula
fields, reference fields, and linked fields. You can create a table of fields in the FEM or the Simulation file. After
you create a table of fields, it is listed under the Fields node in the Simulation Navigator.
The most direct application of table of fields is to approximate functions that have two independent variables such
as:
z = f(x,y)
A table of fields approximates f(x,y) by referencing a series of fields that have a single independent variable. Each of
these fields represents a curve in the xz-plane that is the projection of f(x,y) onto the xz-plane for a constant value of
y. Thus, f(x,y) is represented by the following series of N fields.
z1 = f1(x) = f(x,Y1)
z2 = f2(x) = f(x,Y2)
.................
zi = fi(x) = f(x,Yi)
.................
zN = fN(x) = f(x,YN)
where Yi are constants.
The software looks up the value for f(X0,Y0) as follows:
434
1.
The software identifies the bounding fields. The bounding fields are the fields, fj(x) and fk(x), whose fixed
variables, Yj and Yk, respectively, are in closest proximity to Y0 such that Yj < Y0 < Yk.
2.
The software calculates the value of each bounding field at X0. These values are denoted fj(X0) and fk(X0).
If the bounding field is a table field, the tabular data is interpolated to obtain the value at X0. If X0
lies outside of the range of tabular data, the option you choose from the Values outside Table
list in the Table Field dialog box determines how fj(X0) and fk(X0) are obtained.
If the bounding field is a reference field, the tabular data is interpolated to obtain the value at X0. If
X0 lies outside of the range of tabular data, no value is assigned.
If the bounding field is a formula field, the formula is evaluated to obtain the value at X0.
CAE
NX 9.0
3.
The values found in the previous step, fj(X0) and fk(X0), are interpolated to obtain f(X0,Y0). If Y0 lies outside
of the range of fields, the option you choose from the Values outside Table list in the Table of Fields
dialog box determines how f(X0,Y0) is obtained.
The initial application for a table of fields is to model the nonlinear stress-strain behavior of materials as a function
of temperature. That is, you can use a table of fields to represent a constitutive model of the form:
= f(,T)
where is normal stress, is normal strain, T is temperature, and f is a nonlinear mapping of and T to . To do this,
create a table of fields that references a series of fields that contain isothermal stress-strain data. Thus, = f(,T) is
represented by the following series of N fields.
1 = f1() = f(,T1)
2 = f2() = f(,T2)
.................
i = fi() = f(,Ti)
.................
N = fN() = f(,TN)
where Ti are constants.
For the steps to define a temperature-dependent nonlinear stress-strain characteristic, see Define a temperaturedependent nonlinear stress-strain characteristic with a table of fields in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
CAE
435
NX 9.0
Simulation Navigator
Right-click FieldsOverlay
Materials
Enhancements for defining temperature-dependent material properties
What is it?
Temperature-dependent material properties can be defined from (x,y) tabular data entered in the Table Field dialog
box. Beginning with NX 9, additional options are available when you define temperature-dependent material
properties using a table field. You can now:
Edit table field labels. For information on editing table field labels, see Enhancements to table fields.
Include skips in table field data. For information on including skips in table field data, see Enhancements to
table fields.
Include jump discontinuities in table field data. For information on including jump discontinuities in table
field data, see Enhancements to table fields.
Shift and scale table field data. For information on shifting and scaling data in table fields, see
Enhancements to table fields.
Select from new interpolation options for table field data. For information on the new interpolation options
for table field data, see New interpolation options for table field data.
Select from new extrapolation options for table field data. For information on the new extrapolation options
for table field data, see New extrapolation options for table field data.
All
Command Finder
Manage Materials
Location in dialog box
436
CAE
NX 9.0
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM1 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT(x), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT(x) as the value for the material property.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM2 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = zyT(x X1), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT(x X1), where X1 is a parameter
used to shift the data range. The returned value is then scaled by z to obtain the value for the material
property, where z is the value of the material property on the corresponding MATi bulk entry.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM3 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = zyT((x X1)/X2), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT((x X1)/X2), where X1 is a
parameter used to shift the data range and X2 is a parameter used to scale the data range. The returned
value is then scaled by z to obtain the value for the material property, where z is the value of the material
property on the corresponding MATi bulk entry.
In the TABLEM1 bulk entry, you can designate whether the table lookup is from a linear-linear, log-log, or semi-log
representation of the tabular data. In the TABLEM2 and TABLEM3 bulk entries, you cannot designate that the table
lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data.
For more information on log-log and semi-log representations of tabular data, see New interpolation options for
table field data.
You control which TABLEMi entry NX writes to the Nastran input file from the Table Field dialog box.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM1 entry to the Nastran input file, make sure that the Independent
Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check boxes are not selected. To designate that the
table lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data, select the log option of your
choice from the Algorithm list. Otherwise, the table lookup is from the default linear-linear representation
of the tabular data.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM2 entry to the Nastran input file, do the following:
o
Select the new Independent Value Shift X1 check box and enter a value for the X1 parameter
in the Independent Value Shift X1 box.
Make sure the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is not selected.
Because TABLEM2 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Shift X1 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM3 entry to the Nastran input file, do either of the following:
o
Select the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box and enter a value for the X2 parameter in
the Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Select both the Independent Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check
boxes and enter a values for the X1 and X2 parameters in the Independent Value Shift X1 box
and Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Because TABLEM3 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Select a materialCopy the selected material
CAE
FieldTable
437
NX 9.0
Constructor
Command Finder
Manage Materials
Location in dialog box
Meshing
Mesh morphing
This release includes new commands that allow you to morph an existing mesh to conform to geometry
modifications. When you morph a mesh, the software tries to keep the overall mesh topology constant. The software
computes new locations for the nodes in the existing mesh to conform to the changed geometry and expands or
shrinks the mesh to fit the modified geometry. Morphing provides an alternative to the mesh update that occurs
within the FE Model Update command. With a mesh update, NX deletes and recreates meshes that are affected by
change to the underlying geometry.
You may want to morph, rather than update, a mesh when:
It is important that you preserve your current node and element labels.
You want to retain the shape and size of the existing elements in a mesh in areas that are unaffected by the
modifications to the CAD geometry.
In some cases, for example, you may want to preserve your existing mesh and expand or shrink the existing
elements to fit the new geometry. In the example, (1) shows an existing mesh inside the outline of new geometry,
and (2) shows how the existing mesh can be morphed to fill the new geometry.
438
CAE
NX 9.0
use the Automatic Morph command immediately after you switch back to the FEM file after the CAD geometry
changes.
You want to morph a mesh to conform to updated CAD geometry that has topology modifications.
The Automatic Morph command was not able to automatically associate the existing nodes to the new
geometry.
You want to update a specific region of an orphan mesh, which is a mesh with no existing geometry
association.
You can use the Node Mappings options in the Manual Morph dialog box to specify how the existing nodes
should be associated to (mapped) the updated geometry. For example, you can:
Select the Node to Edge option to map an existing node to an updated edge on the CAD geometry.
Select the Node to Face option to map an existing node to an updated face on the CAD geometry.
Select the Stationary option to indicate that an existing node should not be moved during morphing.
CAE
Use the Automatic Node Association command to associate the orphan nodes in a mesh to nearby
CAD geometry within a specified tolerance. This command controls only the geometry association between
a node and geometry. It does not change the location of a node. NX also tries to associate any elements
connected to the nodes to the appropriate geometry, if possible.
Use the Node Disassociation command to remove the association between a node and CAD geometry.
This command is useful for cases in which the association between a node and the CAD geometry is
incorrect, such as when a node is associated to the wrong edge in a part. The Node Disassociation
command also disassociates any elements that are connected to the disassociated nodes from the
geometry.
439
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Automatic Morph
Association
, Manual Morph
, Automatic Node
, or Node Disassociation
Use the Fillet option to control the distribution of elements along fillet (rounded or blended) surfaces.
Use the Cylinder option to control the distribution of elements along cylindrical surfaces.
Previously, to control the mesh along a fillet or cylinder, you had to first create a 2D mesh on those surfaces to seed
the element distribution in the 3D mesh.
440
CAE
NX 9.0
You can use the Preview Cylinders and Preview Fillets options to view the cylinders or fillets that NX
identifies based on your specified criteria.
When you use the Filter option, NX continues to evaluate the selected target geometry during meshing. In some
cases, the automatic abstraction process that occurs during meshing can result in either additional or fewer fillet or
cylinder surfaces that meet the defined criteria for the mesh control.
With both Fillet and Cylinder mesh controls, you can also use the new Aspect Ratio option to ensure that the
elements in these regions maintain a specified aspect ratio. When you use this option, NX reduces the element size
to maintain the specified Aspect Ratio, if necessary.
CAE
441
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Mesh Control
InsertMeshMesh Control
Menu
The ability to create Mesh Control definitions that are not assigned to any geometry.
442
CAE
NX 9.0
You can create a Mesh Control Definition for the following types of mesh control:
Fillet
Cylinder
Face Density
Mapped Hole
You can use Mesh Control Definitions to create templates that contain the standard mesh requirements for parts
comprised of similar geometry or parts of the same class. For example, you can create a template that contains
multiple Mesh Control Definitions with the mesh specifications for standard hole or cylinder sizes for your parts.
After you create mesh control definitions, you can save them in a template FEM file. Any subsequent FEM files that
you create from that template will contain the mesh control definitions. You can then edit each mesh control
definition to specify the target geometry.
You can use the Filter option with the Fillet density type to have NX select all fillets within a solid body
that have a maximum inside radius of 3 mm.
You can use the Filter option with the Mapped Hole density type to have NX select all holes within a
sheet body that have a minimum radius of 10 mm.
After you specify the criteria, you can use the Preview option to display the geometry that meets the specified
criteria.
CAE
443
NX 9.0
Note
If you use the Filter option, NX continues to evaluate the selected target geometry during meshing. In some
cases, the automatic abstraction process that occurs during meshing can result in either additional or fewer
fillet or cylinder surfaces that meet the defined criteria for the mesh control.
The Filter option is available with the following types of mesh controls:
Fillet
Cylinder
Mapped Hole
You can use these individual nodes in the Simulation Navigator to:
Control the visibility of each individual mesh control or the visibility of all mesh controls.
In previous releases, you could create only a single mesh control per edge or face in your model. Now, you can
create a single mesh control on multiple edges or faces. For example, you can create multiple Mapped Hole
definitions that have different hole radius ranges with corresponding layer depths, number of layers, and element
counts. When you edit a mesh control from the Simulation Navigator, NX modifies the mesh specifications on
all geometry associated with that control.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
444
CAE
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Mesh Control
InsertMeshMesh Control
Menu
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
A new geometry assignment module to facilitate the use of mesh controls within batch meshing.
Select the Template check box and use the Template File Name option to select the appropriate FEM
file to use as a template for meshing.
Use the new, optional template=<template-file-name> keyword at the command line to specify the
appropriate FEM file to use as a template for meshing.
CAE
445
NX 9.0
the mesh control. For example, if the template FEM file contains a Mapped Hole mesh control definition, the
software searches the CAD part file for holes that fall within the specified Filter criteria.
When NX removes the hole, you can optionally choose to create either a point or a mesh point at the holes center of
gravity. You may want to create a mesh point at the holes center, for example, so that you can later create an FEbased connection element, such as an RBE2, at that location.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
2D Mesh
Location in dialog box
446
CAE
NX 9.0
The tolerance that determines which small features to eliminate during the abstraction process that
precedes meshing.
The desired minimum element length, if you select the Target Minimum Element Length option.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
2D Mesh
Menu
CAE
InsertMesh2D Mesh
447
NX 9.0
Note
NX displays nodes in the graphics window only when the Marker Type in the Model Display dialog box
is set to one of the display options such as Asterisk.
448
Show Exterior Nodes Displays the nodes on the free faces of the displayed elements.
Show Nodes Displays all nodes that are attached to the displayed elements.
CAE
NX 9.0
(1) Show Only on selected elements; (2) Show Exterior Nodes; (3) Show Nodes
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Show Exterior Nodes
Show Nodes
CAE
449
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Deactivation Set Advanced
Boundary conditions
Boundary condition dialog memory
What is it?
A new Dialog Memory customer default is available to retain boundary condition values in dialog memory. If you
set the Dialog Memory customer default, numeric and orientation values default to the last values used for that
boundary condition type.
To clear the values applied from memory, on the title bar of the dialog box, click Reset
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
Location in dialog box
450
CAE
NX 9.0
Customer Defaults
You can control the display styles for constraints, loads, and simulation objects separately, using the new customer
defaults for boundary conditions. The Constraints Display, Loads Display, and Simulation Objects
Display tabs are now available. You can control the default display mode selection, as well as the color, size and
visibility of attributes for each of the three groupings of boundary conditions.
An Edge Boundary Condition Display Override tab is available. If you select the Apply
Overrides
check box on this tab, the overrides that you set control the default display of edge boundary
conditions only.
CAE
451
NX 9.0
Customer Default
Application
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
Location in dialog box
SimulationBoundary Conditions
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Right-click the container in the Simulation Navigator and select New Folder.
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
452
CAE
NX 9.0
If you select Along 2 Nodes, the software uses those two nodes to define the vector along which the
force or moment acts. With this option, the software creates a FORCE1 or MOMENT1 bulk data entry in
your Nastran input file when you export or solve your model.
If you select Along 2 Nodes, the software uses those four nodes to define a plane normal. The force or
moment acts normal to that plane. With this option, the software creates a FORCE2 or MOMENT2 bulk
data entry in your Nastran input file when you export or solve your model.
When you define the direction of a force or moment by selecting nodes, the direction of that force or moment can
change as the model deforms. This means that the force or moment becomes a follower force or moment. A follower
force or moment depends on a structures geometry. As a structure deforms, a follower force or moment changes in
magnitude and direction.
In previous releases, you could only create a Force or Moment by explicitly defining a vector.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Force
Simulation Navigator
CAE
or Moment
453
NX 9.0
Insulation
Roofing materials
You can use the options in the Non-Structural Mass dialog box to define both distributed and lumped nonstructural masses.
For distributed non-structural mass, the software spreads the mass evenly over all the elements or over all
the elements associated with the selected physical property table.
For lumped non-structural mass, the software applies the mass directly to each element you select or to
each element associated with the selected physical property table.
If you select the Lumped Mass on Elements or Lumped Mass on Physical Property Tables
option from the Type list, the software creates the NSML or NSML1 bulk data entry.
If you select the Distributed Mass on Elements or Distributed Mass on Physical Property
Tables option from the Type list, the software creates the NSM or NSM1 bulk data entry.
CBAR
CQUAD4
CBEAM
CQUAD8
CONROD
CQUADR
CROD
CSHEAR
454
CAE
NX 9.0
CTUBE
CTRIA3
CTRIA6
CTRIAR
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Advanced Simulation
Non-Structural Mass
Simulation Navigator
CAE
455
NX 9.0
Edge loads for plane stress and plane strain elements (NX Nastran)
What is it?
Use the new Edge Load command to define a surface traction on an edge of:
For SOL 601 analyses, you can define the surface tractions such that they:
Maintain their orientation to the elements geometry or maintain their original orientation in a geometric
nonlinear analysis.
Linear structural solutions (SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, and 200)
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Edge Load
456
CAE
NX 9.0
Note
For SOL 601 analyses, the elements must be oriented in the XZ plane.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Edge-to-Edge Contact
Description
Linearity
Beam
Nonlinear
Link
Nonlinear
Note
Any rotational DOF for the two nodes
CAE
457
NX 9.0
MPC type
Description
Linearity
Pin
Note
Any rotational DOF for the two nodes
are not included in this constraint.
The options in the Manual Coupling dialog box correspond to the parameters for the Abaqus *MPC keyword.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Manual Coupling
Simulation Navigator
458
Frequency
Heat Flow
Mass Flow
Pressure
CAE
NX 9.0
Temperature
Temperature Difference
Thermal Capacitance
Time
Velocity
Volume Flow
In previous releases, you could create only a static contour display of boundary conditions.
When you animate a boundary condition contour display, you can define the range of the animation, including the
start and stop values (such as start and stop time), and the number of animation frames. When you plot multiple
boundary conditions together that have different independent variables, you must choose the independent variable
that defines the range of the animation.
When you include a time, frequency, or temperature varying boundary condition in a solution that varies over an
independent domain that is different from the boundary condition, NX evaluates the plotted boundary condition
using the evaluation time, frequency, and temperature values that you define in the Boundary Condition Control
Variables for the solution or the active subcase. You can now override these values in the Boundary Condition
Contour Plot dialog box.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
CAE
459
NX 9.0
The boundary condition to plot must reside in a dynamic solution and the boundary conditions domain must match
the domain of the solution. For example, you can plot a force load that is driven by a time-dependent field if the
force load resides in a direct transient solution subcase.
You can plot the overall magnitude of the boundary condition at each iteration value, or plot the portion of that
magnitude that is distributed to a selected location (node, element, element edge, or element face) at each iteration
value.
After you generate the XY plot, you can use the XY Graph commands on the Results tab to change the display of
the graph.
460
CAE
NX 9.0
Supported quantities
The boundary condition to plot must be defined with a condition sequence parameter, or with a field that has one of
the following quantities defined as the independent variable:
Frequency
Heat Flow
Mass Flow
Temperature
Temperature Difference
Thermal Capacitance
Time
Velocity
Volume Flow
Graph X range
NX infers the X range of the graph automatically, depending on how the boundary condition is defined:
If the boundary condition is defined with a field, the X range is that of the independent variable of the field.
If the boundary condition is defined with a condition sequence parameter, the X range is defined by the
condition sequence.
If the boundary condition is defined with a field and a condition sequence parameter, or with multiple fields, the
range is a union, regardless of the property that you are plotting.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
CAE
461
NX 9.0
Solutions
NX Multiphysics environment
This release includes the initial release of the new NX Multiphysics solver environment. The NX Multiphysics
environment allows you to perform a coupled thermal-structural analysis using a single finite element model.
The structural analysis uses the new NX Nastran SOL 401 structural solution, which is available beginning
in the NX Nastran 9 release.
You can use the new NX Multiphysics environment to build a single finite element model that you can use for both
structural and thermal analyses. Currently, you can couple the thermal solution to the structural solution (one-way
coupling) so that you can include the effects of the thermal results in the structural analysis. For example, you can
analyze how the temperature distribution affects the structural deformation. Future releases of NX Multiphysics will
support two-way coupling in which the thermal solution affects the structural solution and the structural solution
affects the thermal solution.
Structural analyses. You can perform multistep nonlinear analyses and include a combination of static
(linear or nonlinear) subcases and modal (real eigenvalue) subcases.
Thermal analyses.
Mapping analyses to map temperatures onto a target model, which is typically an independent structural
model of the same geometry. For example, you can use a mapping analysis to include temperatures in a
stress and distortion analysis.
462
CAE
NX 9.0
For thermal and mapping solutions, the NX Multiphysics environment supports 0D, 1D, 2D, and 3D elements.
Note
NX Multiphysics currently supports composite laminates for solid elements in structural solutions only.
Defining loads
In a structural analysis in NX Multiphysics, you define mechanical loads as a function of time. However, because
the solution is static, time is only used as the mechanism to increment loads.
Condition sequences
What is it?
You can now import and manage condition sequences, and use them to drive boundary condition values at specified
time steps.
A condition sequence is used to describe a time history of conditions applied to a structure throughout the course of
a mission or duty cycle. A typical example of a condition sequence would be the conditions applied to an aircraft
engine during takeoff, climbing to altitude, and level flight. Condition sequences are defined without regard to any
particular analysis type or solution; that is, a single condition might include parameters defining static or transient
mechanical loads, enforced excitations, temperatures, inlet velocities, and so on. After a condition sequence has
been defined, you can use the same condition sequence to generate multiple solutions of different analysis types.
Typically, you import a condition sequence file from a third-party sequence editor (such as a .bdd file), and use the
Condition Sequence Manager dialog box to edit and maintain the condition sequence. You can also create new
condition parameters and conditions in the Condition Sequence Manager dialog box.
Condition parameters are uniquely named entities that define a quantity to measure and a units type.
Condition parameters can be referenced as NX expressions to define boundary condition magnitude.
A condition is a named set of condition parameters. Each parameter is assigned a value and units. It is
typically used to represent a state or operating condition of a model.
A condition sequence is an ordered set of conditions. Each condition is assigned a time in seconds. Only
one condition can be assigned to a given time step.
CAE
463
NX 9.0
Creates steps, subcases, or timesteps as appropriate for the selected solution type and the number and
sequence of conditions in the condition sequence.
Specifies the appropriate evaluation time or duration for each step, subcase, or time step.
2.
Define conditions in which the values for Ma (in kilograms) and Ac (in m/sec ) vary.
3.
4.
Create a Force load on your model. In the Force dialog box, select Expression as the magnitude type,
and enter Ma*Ac in the box.
When you create the solution, NX interpolates the values for Ma and Ac at the specified time steps, and multiplies
them to calculate the force load in Newtons.
464
CAE
NX 9.0
condition sequence to define multiple solutions, including linear, nonlinear, transient, thermal, and so on. You can
use the single set of defined parameters to drive the boundary conditions for all analyses.
If your company uses a standard format for defining condition sequences (such as a .bdd file) or follows standard
practices regarding missions and duty cycles, you can import this data to capture these practices in your analyses and
ensure consistency across teams and platforms.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
InsertCondition Sequence
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
Simulation Navigator
Manage which boundary conditions are associated with a given solution step or subcase.
Export information about the boundary condition assignments to an HTML page or a spreadsheet.
Both dialog boxes have been enhanced to provide a variety of filters, support for boundary conditions stored in
folders, and improved sorting of boundary conditions.
For more information about using folders to manage boundary conditions, see Boundary condition folders.
CAE
465
NX 9.0
Use the Step Association Manager or Subcase Association Manager to manage and document
the distribution of multiple boundary conditions across steps or subcases within a solution.
Use the Solution Association Manager to manage and document the distribution of boundary
conditions across multiple solutions.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
A Simulation as the current work part, containing one or more solutions, and
one or more solutions containing multiple steps or subcases.
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
466
CAE
NX 9.0
No Change Mixed Values Indicates that the values currently defined for this attribute are
different for two or more of the selected subcases.
No Change Equal Values Indicates that the values currently defined for this attribute are the
same for all the selected subcases.
Suppose you have three solution subcases that each use a different output request:
Subcase
Output request
subcase_1
output_request_A
subcase_2
output_request_B
subcase_3
output_request_C
You want to update all subcases to use the output request that is assigned to subcase_1 (output_request_A).
1.
2.
Hold the Ctrl key and select the other two subcases, subcase_2 and subcase_3.
3.
4.
No Change Mixed Values next to the Output Requests option and select Apply
Click
Changes
The
5.
button changes to
Output request
subcase_1
output_request_A
subcase_2
output_request_A
subcase_3
output_request_A
CAE
Advanced Simulation
467
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Workflow
The NX workflow to perform a frequency response analysis, transient response analysis, or complex eigenvalue
analysis for a system containing rotating components is only slightly different from the NX workflow to perform a
standard frequency response analysis, transient response analysis, or complex eigenvalue analysis, respectively. The
differences in the NX workflow allow you to:
Request complex eigenvalue rotor dynamic analysis results to be written to .csv and .gpf files.
Define bearing supports with frequency-dependent and unsymmetric stiffness and viscous damping.
Define rotors.
Use the shaking force that results from mass imbalance of a rotor as the excitation in a rotor dynamic
frequency response analysis.
Supported solutions
When you create the FEM and Simulation files, select one of the following NX Nastran solution sequences:
468
For a frequency response rotor dynamic analysis, select either SOL 108 Direct Frequency Response or SOL
111 Modal Frequency Response.
For a transient response rotor dynamic analysis, select either SOL 109 Direct Transient Response or SOL
112 Modal Transient Response.
For a complex eigenvalue rotor dynamic analysis, select either SOL 107 Direct Complex Eigenvalues or
SOL 110 Modal Complex Eigenvalues.
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
1D Connection
Location in dialog box
In the Connection Element group, select CBEAR from the listIn the
Type group, select Node to Node from the list.
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Physical Properties
Location in dialog box
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Rotor Dynamics Definition
Location in dialog box
CAE
469
NX 9.0
In maneuver load analysis, centrifugal stiffening and softening, and mass imbalance are not supported.
For information on how to create a rotor dynamic simulation object and how to define bearing supports for rotors,
see Rotor dynamics (NX Nastran).
CTRAX3
CTRAX6
CQUADX4
CQUADX8
In previous releases, these elements were available only in an Axisymmetric Structural or an Axisymmetric
Thermal analysis.
ZX Plane, Z Axis If axisymmetric elements are used, they must be on the ZX plane. The axisymmetric
rotational axis is Z.
XY Plane, X Axis If axisymmetric elements are used, they must be on the XY plane. The axisymmetric
rotational axis is X.
470
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
2D Mesh
Specify real values if the stiffness or damping values are independent of the rotors speed. NX Nastran then
uses these values for all rotor speeds during the analysis.
Specify a field to use tabular data if the stiffness or damping varies as a function of the rotors speed.
Note
You specify the stiffness and damping data matrix values (such as TXX, TXY, and TYX) in terms of the Xand Y- axes of the coordinate system that you specified in the CSYS list in the Region dialog box when
you created the rotor region.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
A FEM file as the displayed part and the work part, NX Nastran as the specified solver,
and Structural as the specified analysis type
CAE
471
NX 9.0
Command Finder
1D Mesh
PBEAR dialog box
Application
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
A FEM file as the displayed part and the work part, NX Nastran as the specified solver,
and Structural as the specified analysis type
Command Finder
Physical Properties
Location in dialog box
TypePBEAR
Support for plane stress/plane strain elements and properties (NX Nastran)
What is it?
You can now use the 2D Mesh command to create NX Nastran plane stress and plane strain elements and their
associated physical properties.
You can use the following types of plane strain and plane stress elements in the NX Nastran Structural and
Axisymmetric Structural environments.
Plane strain elements:
CPLSTN3
CPLSTN4
CPLSTN6
CPLSTN8
CPLSTS3
CPLSTS4
CPLSTS6
CPLSTS8
For linear plane strain or plane stress elements, you can define their physical properties in the PPLANE physical
property table dialog box. For nonlinear plane strain or plane stress elements, you can define their physical
properties in the PLPLANE physical property table dialog box.
See the NX Nastran Element Library Reference for more information.
472
Linear structural solutions (SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, and 200)
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
2D Mesh
(PPLANE or PLPLANE dialog box) Physical Properties
If you select Along 2 Nodes, the software uses those two nodes to define the vector along which the
force or moment acts. With this option, the software creates a FORCE1 or MOMENT1 bulk data entry in
your Nastran input file when you export or solve your model.
If you select Along 2 Nodes, the software uses those four nodes to define a plane normal. The force or
moment acts normal to that plane. With this option, the software creates a FORCE2 or MOMENT2 bulk
data entry in your Nastran input file when you export or solve your model.
When you define the direction of a force or moment by selecting nodes, the direction of that force or moment can
change as the model deforms. This means that the force or moment becomes a follower force or moment. A follower
force or moment depends on a structures geometry. As a structure deforms, a follower force or moment changes in
magnitude and direction.
In previous releases, you could only create a Force or Moment by explicitly defining a vector.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
CAE
473
NX 9.0
or Moment
Insulation
Roofing materials
You can use the options in the Non-Structural Mass dialog box to define both distributed and lumped nonstructural masses.
For distributed non-structural mass, the software spreads the mass evenly over all the elements or over all
the elements associated with the selected physical property table.
For lumped non-structural mass, the software applies the mass directly to each element you select or to
each element associated with the selected physical property table.
If you select the Lumped Mass on Elements or Lumped Mass on Physical Property Tables
option from the Type list, the software creates the NSML or NSML1 bulk data entry.
If you select the Distributed Mass on Elements or Distributed Mass on Physical Property
Tables option from the Type list, the software creates the NSM or NSM1 bulk data entry.
474
CAE
NX 9.0
CBAR
CQUAD4
CBEAM
CQUAD8
CONROD
CQUADR
CROD
CSHEAR
CTUBE
CTRIA3
CTRIA6
CTRIAR
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Advanced Simulation
Non-Structural Mass
Simulation Navigator
CAE
475
NX 9.0
Acceleration
Force
Pressure
Components ZX
Components ZX
Normal ZX
Normal XY
Component Force ZX
Component Force ZX
Edge Face ZX
Edge Face ZX
On Axisymmetric Elements
(Normal to Edge) ZX
On Axisymmetric Elements ZX
Edge Load
476
On Axisymmetric Elements
(Normal to Edge) ZX
On Axisymmetric Elements
(Normal to Edge) Spatial ZX
Edge Load on Plane Strain and Edge Load on Plane Strain and Stress
Stress Elements (Normal to
Elements (Normal to Edge) ZX
Edge) ZX
CAE
NX 9.0
Edge Load on Plane Strain and Edge Load on Plane Strain and Stress
Stress Elements (Normal to
Elements (Normal to Edge) - Spatial
Edge) - Spatial ZX
ZX
Edge Load on Plane Strain and Edge Load on Plane Strain and Stress
Stress Elements ZX
Elements ZX
Magnitude and Direction ZX
Magnitude and Direction ZX
Gravity
Gravity ZX
Gravity ZX
Whole Model ZX
Whole Model ZX
Model Subset ZX
Model Subset ZX
SPC ZX
SPC ZX
Enforced Displacement
Constraint
Components ZX
Components ZX
Manual Coupling
MPC ZX
MPC ZX
Rotation
Select the 2D Solid Option to identify the plane for the axisymmetric model: ZX Plane, Z
Axis, or XY Plane, X Axis.
2.
Create axisymmetric, plane strain, or plane stress elements on the axisymmetric plane.
3.
4.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
CAE
477
NX 9.0
Edge loads for plane stress and plane strain elements (NX Nastran)
What is it?
Use the new Edge Load command to define a surface traction on an edge of:
For SOL 601 analyses, you can define the surface tractions such that they:
Maintain their orientation to the elements geometry or maintain their original orientation in a geometric
nonlinear analysis.
Linear structural solutions (SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, and 200)
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Edge Load
478
CAE
NX 9.0
Note
For SOL 601 analyses, the elements must be oriented in the XZ plane.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Edge-to-Edge Contact
CAE
479
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
A Simulation is the displayed part and the work part and NX Nastran is the specified
solver.
A Response Simulation solution process is active.
480
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLED1 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT(x), where the table lookup at frequency or time x returns yT(x) as the value for the dynamic
load.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLED2 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT(x X1), where the table lookup at frequency or time x returns yT(x X1) as the value for the
dynamic load. X1 is a parameter used to shift the data range.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLED3 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT((x X1)/X2), where the table lookup at frequency or time x returns yT((x X1)/X2) as the
value for the dynamic load. X1 is a parameter used to shift the data range and X2 is a parameter used to
scale the data range.
CAE
NX 9.0
In the TABLED1 bulk entry, you can designate whether the table lookup is from a linear-linear, log-log, or semi-log
representation of the tabular data. In the TABLED2 and TABLED3 bulk entries, you cannot designate that the table
lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data.
For more information on log-log and semi-log representations of tabular data, see New interpolation options for
table field data.
You control which TABLEDi entry NX writes to the Nastran input file from the Table Field dialog box.
If you want NX to write a TABLED1 entry to the Nastran input file, make sure that the Independent
Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check boxes are not selected. To designate that the
table lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data, select the log option of your
choice from the Algorithm list. Otherwise, the table lookup is from the default linear-linear representation
of the tabular data.
If you want NX to write a TABLED2 entry to the Nastran input file, do the following:
o
Select the Independent Value Shift X1 check box and enter a value for the X1 parameter in the
Independent Value Shift X1 box.
Make sure the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is not selected.
Because TABLED2 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Shift X1 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
If you want NX to write a TABLED3 entry to the Nastran input file, do either of the following:
o
Select the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box and enter a value for the X2 parameter in
the Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Select both the Independent Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check
boxes and enter a values for the X1 and X2 parameters in the Independent Value Shift X1 box
and Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Because TABLED3 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
CAE
481
NX 9.0
interpolates or extrapolates the tabular data to determine the value of the material property at a specific temperature.
Nastran uses the interpolated or extrapolated value of the material property during the solve.
Prior to this release, NX supported writing temperature-dependent material properties to only TABLEM1 bulk
entries. With this release, NX also supports writing temperature-dependent material properties to TABLEM2 and
TABLEM3 bulk entries. Nastran uses the TABLEM1, TABLEM2, and TABLEM3 bulk entries as follows:
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM1 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = yT(x), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT(x) as the value for the material property.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM2 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = zyT(x X1), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT(x X1), where X1 is a parameter
used to shift the data range. The returned value is then scaled by z to obtain the value for the material
property, where z is the value of the material property on the corresponding MATi bulk entry.
The (x,y) tabular data listed on a TABLEM3 bulk entry is used to form a piecewise representation of the
form y = zyT((x X1)/X2), where the table lookup at temperature x returns yT((x X1)/X2), where X1 is a
parameter used to shift the data range and X2 is a parameter used to scale the data range. The returned
value is then scaled by z to obtain the value for the material property, where z is the value of the material
property on the corresponding MATi bulk entry.
In the TABLEM1 bulk entry, you can designate whether the table lookup is from a linear-linear, log-log, or semi-log
representation of the tabular data. In the TABLEM2 and TABLEM3 bulk entries, you cannot designate that the table
lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data.
For more information on log-log and semi-log representations of tabular data, see New interpolation options for
table field data.
You control which TABLEMi entry NX writes to the Nastran input file from the Table Field dialog box.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM1 entry to the Nastran input file, make sure that the Independent
Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check boxes are not selected. To designate that the
table lookup is from a log-log or semi-log representation of the tabular data, select the log option of your
choice from the Algorithm list. Otherwise, the table lookup is from the default linear-linear representation
of the tabular data.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM2 entry to the Nastran input file, do the following:
o
Select the new Independent Value Shift X1 check box and enter a value for the X1 parameter
in the Independent Value Shift X1 box.
Make sure the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is not selected.
Because TABLEM2 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Shift X1 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
If you want NX to write a TABLEM3 entry to the Nastran input file, do either of the following:
o
Select the Independent Value Divisor X2 check box and enter a value for the X2 parameter in
the Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Select both the Independent Value Shift X1 and Independent Value Divisor X2 check
boxes and enter a values for the X1 and X2 parameters in the Independent Value Shift X1 box
and Independent Value Divisor X2 box.
Because TABLEM3 bulk entries only support linear-linear representation of the tabular data, the
Independent Value Divisor X2 check box is unavailable if you select any of the log options from the
Algorithm list.
482
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Select a materialCopy the selected material
FieldTable
Constructor
Command Finder
Manage Materials
Location in dialog box
Quality check
NX Nastran keyword
CQUAD4
QAD_AR
CQUAD8
Skew angle
Q8_SKEW
Taper ratio
Q8_TAPER
CTRIA6
Q8_EPLR
CAE
TA6_EPLR
483
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Element Quality
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
A FEM or Simulation file as the displayed part and the work part
NX Nastran version 9.0 or higher as the specified solver
Command Finder
Modeling Objects
Location in dialog box
484
Support for previewing the location of contact and glue elements that are created during the solve.
CAE
NX 9.0
When NX writes the preview output depends on whether you are previewing contact or clue conditions:
For contact conditions, the software writes the preview output when it evaluates the initial, open contact
condition. This occurs before any loading is applied to the model.
For glue conditions, the software writes the preview output when it creates the glue elements. This occurs
before any loading is applied to the model.
When you import the preview file into NX, the software uses these dummy entities to display the source and target
locations for contact and glue conditions. In the following simple example, (1) shows the original model in which
the red mesh is enforced vertically into the green mesh. (2) shows how the preview appears when you import the file
into NX.
Note
The colors shown in (2) were manually modified in NX after the preview file was imported.
All contact elements begin with an active status. By the end of the solution, some contact elements may become
inactive because they did not participate in the converged solution. To view the locations of the final, active contact
elements, you can use the options on the Contact Result tab in the Structural Output Request modeling
object dialog box to request the output of contact tractions. After you solve the solution, you can view the contact
tractions in the OP2 file in NX Post Processing. The following graphic shows an example of those contact tractions.
CAE
485
NX 9.0
NX Nastran uses the following naming convention for the preview files:
<input_file_name>_cnt_preview<subcaseid>_<contactsetid>.dat
<input_file_name>_glue_preview<subcaseid>_<gluesetid>.dat
For example, if an input file named test.dat includes a subcase numbered 101 and a glue condition numbered 201,
then the name of the resulting preview file is:
test_glue_preview_101_201.dat
The Export a Preview Bulk Data File option corresponds to the PREVIEW field for the BCTPARM and
BGPARM bulk data entries.
Option
486
Description
Example
CAE
NX 9.0
The following example illustrates the differences between the Edge-to-Surface Glue Stiffness Distribution
on Glued Surface option. This example includes an equal compressive pressure load on the top and bottom of the
solid elements. Here, the edges of elements in the 2D mesh (shown in blue) are glued to the faces of the elements in
the 3D mesh (shown in green).
Option
Description
Strains Are
Not
Constrained
The deformations in
the solid mesh
demonstrate that the
glue stiffness did not
prevent local strain at
the glue interface.
CAE
Example
487
NX 9.0
Strains Are
Constrained
The deformations in
the solid mesh
demonstrate that the
glue stiffness did
prevent local strain at
the glue interface.
Description
TMCHHAT
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Modeling Objects
Location in dialog box
488
CAE
NX 9.0
Application
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Modeling Objects
Location in dialog box
CAE
489
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Right-click a solutionSolve
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
A FEM or Simulation file as the displayed part and the work part
NX Nastran version 9.0 or higher as the specified solver
Command Finder
Modeling Objects
Location in dialog box
490
CAE
NX 9.0
Executive control, case control, and bulk data entry support enhancements
Parameters
Executive control, case control, and bulk data entry support enhancements
Name
NX
Nastran
import/
export
support
MSC
Notes
Nastran
import/
export
support
ACCEL1
Yes
Yes
BCTPARA
ACCEL1 loads are now imported as field data if you select the Import
selective loads as field data option in the Import Simulation
dialog box.
The TMCHHAT, TMCFC, and TMCFT fields are now supported.
The PENETOL, TCMOD, RFORCE, LFORCE, RTPCHECK,
RTPMAX fields are no longer supported.
BCTPARM
Yes
No
BGTPARM
Yes
No
CBEAR
Yes
No
CPLSTN3
Yes
No
CPLSTN4
Yes
No
CPLSTN6
Yes
No
CPLSTN8
Yes
No
CPLSTS3
Yes
No
CPLSTS4
Yes
No
CAE
491
NX 9.0
associated data.
CPLSTS6
Yes
No
CPLSTS8
Yes
No
CQUADX4
CQUADX8
CTRAX3
CTRAX6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
You can now display the material orientation vectors for this
element.
You can now display the material orientation vectors for this
element.
You can now display the material orientation vectors for this
element.
You can now display the material orientation vectors for this
element.
Yes
FORCE1
Yes
Yes
For more information, see Support for follower Forces and Moments
(Nastran).
FORCE2
Yes
Yes
GEOMCHECK
executive control
command
Yes
Yes
GROUP
492
Yes
No
CAE
NX 9.0
import.
MATCID
Yes
No
MODSEL case
control command
Yes
No
For SOL 103 and SOL 110, this command is imported at the solution
level. For SOL 111 and SOL 112, this command is imported at the
subcase level.
MOMENT1
Yes
Yes
MOMENT2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NSM
Yes
Yes
NSM1
Yes
Yes
NSMADD
Yes
Yes
NSML
Yes
Yes
NSML1
Yes
Yes
NXSTRAT
Yes
No
PBEAR
Yes
No
Currently, importing the PBEAR entry from OP2 files is supported only
through the IBULK datablock.
For more information, see Rotor dynamics (NX Nastran).
PLOADE1
Yes
No
PLOADX1
Yes
Yes
The value of PA must equal the value for PB.
(MSC
PLOADX1 is now supported in the XY plane. In previous releases, it
Axisym
was only supported in the ZX plane.
metric
Thermal
analyses)
PPLANE
Yes
No
CAE
493
NX 9.0
RFORCE1
Yes
No
ROTORB
Yes
No
ROTORD
Yes
No
ROTORG
Yes
No
RMETHOD case
control command
Yes
No
TABLED1
Yes
Yes
The XAXIS and YAXIS entries are now supported for import
and export.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
494
Yes
Yes
The XAXIS and YAXIS entries are now supported for import
and export.
CAE
NX 9.0
Yes
Yes
The value for the independent variable can now be specified more than
once, provided that it is not one of the two end points.
The EXTRAP field introduced in the NX Nastran 9.0 release is not
currently supported for import or export.
For more information, see TABLEMi bulk entry support (Nastran).
TABLEM3
Yes
Yes
The value for the independent variable can now be specified more than
once, provided that it is not one of the two end points.
The EXTRAP field introduced in the NX Nastran 9.0 release is not
currently supported for import or export.
For more information, see TABLEMi bulk entry support (Nastran).
TABLES1
Yes
Yes
The value for the independent variable can now be specified more than
once, provided that it is not one of the two end points.
TEMP
Yes
Yes
TIME executive
control command
Yes
Yes
TSTEPNL
Yes
Yes
The KDAMP and KUPDATE fields are now supported. Use these fields to
include differential stiffness in the calculation of structural damping and
specify the method for controlling stiffness updates.
These new fields are available in NX Nastran 9.0 and higher.
CAE
AGGPCH
DIGITS
EXTBEMI
EXTBEMO
F56
GDAMPF
INP4FMT
MPCZERO
MTRFCTD
MTRFCTV
OIBULK
OP2FMT
495
NX 9.0
OP4FMT
PBRPROP
RDCNT
RDRESVEC
RMSSF
ROTCSV
ROTGPF
ROTSYNC
SFEF70
182
204
CORDM
321
Q4_WARP
322
Q4_IAMIN
325
T3_IAMAX
327
BEAM_OFF
329
MSGLIMIT
330
MSGTYPE
332
TET_EPLR
334
HEX_AR
335
HEX_EPLR
496
Description of
change
CAE
NX 9.0
Description of
change
337
HEX_WARP
338
PEN_AR
339
PEN_EPLR
341
PEN_WARP
442
447
QDX_SKEW
448
QDX_TAPR
449
QDX_IAMN
450
QDX_IAMX
451
QDX_AR
452
QDX_EPLR
454
TRX_IAMN
455
TRX_IAMX
456
TRX_AR
457
TRX_EPLR
462
CAE
497
NX 9.0
Description of
change
option when
SYSTEM(462) = 1.
466
PYR_AR
467
PYR_EPLR
469
PYR_WARP
509
519
524
RANFRF
525
526
528
539
Default changed
from 0 to 3 in NX
Nastran 9
542
550
RMSVM
Determines whether the RMS von Mises stress is computed New system cell for
when the stress RMS output is requested with the RMS
NX Nastran 9
describer on the STRESS case control command.
553
QAD_AR
498
CAE
NX 9.0
Description of
change
560
PCHLN
563
Q8_TAPER
564
Q8_IAMIN
565
Q8_IAMAX
566
Q8_AR
567
Q8_EPLR
568
Q8_SKEW
569
TA6_AR
570
TA6_EPLR
571
TA6_IAMN
572
TA6_IAMX
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
FileImportSimulation
FileExportSimulation
CAE
499
NX 9.0
These improvements make it easier for you to import, append, and merge data from an incomplete source solver
input file into an existing NX FEM or Simulation destination file.
Select Append to import a solver input data file into an existing FEM or Simulation file and append the
solver data to the existing data. The solver input data file that you import must be complete and valid.
Select Append Merge to import data from an incomplete solver data input file into an existing FEM or
Simulation file and merge that data into the existing NX file. The solver data input file that you import does
not need to be complete.
In previous releases, you used the Merge Entities option in the Solver Deck Append dialog box to control
whether NX appended an entire run-ready solver input file into an existing FEM or Simulation file or simply merged
portions of an input deck or an incomplete input deck into an existing model.
Select No if you do not want to create a new solution. All loads and boundary conditions are placed in the
appropriate containers in the Simulation Navigator, but they are not referenced in the current solution.
Any appended modeling objects are also not references in the current solution.
Select Yes to create a new solution. All loads and boundary conditions are placed in the appropriate
containers in the Simulation Navigator and referenced in the current solution. Any appended modeling
objects are also referenced in the new solution.
500
Select Ignore Deck Data if you do not want to append an entity from the solver input file when it
conflicts with an existing entity in the NX destination file. For example, if both the source solver input file
and destination NX file have a coordinate system with an ID of 15, NX does not append the coordinate
system from the solver input file.
Select Modify Using Deck Data to replace the node, material, or physical property data in the NX
destination file with the data from the source solver input file.
Select Append Deck Data to specify a numerical offset to increment the label (ID) when conflicts occur.
With this option, if NX detects a conflict between an entity in the source input file and the destination NX
file, it uses the offset to change the ID of the entity in the source input file during the append. The software
also updates any references to that entity in the source file. For example, if you append a CBAR element
that originally references nodes 1 and 2, and those nodes are renumbered with an offset of 1000 because of
a conflict, the software updates the CBAR element to reference nodes 1001 and 1002.
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
Ability to control whether nodes and elements in INCLUDE files are imported as NX groups.
Regions
Degree-of-freedom sets
Output requests
Note
CAE
Because output requests can reference the SET command in the case control section of a Nastran
input file, if you select the Output requests option, NX automatically imports any SET
commands as well.
If present the PARAM,Gx,y,z is processed to build group x in NX using nodes from SET y and
elements from SET z.
501
NX 9.0
For example:
Assembling physical property data...
...Processing PBAR physical properties...
***ERROR : PBAR refers to a non existent or unsupported material. First
occurrence is PBAR 10 material 1
...Processing PBARL physical properties...
...Processing PBEAM physical properties...
...Processing PBEAML physical properties...
...Processing PBUSH physical properties...
......Retrieving PBUSHT data...
...Processing PBUSH1D physical properties...
...Processing PDAMP physical properties...
......Retrieving PDAMPT data...
Found 4 missing material references
-------------------------------------------------------Physical type, Physical id -> Missing material reference
-------------------------------------------------------PBAR
, 10
-> 1
PBARL
, 11
-> 1
PBEAM
, 20
-> 1
PBEAML , 21
-> 1
--------------------------------------------------------
You can use the Output verbose messaging option to control whether the software uses verbose messaging. If
you select this option, you can also limit the number of messaging lines reported.
The banner section of the import file indicates whether verbose messaging is turned on.
502
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
Preservation of load and boundary condition naming during the data round-trip process.
Preservation of mesh and mesh collector during the data round-trip process.
CAE
503
NX 9.0
You can use this capability with a Nastran .dat file or with a Nastran OP2 file that contains the IBULK
datablock. The IBULK data block is an unsorted copy of the original bulk data, including comments. Use
the PARAM,OIBULK,YES parameter to include the IBULK datablock in your input file.
Note
If you import your data from a Nastran OP2 file, NX capitalizes lower case letters.
If NX imports multiple instances of a load or boundary condition, NX appends a numerical extension to the
root name of the load or boundary condition to make the names unique.
NX may be unable to preserve load and boundary condition names if the original Nastran input file that you
export from NX contains a Round Trip Parameters modeling object that is referenced in a solution.
When the Import selective loads as field data option is selected in the Import Simulation dialog box:
Any TEMP(LOAD) commands that are referenced by an Axisymmetric Structural solution are imported
as a node ID table.
Any ACCEL1 bulk data entries that are referenced by a Structural solution are imported as a node
ID table.
NX retains a maximum of 131 characters from a NASTRAN comment line. This character count includes the
comment key ($* NX Mesh Collector:) and the name of the entity. Any additional characters are truncated.
To use this capability, select the Use comment cards for entity names option in the Import Simulation
dialog box.
Note that:
504
You can use this capability with a Nastran .dat file or with a Nastran OP2 file that contains the IBULK
datablock. The IBULK data block is an unsorted copy of the original bulk data including comments. Use the
PARAM,OIBULK,YES parameter to include the IBULK datablock in your input file.
This capability works only for Nastran input files that are created in NX 9.
CAE
NX 9.0
If you modify the solver input file after you export it, NX may not be able to retain the mesh and mesh
collector names when you re-import the file.
NX may be unable to preserve mesh and mesh collector names if the original Nastran input file that you
export from NX contains a Round Trip Parameters modeling object that is referenced in a solution.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
FileImportSimulation
CAE
505
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
Supported parameters
Import support
Export support
*ASSEMBLY
NAME
Yes
N/A
*END
ASSEMBLY
N/A
Yes
N/A
*END
INSTANCE
N/A
Yes
N/A
*END PART
N/A
Yes
N/A
*HEAT
TRANSFER
Yes
506
CAE
NX 9.0
Keyword
Supported parameters
Import support
Export support
*INSTANCE
NAME, PART
Yes
N/A
*MPC
Yes
Yes
*PART
NAME
Yes
N/A
*PHYSICAL
CONSTANTS
Yes
Yes
PRESSURE
*PREPRINT
Yes
Yes
*SOLID
SECTION
Yes
The COMPOSITE and
SYMMETRIC parameters are
now supported for import.
Yes
*STEP
The SOLVER=ITERATIVE
parameter is now supported.
Yes
Yes
*SURFACE
Yes
Yes
The
Yes
Yes
Combining Abaqus
surfaces on import
Yes
COMBINE=INTERSECTION/U
NION/DIFFERENCE options
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
CAE
507
NX 9.0
FileImportSimulation
Menu
Import only elements from an input file into an NX FEM that already contains nodes.
Import group definitions that reference nodes and elements where the nodes and elements already exist in
NX
Import loads and constraints into a model that already contains a mesh. This is useful, for example, if you
need to import boundary conditions from custom load generation software into an NX Simulation file.
When you use the Merge Entities option to append data, NX does not modify any entities that were present in NX
prior to the merge. For example, NX does not modify:
Solution attributes.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
FileAppend
508
Their keyword category, such as loads, boundary conditions, or materials (the By card family option).
CAE
NX 9.0
If you choose the By card name option, you can also choose to import selected entries as either commented or
uncommented User Defined Text. Importing selected keywords as uncommented User Defined Text can be
helpful if you need to import a keyword that is only partially supported for import (not all parameters are supported).
If you import the keyword as uncommented User Defined Text, NX imports all parameters.
Note
With this capability, do not to make modifications to the unsupported keywords. If you make changes to
unsupported syntax, Abaqus may either fail to solve the file or may produce incorrect results.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
CAE
Currently, NX fully imports Abaqus models that have only one part definition that contains only one
instance of a part. This means that NX imports all associated model definition data (nodes, elements,
materials, physical property tables, sets, and surfaces) and analysis data (solution steps, loads, and
boundary conditions).
Because all data defined within a part, instance, or the assembly is local to that part, instance, or the
assembly, node and element labels and names (such as set names and surface names) do not need to be
unique throughout a model. They need to be unique only within the part, instance, or assembly where they
are defined.
For Abaqus models that contain multiple instances of a single part or multiple parts, NX:
o
Imports only the model definition data (nodes, elements, materials, physical property tables, sets,
surfaces). NX issues a message to indicate the data that is imported.
Imports all nodes and elements defined for a part as a new group in the Simulation Navigator. NX
uses the name of the Abaqus part as the name of the new group.
509
NX 9.0
Offsets all node labels and element labels and modifies the labels in any associated set or surface
definitions. NX issues a message that indicates the changes that occurred to the labels during
import.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
Membrane elements
Truss elements
Description
CPS3
CPS4
CPS4I
CPS4R
CPS6
CPS6M
CPS8
510
CAE
NX 9.0
Abaqus element
Description
CPS8R
You use the 2D Mesh dialog box to create Abaqus plane stress elements. You can then use the Solid 2D Plane
physical property table dialog box to define properties for the elements, such as material orientation and default
thickness. The options in the Solid 2D Plane dialog box correspond to the Abaqus *SOLID SECTION keyword.
Note
By default, NX creates these elements with their standard formulation. You can use the Element
Formulation list in the Mesh Associated Data dialog box to select a different formulation, such as
Incompatible Modes or Reduced Integration.
Description
CPE3
CPE3H
CPE4
CPE4H
CPE4I
CPE4IH
CPE4R
CPE4RH
CPE6
CPE6H
CPE6M
CPE6MH
CAE
511
NX 9.0
Abaqus element
Description
CPE8
CPE8H
CPE8R
CPE8RH
You use the 2D Mesh dialog box to create Abaqus plane strain elements. You can then use the Solid 2D Plane
physical property table dialog box to define properties for the elements, such as material orientation and default
thickness. The options in the Solid 2D Plane dialog box correspond to the Abaqus *SOLID SECTION keyword.
Note
By default, NX creates these elements with their standard formulation. You can use the Element
Formulation list in the Mesh Associated Data dialog box to select a different formulation, such as
Incompatible Modes or Reduced Integration.
Membrane elements
The following table details the Abaqus general membrane elements that are now supported in NX. You can use
general membrane elements in three-dimensional models in which the deformation of the structure can evolve in
three dimensions.
Membrane elements are surface elements that only transmit in-plane forces. They do not transmit no moments and
have no bending stiffness. Membrane elements are used to represent thin surfaces in space that offer strength in the
plane of the element. For example, the thin sheet of rubber that forms a balloon is an example of a membrane
surface. Membrane elements are often used to represent thin, stiffening components in solid structures, such as a
reinforcing layer in a continuum.
Abaqus element
Description
M3D3
M3D4
M3D4R
M3D6
M3D8
M3D8R
You use the 2D Mesh dialog box to create Abaqus membrane elements. You can then use the Membrane
Section physical property table dialog box to define properties for the elements, such as thickness, thickness
change behavior, material definition, and material orientation. The options in the Membrane Section dialog box
correspond to the Abaqus *MEMBRANE keyword.
512
CAE
NX 9.0
Note
By default, NX creates these elements with their standard formulation. You can use the Element
Formulation list in the Mesh Associated Data dialog box to select a different formulation, such as
Reduced Integration.
Truss elements
This release adds support for certain Abaqus truss elements. Truss elements are long, slender structural elements that
can transmit only axial forces. They do not transmit moments.
You use truss elements in 2D and 3D models to model slender, line-like structures that support loading only along
the axis or the centerline of the element. Moments or forces perpendicular to the centerline are not supported.
Abaqus element
Description
T3D2
T3D2H
You can use either the 1D Mesh or the 1D Connection command to create truss elements. You can then use the
Truss physical property table dialog box to define the material used by the truss elements and their cross-sectional
area. The options in the Truss dialog box correspond to the Abaqus *SOLID SECTION keyword.
Note
By default, NX creates truss elements with their standard formulation. You can use the Element
Formulation list in the Mesh Associated Data dialog box to select the Hybrid formulation.
Description
DCOUP3D Three-dimensional
distributed coupling
element. Use a
DCOUP3D element
to:
CAE
Distribute
forces and
moments on a
reference
node to a
collection of
nodes.
Prescribe an
average
displacement
Element creation
*DISTRIBUTED
COUPLING
513
NX 9.0
Abaqus
element
Description
and rotation
to a collection
of nodes.
JOINTC
Distribute
mass to a
collection of
nodes.
Control the
force and
mass
distribution
through the
use of weight
factors
specified for
each coupling
node.
Create a
flexible
coupling
between
structural and
solid
elements.
514
Element creation
at least two
nodes.
o
A weight factor
of 1.0 is used to
distribute the
loads and mass to
all coupling
nodes.
*JOINT
The
stiffness
behavior of
the spring.
Tthese
options
correspond
to the
Abaqus
*SPRING
keyword.
The
viscous
damping
properties
CAE
NX 9.0
Abaqus
element
Description
Element creation
of the
dashpot.
These
options
correspond
to the
With a JOINTC
element, the joint
behavior consists of
linear or nonlinear
springs and dashpots in
parallel. These couple
the corresponding
components of relative
displacement and of
relative rotation in the
joint.
*DASHPOT
keyword.
An
orientation
parameter
that
specifies
the initial
orientation
of the local
system in
the joint.
These
options
correspond
to the
*ORIENTA
TION
keyword.
SPRINGA Axial spring element
Use either the 1D Mesh or the 1D
between two nodes
Connection command to create a
whose line of action is SPRINGA element.
the line joining the two
nodes. This line of
action may rotate in a
large displacement
analysis. A SPRINGA
element introduces
stiffness between two
degrees-of-freedom
without adding an
associated mass.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
CAE
515
NX 9.0
Description
CAX3
CAX3H
CAX4
CAX4H
CAX4I
CAX4IH
CAX4R
CAX4RH
CAX6
CAX6H
CAX8
CAX8H
CAX8R
CAX8RH
516
CAE
NX 9.0
Description
DCAX3
DCAX4
DCAX6
DCAX8
None (Structural and Thermal analysis types only) No axisymmetric elements can be used.
XY Plane, Y Axis (All Abaqus analysis types) If axisymmetric elements are used, they must be on the
XY plane. The axisymmetric rotational axis is Y.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
A FEM file is the displayed part and work part, and Abaqus is the specified solver
CAE
517
NX 9.0
In this release, when you import an Abaqus input file that contains the *SOLID SECTION keyword with the
COMPOSITE parameter, NX creates the appropriate Solid Laminate physical property in your FEM file.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
CONTACT
ECHO
HISTORY
MODEL
PARSUBSTITUTION
PARVALUES
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
518
CAE
NX 9.0
The surfaces that you combine must be of the same type. For example:
o
You can combine any number of existing surfaces to create a new surface.
When you import an Abaqus input file that includes the COMBINE parameter, NX processes the union, intersection,
or difference between the specified surfaces. NX imports the resulting combined surface into NX as a Simulation
Region.
Note
If you later export this file back to Abaqus, the exported Abaqus input file will differ from the original
Abaqus input file. This difference occurs because NX writes out the COMBINE parameter when it exports the
Simulation Region that was created from the combined region.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
If you select Yes from the Distribute Mass option list, Abaqus distributes the specified concentrated
Mass value among all lumped mass elements that are associated with that physical property table.
For example, consider a physical property table created to define the mass values for 4 lumped mass
elements in one region of a model. If you select Yes from the Distribute Mass option list and specify a
Mass value of 0.1 kg, Abaqus assigns a mass magnitude of 0.25 kg to each of the four elements.
CAE
519
NX 9.0
If you select No from the Distribute Mass option list, Abaqus directly assigns the specified concentrated
Mass value to each individual lumped mass element that is associated with that physical property table.
For example, if you select No from the Distribute Mass option list and specify a Mass value of 0.1 kg,
Abaqus assigns a mass magnitude of 0.1 kg to each element.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Physical Properties
InsertPhysical Properties
Menu
If you specify a cross-sectional area, the softened contact relationship is specified in terms of overclosure
(clearance) vs. contact pressure.
If you do not specify a cross-sectional area, the softened contact relationship is specified in terms of
overclosure (clearance) vs. contact force.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Physical Properties
520
CAE
NX 9.0
Menu
InsertPhysical Properties
Description
Linearity
Beam
Nonlinear
Link
Nonlinear
Note
Any rotational DOF for the two nodes
are not included in this constraint.
Tie
Pin
Note
Any rotational DOF for the two nodes
are not included in this constraint.
The options in the Manual Coupling dialog box correspond to the parameters for the Abaqus *MPC keyword.
CAE
521
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Manual Coupling
Simulation Navigator
Absolute zero
In previous releases, NX automatically exported the appropriate constants when the physics of the model required
them. Beginning in this release, you can now use options on the new Physical Constants tab in the Solution
dialog box to explicitly include specific physical constants in your solver input file.
The options available on the Physical Constants tab depend upon your specified analysis type:
The User Specified option to select individual constants to include in the Abaqus input file.
The As required by the solution option to include only the constants that are necessary for the
specific solution. For example, if your solution uses a creep material with the Hyperbolic Law
formulation, the software includes the Absolute Zero constant in the Abaqus input file.
For Thermal and Axisymmetric Thermal analyses, you can select which individual constants to write
out to the input file. By default, the software writes out all three constants.
522
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Select Direct to use the direct sparse matrix solver. The Abaqus direct sparse solver uses a multifront
technique that can reduce the computational time required to solve the equations if the equation system has
a sparse structure. This type of sparse matrix structure often occurs when the physical model is made from
several connected parts, such as a wheel with spokes. Parts modeled with beams, trusses, and shell
elements also have sparse matrix stiffness.
Select Iterative to use the iterative linear equation solver. The Abaqus iterative solver is based on the
domain decomposition method. You can use the iterative solver only for linear and nonlinear static, quasistatic, and steady-state heat transfer solution analyses. Additionally, the stiffness matrix must be symmetric
and the solution must contain a single load case. The iterative solver finds an approximate solution to the
linear system of equations. You should select only the Iterative option for very large, well-conditioned
models, typically several million degrees-of-freedom. In general, the iterative solver is most appropriate for
large, block-like or chunky parts. The iterative solver requires less disk storage than the direct sparse
solver, but it also uses more in-core memory than the direct solver.
This option corresponds to the SOLVER=ITERATIVE parameter for the Abaqus *STEP keyword.
In previous releases, the direct sparse solver was used automatically for all analyses.
For more information, see Direct linear equation solver and Iterative linear equation solver in the Abaqus Analysis
Users Manual.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
CAE
523
NX 9.0
Select Steady State Analysis to omit the specific heat term in the governing heat transfer equation. This
means that the analysis has no intrinsic, physically meaningful time scale.
Select Transient to perform a heat transient analysis. In transient problems, Abaqus performs time
integration with the backward Euler method in the pure conduction elements.
You can use Transient heat transfer steps to perform uncoupled heat transfer analyses. These analyses model:
These options correspond to the TRANSIENT parameter for the Abaqus *HEAT TRANSFER keyword. In previous
releases, only the STEADY STATE parameter was supported.
Note
You must include specific heat data in your material (*SPECIFIC HEAT). If you do not, Abaqus issues an
error message when you solve the model.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
524
CAE
NX 9.0
box blank, NX does not include the *HEADING keyword in the Abaqus input file when you export or solve the
solution.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Select SPOS to specify that the face is the positive side in the element-based surface. The positive face is
the face in the direction of the element normal.
Select SNEG to specify that the face is the negative side in the element-based surface. The negative face is
the face in the direction opposite to the element normal.
Before you use the Side option to designate the positive or negative side of a surface, you should first ensure that
the normals of the specified elements are oriented consistently.
Tip
Use the 2D Element Normals command to evaluate the consistency of the element normals in the mesh.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Simulation Region
CAE
525
NX 9.0
Select Penalty Linear to specify the linear penalty method. The penalty stiffness is constant, so the
pressure-overclosure relationship is linear. Abaqus sets the default penalty stiffness to 10 times the
representative underlying element stiffness. You can also select the User Specified option from the
Penalty Stiffness list to specify the stiffness and scaling factor.
Select Penalty Nonlinear to specify the nonlinear penalty method for enforcement of the contact
constraint. The penalty stiffness increases linearly between regions of constant low initial stiffness and
constant high final stiffness, resulting in a nonlinear pressure-overclosure relationship.
Select Augmented Lagrange to use the augmented Lagrange method. This method uses the same kind
of stiff approximation as the Penalty Linear and Penalty Nonlinear methods, but it also uses
augmentation iterations to improve the accuracy of the approximation.
Select Direct to enforce a given pressure-overclosure behavior per contact constraint without
approximation or the use of augmentation iterations.
Note
The Enforcement Method option is available only for analyses that have a hard pressure-overclosure
relationship between the contacting surfaces.
For more information, see Contact constraint enforcement methods in Abaqus/Standard in the Abaqus Analysis
Users Manual.
526
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Modeling Objects
Location in dialog box
TypeContact Pair
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Assign Materials
Location in dialog box
CAE
527
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Physical Properties
InsertPhysical Properties
Menu
Field output is intended for infrequent requests for a large portion of the model. You can use field output,
for example, to generate contour plots and animations. Only complete sets of basic variables, for example,
all the stress or strain components, can be requested as field output. Contact surface output, element output,
nodal output, and radiation output are available as field output
History output is intended for relatively frequent output requests for small portions of the model, such as
the displacements at a specific node. You can request Individual variables , such as a particular stress
component. Contact surface output, element output, energy output, integrated output, time incrementation
output, modal output, nodal output, and radiation output are available as history output. For history output
you must specify the set of elements (a node group or an element group) for which you are requesting
output.
In previous releases, you could write only selected output requests as either field data or history data.
528
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Modeling Objects
Abaqus Structural Output Requests or Abaqus
Thermal Output Requests
Location in dialog box
NX uses the RMODIF real constants data to set the Contact Controls options in the Step dialog box. In NX, you
can use the Contact Controls options to change options that you set globally for the solution in the CONTAC174
Real Constants dialog box.
Note
If the ANSYS input file you import contains an RMODIF command that has multiple instances of the same
real constant with different values in the same step, NX imports only the last value it encounters. For
example, suppose step 2 has PINB=1.25 and PINB=1.55, NX imports only PINB=1.55. This can occur when
the ANSYS input file is not generated by NX.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
CAE
529
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Temperature Load
In an existing coordinate system under the CSYS node in the Simulation Navigator.
When you export the model, NX transforms both the models origin and orientation. NX transforms all objects in
the model to the new coordinate system, including the location of nodes, loads, boundary conditions, and material
orientation vectors.
For ANSYS models, NX transforms the model to the new coordinate system by adding the coordinate system that
you specify using the Model Orientation option, to the top of the coordinate system hierarchy.
For example, consider an ANSYS FEM file that has three coordinate systems defined, all at the same level in the
coordinate system hierarchy.
530
CAE
NX 9.0
If you select Absolute from the Use Coordinate System list, NX uses the LOCAL command to write out the
data for csys1, csys2, and csys3 when you export the model:
If you select csys3 from the Use Coordinate System list, NX uses the LOCAL command to write out the data for
csys3. It uses the CLOCAL command to write out the data for csys1 and csys2:
If you later reimport this ANSYS input file back into NX:
The coordinate systems are re-numbered. In ANSYS, coordinate system ID values of 1-10 are reserved for
internal use. Therefore, on export, NX adds an offset value of 10 to all coordinate system IDs that have a
value of 10 or less.
csys3 is renumbered as csys13 and becomes the parent coordinate system of csys1 and csys2 which are
renumbered as csys11 and csys12.
Node coordinates refer to the selected coordinate system instead of the absolute coordinate system. In
ANSYS, the NBLOCK command does not support reference coordinate systems. Therefore, NX writes out
the nodes using the N command, regardless of the options you selected in the Formatting Options group
in the Export Simulation dialog box.
NX modifies material coordinate systems to refer to the selected coordinate system, unless the material
coordinate system is a parent coordinate system in the hierarchy. In this case, NX modifies the material
coordinate system to refer to the absolute coordinate system.
NX modifies nodes that do not have an assigned displacement coordinate system to refer to the selected
coordinate system as their displacement coordinate system. NX adds the ANSYS NROTAT,ALL command
in the input file before other NROTAT commands that are specific to each node. The NROTAT,ALL command
resolves the orientation for many loads and boundary conditions, including applied forces.
Note
Pressure loads that are created using the Components or Components-Spatial option do not use
nodal displacement coordinate systems for orientation. Instead, NX creates a material orientation
vector on export to orient them. Because material orientation vectors refer to the selected coordinate
system, no change occurs with the Model Orientation option as the actual orientation is correct.
The Acceleration and Gravity commands do not use coordinate systems that refer to nodes. Therefore,
NX transforms their X, Y, and Z components to the selected coordinate system.
Current limitations
CAE
For axisymmetric models, NX does not validate whether the coordinate system you select using the Model
Orientation option is correct. You must ensure that the parent coordinate system is in-plane. For example,
if you selected csys3 from the Use Coordinate System list, you must ensure that the Z-axis of csys3 is
parallel to the Z-axis of the absolute coordinate system.
531
NX 9.0
If your FEM file contains a coordinate system hierarchy, the coordinate system you select from the Use
Coordinate System list must be at the top level of that hierarchy. That is, it must be the parent
coordinate system. If the user-defined CSYS is a child, the exporter will write it out as the parent. This data
altering may lead to incorrect orientation.
In general, you should not use a nodal reference coordinate system to re-orient your model on export. This
can lead to issues, if that reference coordinate system becomes a child of a user-defined coordinate system.
Note
Although NX allows a model to have multiple nodal reference coordinate systems, ANSYS only
allows one nodal reference coordinate system for the entire model.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
532
Advanced Simulation
CAE
NX 9.0
Customer Default
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
Location in dialog box
At the beginning of a solution. You define this in the Output Controls tab in the Solution dialog box.
At the beginning of each step. You define this in the Output Controls tab in the Step dialog box.
When you import an ANSYS input file that contains OUTRES and OUTPR commands, NX:
Imports only the last OUTRES and OUTPR commands in the first step in the input file and places them at the
solution level.
Imports only the last OUTRES and OUTPR commands in each subsequent step, if the step contains multiple
output control commands. NX places these commands at the step level.
Advanced Simulation
Menu
FileImportSimulation
CAE
533
NX 9.0
The following axisymmetric, plane strain, or plane stress element types are included in the Structural and
Axisymmetric Structural environments:
PLANE182(3)
PLANE182(4)
PLANE183(6)
PLANE183(8)
The following axisymmetric, or planer element types are included in the Thermal and Axisymmetric Thermal
environments:
PLANE55(3)
PLANE55(4)
PLANE77(6)
PLANE77(8)
None (Structural and Thermal analysis types only) No axisymmetric elements can be used.
XY Plane, Y Axis (All Ansys analysis types) If axisymmetric elements are used, they must be on the
XY plane. The axisymmetric rotational axis is Y.
534
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
For elements, a FEM file as the displayed part and work part
For contact, a Simulation file as the displayed part and work part
ANSYS as the specified solver
Note
For performance reasons, the software previews only the first 5000 lines of syntax. You can increase or
decrease this limit using the Maximum Number of Output Lines for a Solver Syntax Preview
customer default.
You can use the Solver Syntax Preview command to validate that you have set up your model correctly prior to a
solve.
CAE
535
NX 9.0
Meshes
Materials
Physical properties
Coordinate systems
Groups
Modeling objects
To preview the syntax for nodes, select one or more elements and use the Node/Element Information command
to display a list of the nodes connected to each element.
Note
You must select the General Listing format option in the Node/Element Information dialog box to
view a list of the nodes.
To preview the syntax for physical properties, materials, and modeling objects, use the new Solver Syntax
Preview option in the Physical Properties Table Manager, Manage Materials, and Modeling Objects
Manager dialog boxes.
Loads
Constraints
Simulation objects
Simulation regions
Groups
Modeling objects
Implementation details
NX generates a preview only of the ANSYS syntax related to the entity that you select. This means that the
previewed syntax is based on a small subset of your FEM or Simulation file. In some cases, the previewed ANSYS
syntax will differ from the actual ANSYS syntax that NX generates when you export or solve an entire solution.
When you preview the syntax of certain types of entities, the previewed IDs may be different from the IDs
that NX later exports. This difference can occur because IDs need to be consistent and unique across the
entire ANSYS input file and also because ANSYS has requirements for certain types of IDs, In ANSYS, all
coordinate system IDs must be greater than 10. Differences in the previewed IDs can occur, for example,
when you preview:
o
536
Physical property tables, which include real constant data and SECDATA.
CAE
NX 9.0
Elements, including the referenced IDs for element coordinate systems ( ESYS), for example.
To avoid seeing differences in previewed ID values, you can use the Preview Input File button in the
Solution dialog box to preview the entire input file. When you click Preview Input File, NX previews
the entire ANSYS input file, although it only displays a few entities for each ANSYS command for
performance reasons.
When you preview the syntax of simulation regions, the syntax depends on the option that you selected
from the Use ESURF list in the Region dialog box when you created the region.
o
If you selected Yes, NX also previews the related CMBLOCK commands. The CMBLOCK commands
list the nodes that comprise the contact or target surfaces that are defined in ANSYS with the
ESURF command.
If you selected No, the software create the ANSYS contact elements in your ANSYS input file
when you export or solve your model. NX uses the CMBLOCK command to write out the group of
nodes that define the region. When you preview a region that was created using the No option,
NX includes the syntax for the related CMBLOCK commands. However, because this option creates
the target (or contact) elements only when you export or solve, those elements are not included in
the syntax preview.
When you preview a Bolt Pre-Load, NX also includes a preview of the associated SECDATA commands.
When you preview a Pressure load that was defined using the Components type, NX also include a
preview of the associated SURF154 elements.
When you preview the syntax of selected meshes, the software previews only the coordinate systems
(including any coordinate systems that may be exported as material orientation vectors), element tables,
real constants or SECDATA, nodes, and elements that are related to the selected mesh. The previewed
elements point to the IDs of element tables, real constants or SECDATA, and coordinate systems. These
previewed IDs may differ from the IDs that NX generates in the ANSYS input file when you export or
solve the solution.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
A FEM or Simulation file as the displayed part and work part, and ANSYS as the
specified solver
Simulation Navigator
Maximum Number of Output Lines for a Solver Syntax Preview customer default
Menu
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
SimulationGeneralEnvironment tab
CAE
537
NX 9.0
Import only elements from an input file into an NX FEM that already contains nodes.
Import group definitions that reference nodes and elements where the nodes and elements already exist in
NX
Import loads and constraints into a model that already contains a mesh. This is useful, for example, if you
need to import boundary conditions from custom load generation software into an NX Simulation file.
When you use the Merge Entities option to append data, NX does not modify any entities that were present in NX
prior to the merge. For example, NX does not modify:
Solution attributes.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
FileAppend
538
CAE
NX 9.0
In this example, Floor/ is the path to the file from your current directory. You can also use the *INCLUDE keyword
to specify the full path to the file. For example:
*INCLUDE D:/workdir/Floor/Floor_frame.k
In previous releases, the *INCLUDE keyword was only supported for export from NX.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Menu
FileImportSimulation
Optimization
NX Optimizer optimization type
What is it?
NX Geometry Optimization now provides a new default optimization type called NX Optimizer. Altair
HyperOpt continues to be available as an additional optimization type.
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Geometry Optimization
Location in dialog box
Post-processing
Create fields from identified results
What is it?
You can now save the output from the Identify command directly to an NX table field.
You can plot and edit table fields, use them to define spatial distribution boundary conditions, and export these
fields like any other NX field.
CAE
539
NX 9.0
In previous releases, if you wanted to use identified results from one analysis to drive loads or boundary conditions
in a subsequent analysis, you had to first export a .csv file from the Identify dialog box, and then re-import that .csv
file into a field in the table editor. The Identify dialog box now includes a Create Field button, which opens the
Create Table Field dialog box. This provides a simple method to create a table field directly from results
identified in the Identify dialog box.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Identify
Location in dialog box
Create Field
Graphing enhancements
What is it?
This release introduces many enhancements to the graphing capabilities of NX post processing.
You can plot graphs in a secondary Graph Window. You can display and compare multiple graphs in
separate windows without overwriting the model or post view display in the NX graphics window
viewports. For more information, see Plotting a graph in a separate window.
When graphing results on a path, you can create a temporary path or define a group or FE entities directly
from the Graph dialog box, in addition to selecting from named, persistent paths.
NX provides improved selection methods for selecting entities to define a path or to graph across iterations.
You can select nodes or elements by group, on feature edges or faces, or by using a selection box.
You can select multiple nodes or elements to graph across iterations. You can combine all selected entities
into a single data series, or graph each entity as an independent data series.
You have greater control over the X and Y axes of your graph. For example, you can set the X axis to node
or element IDs, path length, length along a vector, or coordinates along an axis in the model coordinate
system.
You can create a two-function plot directly from two selected post views. In previous releases, you first had
to export the graphs to AFU functions, and use the Two Function command in the Function
Navigator.
For example, you can create a contour plot of displacements in one viewport and a contour plot of strain in
a second viewport. Select both post views in the Post Processing Navigator and click Create
Graph
540
. Use the Two Function Plot dialog box to graph strain against displacements.
When viewing displacements from a rotor dynamics analysis, you can create a standard Orbit Plot graph
of X versus Y displacements in the plane of rotation. For more information about rotor dynamics analysis,
see Rotor dynamics (NX Nastran).
CAE
NX 9.0
For results in complex format, you can choose from a wide variety of complex plot types, including polar,
Argand, and Nichols plots.
Examples of new graph types. Clockwise from top left: polar coordinates, two-function plot, scatter plot,
multi-axis plot.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Create Graph
Two Function Plot dialog box
Application
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
CAE
541
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Create Graph
2D Argand plot
An Argand plot plots the real part of the complex result against the imaginary part in the complex plane.
2D polar plot
A 2D polar plot plots the results magnitude along the r axis and the phase angle on the axis in a 2D polar
coordinate system across iterations. The following example shows the displacement and phase angle across several
frequencies at a selected node.
542
CAE
NX 9.0
Multi-axis plot
You can plot complex results on up to three axes for any combination of results magnitude, real part, imaginary part,
and phase angle. The following figure shows a multi-axis plot of displacement magnitude and phase angle against
frequency.
CAE
543
NX 9.0
Orbit plot
An orbit plot plots X displacements against Y displacements at a specified frequency. Orbit plots are typically used
to analyze rotor dynamics results.
Nichols plot
Nichols plots are typically used in the analysis of signals.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Create Graph
544
CAE
NX 9.0
Use the Envelope command to compare two or more results of the same type and component, and return
the minimum or maximum values at nodes. You can export the results envelope to a universal file or save it
as an NX field.
Use the Combination command to combine two or more results of the same type using standard NX
expression syntax. You can export the combined results to a universal file or save them as an NX field.
Use the Reduction and Multiple Reduction commands to reduce one or more results components to
scalar values at nodes. These scalar values are represented as post-processing expressions. You can view
and export the expressions in a variety of ways, and you can combine scalar post-processing expressions
using standard NX expression syntax.
You use the Reduction command to view, save, or export scalar results for a single load case, time step, mode,
iteration, and so on. You use the Multiple Reduction command to graph, save, or export scalar results across a
range of time steps, modes, frequencies, iterations, and so on.
From both commands, you can access the Create Expression dialog box. The options in this dialog box allow
you finer control over the reduced values defined in the NX expression. For example, you can specify the absolute
value of signed data, averaging options for element-nodal results, shell layers or beam recovery points, complex
results parameters, and so on.
Maximum XY membrane strain for a selected shell mesh, reduced to a scalar value, plotted against
frequency, and output as a table field.
CAE
545
NX 9.0
Expressions or combined expressions created using the Reduction command can be displayed as a
contour plot in a new post view.
Expressions or combined expressions created using the Multiple Reduction command can be displayed
as a graph in an existing viewport or in a new graph window.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Envelope
Combination
Reduction
Multiple Reduction
Create Expression dialog box:
Application
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Reduction
546
CAE
NX 9.0
Multiple Reduction
Location in dialog box
Support for PERMAS native results (*.post) files. You can import PERMAS results into the Post
Processing Navigator for immediate post-processing, import them into a new solution associated with
the current Simulation file, or add them as companion results to an existing solution.
Support for NX Multiphysics solutions with results in multiple domains (for example, time and frequency).
When graphing or animating results across iterations, you can specify the value type to filter time steps or
load cases to a single result domain.
The ability to save results displayed in a post view to a reference field. A reference field stores pointers to
the numerical data used in a post view. For more information, see Reference field support.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Durability
Orthotropic material support for Durability
What is it?
You can now perform durability analysis on models that contain orthotropic materials.
To perform this analysis, you need to:
1.
CAE
Define the tension static stress limits in directions 1 and 2 for the orthotropic material.
547
NX 9.0
2.
3.
4.
Define the stress-life data for normal stresses (directions 1 and 2) and in-plane shear stress (direction 12).
In the Orthotropic Material dialog box, you can define the stress-life data using fields or by providing
the following durability properties:
To perform fatigue life analysis, select the Perform Orthotropic Analysis check box in the
Fatigue dialog box.
To perform the strength analysis, select the Perform Orthotropic Analysis check box in the
Strength dialog box.
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Manage Durability Objects
Location in dialog box
548
CAE
NX 9.0
Durability 1
Durability 1
Durability 1
Nodal
Ply 1
Scalar
Scalar
Fatigue Life Top Ply Element-Nodal
Ply 2
Static Event 1
Ply 3
Ply 4
Static Event 1
Pre-NX9
NX9
The stress or strain modes from the SOL 103 Response Simulation OP2 file.
The OP2 file stores the results from the parent solution of the Response Simulation solution process event.
CAE
Advanced Simulation
549
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Transient Event
Simulation Navigator
Note
In the previous release, the transient durability event could reference only the solutions marked with a star
(*).
To process nonlinear results from the structural solutions, select the Use Non-Linear Results check box in the
solve options durability object.
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Manage Durability Objects
Location in dialog box
550
CAE
NX 9.0
NX Laminate Composites
Laminate Dynamic Simulation
What is it?
Use the Dynamic Simulation solution process to generate ply results for a base-driven random vibration event.
The dynamic simulation uses a hybrid integration method to compute peak values of the requested results. The
hybrid method is either analytical or adaptive numerical depending on the shape of the base excitation PSD function.
Peak ply stresses, strains, failure indices, strength ratios, and margins of safety.
Nodal peak responses and number of positive zero crossings for acceleration, displacement, velocity,
multipoint constraint (MPC) force, and single-point constraint (SPC) force.
Elemental peak responses and number of positive zero crossings for stress, strain, and force.
Peak Von Mises stresses, failure indices, and margins of safety for elements that reference a homogeneous
material.
The laminate dynamic simulation solution process can also generate the power spectral density functions (XY
Functions) for most of the results described above except ply results and grid point forces.
CAE
551
NX 9.0
Workflow
Reference a Nastran SOL 103 Real Eigenvalues solution from which the laminate dynamic simulation
solution process reads the following data:
o
Create a random event where you specify a base excitation PSD function and analysis parameters.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Dynamic Simulation
Simulation Navigator
552
CAE
NX 9.0
One or more DLL files that contain the compiled source code for your failure theories
Use the User Defined Failure Theory XML Config File customer default to specify the XML file.
The format for the XML file is defined in a standard Document Type Definition (DTD) file. The DTD file and the
XML file are available in the following folder:
[nx_installation_path]/nxcae_extras/laminate/UserFT/xml
In the XML file, for each user defined failure theory, specify the following:
Its name
The interface for the DLL files is defines in the UserFailureTheoryApi.h file. This file is available in the following
folder:
[nx_installation_path]/nxcae_extras/laminate/UserFT/include
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Property
Location in dialog box
CAE
553
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Export to FiberSim
554
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
(NX Nastran or Abaqus) Solid Laminate Physical Property
(ANSYS) Laminate Physical Property
Location in dialog box
CAE
555
NX 9.0
For a laminate physical property, set this option in the Laminate Modeler dialog box.
For a global layup, set this option iIn the Layup Modeler dialog box.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Extrude Laminate
or Fill Laminate
Simulation Navigator
556
CAE
NX 9.0
You can optionally create drop-off resin elements when you select the Cutting Face Drop-Offs check box.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Extrude Laminate
Simulation Navigator
CAE
557
NX 9.0
Smooth Normals
Smooth Normals
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Extrude Laminate
Simulation Navigator
558
CAE
NX 9.0
The option in the Extruded Element Validation group helps you to find these elements:
When you select the Keep Invalid Elements option, NX keeps the degenerate elements created during
extrusion and stores them in the Extrusion Invalid Solids group.
When you deselect the Keep Invalid Elements option, NX does not keep the degenerate elements
created during extrusion. Instead, it creates an Extrusion Invalid Shells group that contains the shell
elements that could not be fully extruded without creating invalid elements.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
CAE
559
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Extrude Laminate
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Ply Materials
Location in dialog box
Type listWovenCreate
560
CAE
NX 9.0
If you copy the source 2D elements, NX does not copy the extruded elements on top of them. It just copies the 2D
elements.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Element Copy and Translate
Reflect
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Previous Ply
or Next Ply
CAE
561
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
The graphical report result sets must include envelope result sets.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
562
CAE
NX 9.0
Example
The figure shows a plot of strain 11 results for a 3 mm laminate.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
View Laminate
Location in dialog box
CAE
563
NX 9.0
Example
The figure shows the zone nodes display for an extruded laminate.
Zones
Zones
Laminate 1
Laminate 1
Zone 1 (9 elements)
Zone 1 (9 elements)
Zone 2 (9 elements)
Zone 2 (9 elements)
Laminate 1 Extrusion
Zone 1 (9 elements)
Zone 2 (9 elements)
Zone 3 (9 elements)
Zone 4 (9 elements)
Zone 5 (9 elements)
Pre-NX9
NX9
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Compute Zones
Simulation Navigator
564
CAE
NX 9.0
Laminate physical properties that have Stacking Recipe set to Inherited from layup.
Solid Laminate physical properties that have Stacking Recipe set to Extruded.
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
Laminate physical properties that have Stacking Recipe set to Inherited from layup.
Solid Laminate physical properties that have Stacking Recipe set to Extruded.
CAE
Advanced Simulation
565
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Automatic Groups
Simulation Navigator
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
NX Multiphysics
Thermal
Thermal
Note
Without a thermal and flow DMP license, you can only perform an analysis in parallel on a single
workstation with access for up to 8 processes per run. You require the NX Thermal and Flow DMP add-on
product to remove any software limitations on the number of processes per run for parallel processing and
enables parallel solutions over networks and clusters.
Parallel flow solver performance enhancements
What is it?
NX 9 provides the following significant performance upgrades for the parallel flow solver:
566
CAE
NX 9.0
You can now use scripts when you submit parallel jobs to a cluster using a scheduler.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Flow
Advanced Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
Note
Without a thermal and flow DMP license, you can only perform an analysis in parallel on a single
workstation with access for up to 8 processes per run. You require the NX Thermal and Flow DMP add-on
product to remove any software limitations on the number of processes per run for parallel processing and
enables parallel solutions over networks and clusters.
Note
Because the thermal solver in NX 9 supports large ID numbers, you cannot restart simulations using solver
files that you generated in NX 8.5 or earlier.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Axisymmetric Thermal
Axisymmetric Thermal
Advanced Axisymmetric Thermal
CAE
567
NX 9.0
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Thermal
Thermal
Flow capabilities
Parallel flow solver capability enhancements
What is it?
The parallel flow solver now supports the following objects:
Simulation objects: Rotating Frame of Reference, Mixing Plane, and Disjoint Fluid Mesh
Pairing.
Improved convergence and accuracy when using the k-epsilon turbulence model.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Electronic Systems
Cooling
Coupled Thermal-Flow
NX Advanced
Thermal/Flow with ESC
Flow
Advanced Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
568
CAE
NX 9.0
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Electronic Systems
Cooling
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Flow
Advanced Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
NX Advanced
Thermal/Flow with ESC
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Disjoint Fluid Mesh Pairing
Simulation Navigator
CAE
569
NX 9.0
Solver
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Electronic Systems
Cooling
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Flow
NX Advanced
Thermal/Flow with ESC
Flow
Advanced Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Electronic Systems
Cooling
Coupled Thermal-Flow
NX Advanced
Thermal/Flow with ESC
Flow
Advanced Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
You must select Opening or Static Pressure from the Type list in the
Flow Boundary Condition dialog box.
Command Finder
Flow Boundary Condition
Simulation Navigator
570
CAE
NX 9.0
Before you create the fluid body, you can add one or more contact prevention constraints and local resolution
constraints to the fluid domain recipe. To create the fluid body, right-click the created fluid domain recipe node and
choose Wrap.
You can add contact prevention and local resolution constraints to fluid domain recipes that reference existing fluid
bodies. To update an existing fluid body, right-click its fluid domain recipe node and choose Update.
The following table lists the new fluid domain icons in the Simulation Navigator.
Icon
Node
Description
Contact prevention
Local resolution
Analysis Type
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Surface Wrap Fluid Domain
Main Menu
Simulation Navigator
CAE
571
NX 9.0
Polygon geometry that you select in the associated fluid domain recipe.
A bounding sphere for which you specify the center and the radius.
When you use local resolution on polygon geometry, the constraint affects the region in the proximity of the selected
edges, faces, or body surfaces. When you define local resolution on a bounding volume, the constraint affects the
region inside the volume.
You can specify one of the following sizing options to refine or coarsen fluid bodies in selected regions.
Relative
Refinement
Refines the surface wrap fluid domain in the affected region. The refinement is relative to
the default resolution specified in the fluid domain recipe. You specify the amount of local
refinement in the Local Subdivision list.
Relative
Coarsening
Coarsens the surface wrap fluid domain in the affected region. The coarsening is relative to
the default resolution specified in the fluid domain recipe. You specify the amount of local
coarsening in the Local Subdivision list.
Absolute
Performs a local refinement or a local coarsening using the absolute dimension for the local
resolution that you specify in the Local Resolution box.
You can also specify the priority level of the local resolution constraint with respect to the other local resolution or
contact prevention constraints when they are in conflict.
NX stores your specification for each local refinement constraint under the Local Resolution Container node in
the Simulation Navigator. By default, each local refinement constraint node is numbered, but you can change its
name.
Polygon Geometry
Fluid Domain Recipes
Contact Prevention Container
Local Resolution Container
Local Resolution 1
Local Resolution 2
To apply a selected local refinement constraint to a fluid domain recipe, drag its local refinement node from the
Local Resolution Container node to the Local Resolution Constraints node that is located under the fluid
body recipe node.
Polygon Geometry
Fluid Domain Recipes
572
CAE
NX 9.0
Analysis Type
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Local Resolution Constraint
Main Menu
Simulation Navigator
CAE
573
NX 9.0
Refines the default resolution specified in the fluid domain recipe. You specify the amount
of local refinement in the Local Subdivision list.
Relative
Coarsening
Coarsens the default resolution specified in the fluid domain recipe. You specify the
amount of local coarsening in the Local Subdivision list. It is recommended that you use
this option only in that rare case where the region is subject to a local coarsening constraint.
Absolute
Sets the minimum resolution using the absolute dimension that you specify in the Local
Resolution box.
You can also specify the priority level of the contact prevention constraint with respect to the other contact
prevention or local resolution constraints when they are in conflict.
NX stores your specification for each contact prevention constraint under the Contact Prevention Container
node in the Simulation Navigator. By default, each contact prevention constraint node is numbered, but you can
change its name.
Polygon Geometry
Fluid Domain Recipes
Contact Prevention Container
Contact Prevention 1
Contact Prevention 2
Contact Resolution Container
To apply a selected contact prevention constraint to a fluid domain recipe, drag its contact prevention node from the
Contact Prevention Container to the Contact Prevention Constraints node that is located under the fluid
body recipe node.
Polygon Geometry
Fluid Domain Recipes
Contact Prevention Container
Contact Prevention 1
Contact Prevention 2
Contact Resolution Container
574
CAE
NX 9.0
Fluid Body_4_recipe
Contact Prevention Constraints
Contact Prevention 1
Contact Resolution Constraints
Analysis Type
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Flow
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Contact Prevention Constraint
Main Menu
Simulation Navigator
Thermal capabilities
One-Sided and Two-Sided Total Temperature Effects
What is it?
Use the new One-Sided Total Temperature Effects or Two-Sided Total Temperature Effects types of
Duct Flow Boundary Conditions simulation objects to account for total temperature effects in convective heat
transfer due to high speed rotating parts. The heat transfer can be from duct or duct with mass flow elements to one
or two walls. The total temperature accounts for the kinetic energy of the fluid. It is determined from the total
enthalpy.
The total temperature effects can be modeled in one of the following ways.
CAE
575
NX 9.0
Neglect Wall
Rotation
Use this option when the components that surround the fluid are stationary or when the
components are rotating at low speeds, for example in heat transfer to a stator. The fluid
temperature that you specify in the other duct flow boundary conditions is assumed to be
the absolute total temperature, Tt,abs.
1. Stator
2. Absolute fluid velocity
The static temperature, Ts, is determined from the static enthalpy, hs, using the following
equation:
2
Use this option when the components that surround the fluid are rotating. For Two-Sided
Total Temperature Effects, the speed of the two components can be different. The fluid
temperature that you specify in the other duct flow boundary conditions is assumed to be
the absolute total temperature.
The relative total temperature, Tt,rel, is determined from the total enthalpy using the
following equation:
2
576
CAE
NX 9.0
The relative total temperature is related to the absolute total temperature using the
following equation:
Tt,rel = Tt,abs + Trel
where Trel is the relative temperature difference.
Relative
Temperature
Reference Frame
Use this option when components that surround the fluid are rotating. For Two-Sided
Total Temperature Effects, the speed of the two components must be identical. The
fluid temperature that you specify in the other duct flow boundary conditions is assumed to
be the relative total temperature, Tt,rel.
The static temperature is determined from the static enthalpy using the following equation:
2
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Multiphysics
Advanced Thermal
Coupled ThermalFlow
Advanced ThermalFlow
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Duct Flow Boundary Conditions
Simulation Navigator
CAE
577
NX 9.0
Multiple thermal voids can be connected to the same Void Non-Geometric Element modeling object.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Multiphysics
Advanced Thermal
Coupled ThermalFlow
Advanced ThermalFlow
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Thermal Void
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Modeling Objects
Location in dialog box
578
CAE
NX 9.0
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Multiphysics
Advanced Thermal
Coupled ThermalFlow
Advanced ThermalFlow
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Thermal Convecting Zone
Simulation Navigator
CAE
579
NX 9.0
One-Sided Stream
on Edges
Defines thermal streams on polygon edges, 1D beam elements, regular shell element edges,
and axisymmetric shell element edges. The thermal stream is in contact with solid elements
only on one side. If you want the thermal stream to be in contact with solid elements on
both sides, select Two-Sided Stream on Edges.
One-Sided Stream
on Faces
Defines thermal streams on polygon faces, 2D elements, and 3D element faces. The thermal
stream is in contact with solid elements only on one side. If you want the thermal stream to
be in contact with solid elements on both sides, select Two-Sided Stream on Faces.
For the edges load types, you can define a path of multiple polygon edges or multiple element edges by specifying
start and end points. NX computes a path from start to end and returns the resultant edges and the direction of the
stream.
You can also:
Account for swirl effect in heat transfer for models with rotating machinery.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
Thermal
Thermal
NX Multiphysics
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Thermal Stream
Simulation Navigator
580
CAE
NX 9.0
Defines a conductive thermal rotational periodicity. You define a master region and a slave
region. You can also specify the coupling resolution, the overlapping region, and the
overlap projection direction.
Radiative
Defines a radiative thermal rotational periodicity on the complete model. You specify the
periodicity by defining the number of sectors or the sector angle.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Electronic Systems
Cooling
Coupled Thermal-Flow
NX Advanced
Thermal/Flow with ESC
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
Thermal
Thermal
NX Multiphysics
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Thermal Rotational Periodicity
Simulation Navigator
CAE
581
NX 9.0
Rotation load
What is it?
Use the Rotation load to specify the rotation axis and angular velocity on a complete model or a model subset. You
can define a constant or time-varying angular velocity.
This boundary condition already exists in the NX Nastran, MSC Nastran, ANSYS, and Abaqus solver environments.
You need to specify the Rotation load when your model has the following boundary conditions defined and wall
rotation effects cannot be neglected:
One-Sided Total Temperature Effects or Two-Sided Total Temperature Effects types of Duct
Flow Boundary Conditions simulation objects
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
Thermal
Thermal
Structural
Multi-Step Nonlinear
NX Multiphysics
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Rotation
Simulation Navigator
582
CAE
NX 9.0
q = 0.5V
where:
is the
atmospheric
density
V is the
spacecrafts
velocity
The amount of heat absorbed by a surface on the spacecraft is equal to the incident flux, q, multiplied by the
accommodation coefficient, ; 0 1.
In the Free Molecular Heating dialog box, you define:
A constant or time-varying velocity for the spacecraft and a constant or time-varying atmospheric
density.
A constant or time-varying atmospheric density and that the velocity is computed from the
position of the spacecraft in the orbit.
That the velocity and density are computed from the orbit. The velocity is the spacecrafts orbital
velocity, and the density is computed from the spacecrafts altitude.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Thermal
CAE
583
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Free Molecular Heating
Simulation Navigator
Based on Temperature ends the transient thermal analysis based on the temperature targets that you
specify for one or more selected groups of elements. The first group that reaches its target value ends the
analysis. You select a group and set its target temperature in the Target Temperature modeling object.
Based on Temperature Change ends the transient thermal analysis based on the temperature variation
targets that you specify for one or more selected groups of elements. The first group that reaches its target
value ends the analysis. You select a group and set its target temperature change in the Target
Temperature Change modeling object.
You can define multiple modeling objects of the same type in your solution.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Axisymmetric Thermal
Axisymmetric Thermal
Advanced Axisymmetric Thermal
584
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
You must select Transient from the Solution Type list on the Solution
Details tab in the Solution dialog box.
Command Finder
Solution
Simulation Navigator
Name in NX9
GBVF
Effective Emissivity
N.A.
Effective Emissivity
GBVF
Computes the effective emissivity of the selected objects with the gray body view factor
(GBVF) that you specify and the emissivity specified in the Thermo-Optical Property
modeling object.
Emissivity and
GBVF
Computes the effective emissivity of the selected objects with the gray body view factor
and the emissivity that you specify.
Effective
Emissivity
Uses the effective emissivity that you specify. You can specify a constant or a timedependent function. This parameter is new in NX9.
CAE
Analysis Type
Solution Type
585
NX 9.0
NX Electronic Systems
Cooling
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Axisymmetric Thermal
Axisymmetric Thermal
Advanced Axisymmetric
Thermal
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Simple Radiation to Environment
Simulation Navigator
Analysis Type
Solution Type
NX Electronic Systems
Coupled Thermal-Flow
586
CAE
NX 9.0
Cooling
NX Advanced
Thermal/Flow with ESC
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Surface-to-Surface Contact
Simulation Navigator
Time
Thermostat ID/Name
Indicates the name of the Thermostat or Active Heater Controller modeling object.
On/Off
Temp Sensor
Power
Numbers ON
Indicates how many times the modeling object was active from the beginning of the run to
the current time step.
CAE
587
NX 9.0
Total Time ON
Indicates the time in seconds that the thermostat or active heater controller was active from
the beginning of the run to the current time step.
Indicates how much energy the thermostat or active heater controller used from the
beginning of the run to the current time step.
P, I, and D
Indicate the separate power values for the proportional part, P, the integral part, I, and the
derivative part, D of the PID controller power. These values are written only for the Active
Heater Controller modeling object type of PID Controller.
Example
Here is a sample thermostat report file.
Time, Thermostat ID/Name, On/Off, Temp Sensor, Power, Numbers ON, Total Time
ON, Total Energy Used, P, I, D
45,1,1,98.681,25,1,45,1125
45,2,1,98.681,25,1,45,1125
45,3,1,75.9498,10.0209,1,45,803.2562
45,4,1,75.9498,10.0209,1,45,803.2563
45,5,1,85.4322,25,1,45,918.3381,0.3642,114.6784,-41.1749
45,6,1,85.4323,25,1,45,918.3379,0.3642,114.6784,-41.1751
46,1,0,100.1797,0,1,45,1125
46,2,0,100.1797,0,1,45,1125
46,3,1,76.3314,9.8619,1,46,813.118
46,4,1,76.3314,9.8619,1,46,813.1182
46,5,1,87.0621,25,1,46,943.3381,0.3234,115.3253,-40.7475
46,6,1,87.0622,25,1,46,943.3379,0.3234,115.3253,-40.7475
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Solve
Simulation Navigator
588
CAE
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
Location in dialog box
Mapping capabilities
Rotational periodicity zones
What is it?
You can now map temperatures of solid elements from a cylindrical periodic sector in the source model to the
complete cylindrical part in the target model, using two new constraints:
The Rotational Periodicity Association Zone type of Mapping constraint in a source thermal model.
Source model
Target model
CAE
589
NX 9.0
To define the corresponding rotational periodicity target zone in the target model, you:
Associate the destination elements or nodes to the corresponding rotational periodicity association zone
from the source model.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Thermal
Thermal
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
Mapping
Thermal
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Mapping
Thermal
590
Advanced Simulation
CAE
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Mapping
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Rotational Periodicity Target Zone
Right-click the Constraint Set container nodeNew
ConstraintRotational Periodicity Target Zone
Simulation Navigator
You can select regular 0D, 1D, and 2D elements in addition to the axisymmetric elements that you could
select in previous release.
You can define the axis of revolution as one of the three orthogonal directions of the absolute coordinate
system or NX can get the axis of revolution from the axisymmetric elements.
The names of the following Mapping constraints are changed in the source and target models to better
represent the function of the constraints.
Name in previous release
Name in NX 9
CAE
Analysis Type
Solution Type
591
NX 9.0
NX Electronic
Systems Cooling
Coupled Thermal-Flow
NX Space Systems
Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
Advanced Thermal
Coupled Thermal-Flow
Thermal-Flow
Advanced Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Thermal
Thermal
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
Mapping
Thermal
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Mapping
Thermal
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Mapping
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Axisymmetry Target Zone
Simulation Navigator
592
CAE
NX 9.0
Example
If the source results file contains results for 0, 20, and 40 seconds and you specify 15 seconds as the output
time for mapping, the mapping solver interpolates results at 0 and 20 seconds and maps the resulting
interpolated data onto the target model.
In previous releases, no interpolation was performed for mapping output times for which results did not exist in the
source results file. In these cases, the source results at the closest time were used. For the scenario in the previous
example, the mapping solver mapped the results for 20 seconds when you specified mapping output time of 15
seconds.
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
Mapping
Thermal
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Mapping
Thermal
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Solution
Simulation Navigator
CAE
593
NX 9.0
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
Mapping
Thermal
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
NX Multiphysics
Mapping
Thermal
Solver
Analysis Type
Solution Type
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
Mapping
Thermal-Flow
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
Thermal Target Zone
Simulation Navigator
594
CAE
NX 9.0
NX FE Model Correlation
Save Transformation
What is it?
Use the new Save Transformation option to save the alignment data in an alignment XML file. The XML file is
stored in the same location as the Simulation file.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Alignment
Simulation Navigator
CAE
595
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
596
CAE
NX 9.0
To create a FEM with no polygon bodies, clear the check box in the Bodies column. Do this when the
CAE model revision references only bulk data and the corresponding component FEM contains only
imported nodes and elements.
To create polygon bodies based on the master part, select the check box in the Bodies column. Do this
when you have an empty CAE Model revision.
For any CAE model revision with a relation to a CAD item revision, you can override the default component FEM
positioning in the assembly FEM. To do this, clear the Map CAD check box. This is useful when the model
structure includes CAE model revisions that are not referenced by the BOM view of the parent CAD product
structure.
When you clear the Map CAD check box, the new component FEM is positioned by the Teamcenter transformation
matrix, or at the WCS origin. You can then use the Move Component command to position the component.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Simulation Navigator
CAE
597
NX 9.0
4GD support
What is it?
If you work in Teamcenter Integration for NX with 4th Generation Design (4GD), you can now create a new FEM
and optional idealized part based on the currently loaded 4GD workset.
When you save your model in NX, the FEM is stored in Teamcenter as a named reference of a CAEMesh dataset in
a CAEModel revision, with CAE Source and CAE Target relations to the 4GD workset.
For more information about 4th Generation Design and 4GD worksets, see 4GD fundamentals and 4GD worksets in
the 4th Generation Design online Help.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Simulation Navigator
N: a digit in a counter. For example, NNN would count from 001 to 999.
598
12345678.i1
12345678.fem1
12345678.assyfem1
CAE
NX 9.0
12345678.sim1
Valid Keywords
Default
Idealized Part
CADPARTID
CADPARTID.iN
CADPARTREV
N
FE Model
CADPARTID
CADPARTID.femN
CADPARTREV
IPARTID
IPARTREV
N
Assembly FE Model
CADPARTID
CADPARTID.assyfemN
CADPARTREV
IPARTID
IPARTREV
N
Simulation
CADPARTID
CADPARTID.simN
CADPARTREV
IPARTID
IPARTREV
FEMPARTID
FEMPARTREV
N
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
CAE
599
NX 9.0
Customer Default
Location in dialog box
Command
Application
Simulation Navigator
Idealized Parts
Advanced Simulation
Command Finder
600
CAE
NX 9.0
The Simulation Navigator now includes a Teamcenter Status column that indicates when a new
revision of the related CAD part is available on the Teamcenter server.
The FileImportImport Simulation command now supports searching, browsing for, and selecting
bulk data and results files for import directly from named references in the Teamcenter database.
The Transient Durability Event dialog box now supports searching, browsing for, and selecting a
modal deformation file (MDF) directly from named references in the Teamcenter database.
You can now include Independent CAE parts (master items) when using the ug_clone utility by adding
the option [copy_related_cae]_parts=<none|ideal|fem|all>. The default is none.
Advanced Simulation
Main Menu
FileImportSimulation
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Transient Durability Event
Location in dialog box
CAE
601
NX 9.0
Design Simulation
Boundary conditions
Boundary condition folders
What is it?
You can create folders to manage your simulation objects, loads, and constraints. For example, for simulation
objects, you can have one folder for contacts, another folder for temperatures, and so on. In the Simulation
Navigator, NX displays the folders in the appropriate boundary condition container: Simulation Objects
Container, Load Container, or Constraint Container.
If you create the simulation objects, loads, and constraints directly in their root containers, you can individually add
them to or remove them from subcases or steps. You can also add top level folders into a solution step. While you
can create subfolders and have multiple nesting levels of folders to better organize your boundary conditions, you
can use only the top level folder in a solution step or subcase. When you add the top level folder, NX adds all the
folders boundary conditions, including those in subfolders.
You create new folders in one of these ways:
Right-click the container in the Simulation Navigator and select New Folder.
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
602
CAE
NX 9.0
Customer Defaults
You can control the display styles for constraints, loads, and simulation objects separately, using the new customer
defaults for boundary conditions. The Constraints Display, Loads Display, and Simulation Objects
Display tabs are now available. You can control the default display mode selection, as well as the color, size and
visibility of attributes for each of the three groupings of boundary conditions.
An Edge Boundary Condition Display Override tab is available. If you select the Apply
Overrides
check box on this tab, the overrides that you set control the default display of edge boundary
conditions only.
CAE
603
NX 9.0
Customer Default
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
Location in dialog box
SimulationBoundary Conditions
Prerequisite
Simulation Navigator
604
CAE
NX 9.0
Meshing
New fillet and cylinder Mesh Controls
This release includes two new options in the Density Type list in the Mesh Control dialog box.
Use the Fillet option to control the distribution of elements along fillet (rounded or blended) surfaces.
Use the Cylinder option to control the distribution of elements along cylindrical surfaces.
CAE
605
NX 9.0
When you use the Filter option, NX continues to evaluate the selected target geometry during meshing. In some
cases, the automatic abstraction process that occurs during meshing can result in either additional or fewer fillet or
cylinder surfaces that meet the defined criteria for the mesh control.
With both Fillet and Cylinder mesh controls, you can also use the new Aspect Ratio option to ensure that the
elements in these regions maintain a specified aspect ratio. When you use this option, NX reduces the element size
to maintain the specified Aspect Ratio, if necessary.
Design Simulation
Command Finder
Mesh Control
InsertMeshMesh Control
Menu
606
CAE
NX 9.0
The ability to create Mesh Control definitions that are not assigned to any geometry.
You can create a Mesh Control Definition for the following types of mesh control:
Fillet
Cylinder
Face Density
You can use Mesh Control Definitions to create templates that contain the standard mesh requirements for parts
comprised of similar geometry or parts of the same class. For example, you can create a template that contains
multiple Mesh Control Definitions with the mesh specifications for standard hole or cylinder sizes for your parts.
After you create mesh control definitions, you can save them in a template FEM file. Any subsequent FEM files that
you create from that template will contain the mesh control definitions. You can then edit each mesh control
definition to specify the target geometry.
CAE
607
NX 9.0
Note
If you use the Filter option, NX continues to evaluate the selected target geometry during meshing. In some
cases, the automatic abstraction process that occurs during meshing can result in either additional or fewer
fillet or cylinder surfaces that meet the defined criteria for the mesh control.
The Filter option is available with the following types of mesh controls:
Fillet
Cylinder
You can use these individual nodes in the Simulation Navigator to:
Control the visibility of each individual mesh control or the visibility of all mesh controls.
In previous releases, you could create only a single mesh control per edge or face in your model. Now, you can
create a single mesh control on multiple edges or faces. When you edit a mesh control from the Simulation
Navigator, NX modifies the mesh specifications on all geometry associated with that control.
608
CAE
NX 9.0
Design Simulation
Command Finder
Mesh Control
Menu
InsertMeshMesh Control
Design Simulation
Simulation Navigator
CAE
609
NX 9.0
Motion Simulation
Interactive articulation methods
What is it?
In addition to the Step Size articulation method, the Articulation dialog box now includes two articulation
methods for articulating a mechanism:
Transform Immediate
Transform Delay
Enter a displacement value in the transformation input box that is associated with the joint, in the graphics
window.
Motion Simulation
Command Finder
Solution
dialog box.
Simulation Navigator
Application
Motion Simulation
Command Finder
Articulation
following a solve.
Location in dialog box
610
CAE
NX 9.0
Motion Simulation
Command Finder
Solution
dialog box.
Simulation Navigator
Animation enhancements
What is it?
In the Animation dialog box, the Play and Pause functions are now combined in a single button.
All other animation functionality from NX 8.5 remains in NX 9.
Motion Simulation
Command Finder
Animation
CAE
611
NX 9.0
Motion Simulation
Command Finder
Solution
Simulation Navigator
612
CAE
NX 9.0
The Stop Event Tolerance option has been moved from the Articulation dialog box to the Motion
Preferences dialog box.
Motion Simulation
Command Finder
Customer Defaults
Location in dialog box
Motion Simulation
Menu
PreferencesMotion
When the data of the input function is real, the inverted data is:
When the data of the input function is complex (a + ib), the inverted data is:
Units will be inverted appropriately. For example, when the ordinate data type of the input function is Unitless
Scalar/Displacement, the inverted output records ordinate data type will be Displacement/Unitless Scalar.
You have three options for saving the output:
CAE
Save the output as a new record that is appended to the AFU file in which the original record resides.
613
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Function Single Math
Menu
Operation groupInverse
Choose MenuPreferencesXY Plot. You can specify whether you want the graphs to be plotted in the main
graphics window, a new separate window, or whether you want to be prompted to choose the destination window
each time you plot a graph.
Main Graphics Window All graphs are plotted directly in the main NX graphics window, replacing
your model display. To return to the model display, click Return to Model
Separate Graphics Window All graphs are plotted in a new separate graphics window. Your model
continues to display in the main NX graphics window. To edit the graph, use the editing commands that
appear in the Toolbar at the top of the graphics window.
When you select this option, you can select these additional options:
614
CAE
NX 9.0
Prompt After you plot a graph, and you plot a subsequent graph, NX prompts you to choose
an existing graphics window or to create a new window in which to plot the new graph.
Always New Window NX always plots each graph in a new separate graphics window.
Both Windows Allowed Each time you plot a graph, you are prompted to use the main NX graphics
window or create a new separate graphics window.
o
Menu
PreferencesXY Plot
You specify whether you want to use the global NX session font or a unique font using the Font Definition setting
in the graph option dialog boxes.
CAE
Local Setting Lets you select a font, font size, and font color for this graph text object. The font
attributes that you specify will be used for the current text object on all graphs.
Global Setting Uses the global NX session font, font size, and font color for the current graph text
object. You specify these settings on the Color/Font tab in the Visualization Preferences dialog box.
615
NX 9.0
When you select Global Setting, you can also specify the scale factor for the global font size for the
current text object or allow the font size to scale dynamically with the NX window size.
The following Font Definition settings are available in the graph option dialog boxes:
X-Axis/Y-Axis Options
Title Options
Legend Options
Marker Options
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Editing
Location in dialog box
616
CAE
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Editing
Location in dialog box
Graph StyleNone
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Save to AFU
2D Argand
A 2D Argand graph plots the real part of the complex result against the imaginary part in the complex plane.
CAE
617
NX 9.0
Nichols
A Nichols graph is typically used in the analysis of signals.
At Phase Angle
An At Phase Angle graph determines the value of the function at the specified Phase Angle and plots that
value.
618
CAE
NX 9.0
(1) Magnitude Only (default Plot type); (2) At Phase Angle at 180 deg.
Signed Magnitude
A Signed Magnitude graph displays the magnitude value with the sign determined by taking the sign of the larger
of the real and imaginary parts of the data.
CAE
619
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisites
Command Finder
Complex Option
620
CAE
NX 9.0
Revision Rule
Selects the revision rule that applies to the components.
Effectivity
Specifies the effectivity of the loaded assembly based on unit number, date and time, or end item.
Variant Rule
Selects a variant rule that is applied to the loaded assembly.
Command Finder
621
NX 9.0
Note
Teamcenter multifield key functionality is applicable for Teamcenter 10.1 and higher.
To enable NX to operate in a Teamcenter environment where custom multifield key definitions are used, you must
set the Teamcenter default domain to the Item domain.
Set the Teamcenter TC_MFK_DEFAULT_DOMAIN preference to Item. After you set this up in Teamcenter, NX
automatically uses the Teamcenter default domain.
If you do not set the Teamcenter preference or the preference is set to a domain that is not Item, one of the
following error messages is displayed when starting NX, then NX exits:
The preference TC_MFK_DEFAULT_DOMAIN is not set. NX only supports items in the
default domain.
The preference TC_MFK_DEFAULT_DOMAIN is not set to Item. NX only supports items
in the default domain.
Note
You must select the Related Parts, Drawings check box before you add the assembly or part for the
export or clone operation.
The Teamcenter TC_DrawingOf relation is used to create the relationship between an independent drawing and its
master part or assembly. If the independent drawing also has views of other parts or assemblies, the Teamcenter
TC_DrawingUsing relation is used for the relationship. NX uses the TC_DrawingOf relation when it associates an
independent drawing during export or clone.
622
NX 9.0
Menu
Save As enhanced
What is it?
The Save As functionality is enhanced to add more options to the dialog boxes and provide additional functionality
for the Save As operation.
Note
This functionality is available with Teamcenter 10.1 or higher.
There are separate commands and dialog boxes for Save As of master and non-master files. Also, the options are
relocated to the applicable dialog boxes.
You can use Save As on a master part that is the current working item (displayed item). In addition, you can use
Save As on multiple parts in a loaded assembly that is the current working item. The enhancements to the Save
Parts As dialog box include:
You can select the New Item or New Item Revision action to save the part as a new item or as a new
revision to an existing item.
You can manually enter or Assign the Part Number, Part Revision, and Part Name main attributes
in the Save Parts As dialog box.
to assign alternate IDs, if they are defined for the item type.
A Required column is added that indicates whether the non-master dataset must be copied during the
Save As operation.
Projects
lets you assign the item to a project. You can select one or more projects. The list of
projects available are defined in Teamcenter.
623
NX 9.0
Dependent Files Save As option lets you also copy dependent files for the master and non-master
items being saved, such as a .jpeg file for a drawing. This functionality has been modified and moved from
the Save As Non-master Parts dialog box.
Replace All Components in Session lets you replace all instances of a part in an assembly. If a single
part is the displayed part, it is replaced with the newly created part. If the option is not selected, the Save
As operation creates a new or revised item, but the selected item (or items in an assembly) on which you
performed the Save As operation is not replaced and the original remains.
You can use the Save As Non-master Parts command on a master or non-master item that is the current
working item. The enhancements to the Save As Non-master Parts dialog box include:
You can select the Save As, Save As New Item, Save New Item Type, or Save As to Different
Item Revision action to save a non-master drawing.
The Save New Item Type lets you save as the item as a completely different item type, such as Design,
SpecTemplate, and so on.
You can select the Save As Alternate Representation or Save As New Item Type action to save a
master as an alternate representation non-master or a new item type master.
You can select the Save As or Save As New Item action if the alternate representation is the work part.
Teamcenter Integration
Command Finder
Save As
Save As Non-master Parts
624
NX 9.0
Note
This functionality is applicable for Teamcenter 10.1 and higher.
In some cases, such as when dependent parts are not saved, all of the absolute occurrence information is not able to
be retained. In these cases, a warning message is displayed notifying you that you might lose absolute occurrences.
Teamcenter Integration
Assembly Navigator
625
NX 9.0
Teamcenter Integration
Resource bar
Assembly Navigator
Shortcut menu
Note
This functionality is applicable for Teamcenter 10.1 and higher.
In the Teamcenter Navigator, you can right-click a project under the Projects node and select Previous,
Next, or Find All to display the items associated with that project. The Previous and Next selections let you
display a certain number of results at one time so you can page through the results without having to display them all
at once. This allows easier viewing if there are many results and can also speed up the display for a large number of
results.
In the Teamcenter Integration Preferences dialog box, if you change your group or role or both, then the list
of available projects displayed is changed to match your new group or role. This automatically ties your group and
role to the list of associated projects.
If you have set a default project and change your group or role and that specific project is not available for your new
group or role, the Default Project is blank. No default project is set.
Teamcenter Integration
Teamcenter Navigator
Ribbon bar
Database tab
626
NX 9.0
This option is added to the command before the option that specifies the part/assembly. The default is no.
For more information on adding independent drawings to the clone operation, see Independent drawings
added to export and clone.
The CAE option is:
[copy_related_cae]_parts=<none|ideal|fem|all>
This option is added to the command before the option that specifies part/assembly. The default is none.
Teamcenter Integration
Location
627
NX 9.0
convert_units_to_mm
convert_units_to_in
NX 7.5.5
By default, Teamcenter saves a new version of the changed feature when you publish a part or assembly that
contains changed weld or datum features.
Use the following Teamcenter integration preferences to enable publishing of welding and datum features:
Spot Weld
Arc Weld
Welding Joint
Surface Weld
To publish weld and datum features as PS Connection occurrences instead of publishing separate item-based
objects, use the Weld Publishing Method customer default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
628
NX 9.0
Example
For a two panel resistance spot weld, set the customer default number for the point marker to 38. When you
publish the weld, NX associates the JT file weld_38.jt in the UGII_Base_DIR\ugweld\jt_files folder with
the corresponding weld object in Teamcenter.
Note
When you publish a spot weld that uses a solid body as a representation instead of a point marker, NX creates
the JT files based on the specific solid representation.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
629
NX 9.0
4GD is intended primarily for industries with massive products such as the shipbuilding, aerospace and automotive
industries that have the following characteristics:
Design reuse must be facilitated, managed and controlled between product units or design models.
4GD is initially targeted for the shipbuilding industry in this release. Future releases plan to broaden its coverage to
other industry sectors (automotive, aerospace, energy, machinery).
If your products do not fit these characteristics, then you should continue to use NX Assemblies to design your
products.
631
NX 9.0
4GD enhancements
Design element enhancements
What is it?
The 4GD design elements (DEs) are enhanced as follows:
When you save a reuse DE that is also the work part, the reuse DE and the source part of the DE are both
saved.
You can copy and paste the source part of a subordinate when the target is a reuse DE or a subordinate DE.
The subordinate source part is added as a new child component of the target reuse or subordinate source
part.
Note
You must then save the target reuse DE and the target source part to create the new child
component/subordinate.
You can copy and paste a subordinate and its parent reuse DE to a new subset, which adds the subordinate
and the reuse DE to the recipe of the new subset. No new DE is created.
You can position a promissory DE when you create it. Previously, you could only position shape DEs and
reuse DEs.
You can use the NX interface to edit the effectivity of the subordinate of a reuse design element.
Previously, you could edit the effectivity only in the Teamcenter interface.
Caution
A subordinate cannot have an effectivity that is outside the range of the effectivity of its owning
parent design element or parent subordinate. To validate the effectivity on subordinates, you must
use Teamcenter 10.1.
If you use Teamcenter 9.1, NX does not perform any validation, which may result in incorrect
effectivities being set on subordinates from NX.
You now receive warnings when you attempt to make modifications to 4GD objects that cannot be saved,
for example, if you attempt to modify a read-only object.
Note
Some warning messages require you to set customer defaults in order to receive the messages.
Defaults that you may want to set include Display Message when Work Part is Read-only,
Display Message when Modifying Read-only Parts, and Display Message when
Saving Read-only Parts.
You receive more informative warnings when you attempt to delete 4GD objects from your collaborative
design.
632
NX 9.0
NX can more easily resolve references such as WAVE when it saves all changes to a reuse design element
at the same time. Previously, you had to change the work part to the subset in order to save the reuse data.
Previously, users sometimes thought they had deleted a design element only in the context of the current
session, not realizing that they had deleted it completely from the collaborative design. The new warning
message provides more information about which design elements and components will be deleted and in
what context.
You can create multiple DEs at the same time by using the Number of New Design Elements option
in the Create Design Element dialog box.
Design element templates now support multiple types. For example, you can have a shape DE template for
different types of bolts: tapered, round, and chamfered. Each type selection results in a new DE based on
the same template.
Note
To define the types that are available for a template, specify the DETypes in its PAX file. See the
4th Generation Design help for more information.
When you create multiple DEs, you can specify that they be scattered when they are displayed in the
graphics window.
Note
If your source parts do not contain any geometry, scattering does not work. Your DEs are superimposed on
top of each other. In this situation, you can select individual DEs in the Assembly Navigator.
633
NX 9.0
Assembly Navigator
Teamcenter Navigator
Type
Prerequisite
In the Create Design Element dialog box, in the Definition group, from
the Template list, you must select a template that has multiple types.
Assembly Navigator
Teamcenter Navigator
Definition groupType
Scatter
Prerequisite
Assembly Navigator
Teamcenter Navigator
Placement groupScatter
634
NX 9.0
Use the new Maintain option to specify that the DE should maintain its current position during the
conversion.
Assembly Navigator
Placement groupPositioningMaintain
The Part to Use group options, which are filled out with information for the new item/revision, cannot be
modified.
Assembly Navigator
635
NX 9.0
Presented parents
What is it?
A subset recipe can include subordinate objects without including their parents. However, sometimes the
Assembly Navigator needs to display the parent objects in order to correctly portray the assembly structure. A
presented parent is a parent that is included in your session only for support of the existing assembly structure data
model.
Examples of presented parents are:
A reuse design element that is not a member of your current subset, but one of its subordinates is a
member.
A subordinate design element that is not a member of your current subset, but one of its child subordinates
is a member.
Their geometry is not displayed in the graphics window unless you add them to the subset. You can add a
presented parent using the Include in Subset command.
They are displayed in the Assembly Navigator if you open a subset structure view. See Subset structure
views for more information.
The following table shows the Assembly Navigator icons for presented parents.
Reuse design element
Loaded
Outside the work
part
Unloaded
Assembly Navigator
636
NX 9.0
No partition view
cpd_user1_ws/A
cpd_user1_ws/A
AdapterTestsCD
AdapterTestsCD
Partition001
001548/A
Partition002
002346/A
Partition003
002348/A
6203468assy/B
002350/A
ant_t1_support_bracket/A
6203468assy/B
ant_t1_support_bracket/A
ant_t1_support_bracket/A
Comp1CPD3/A x 2
ant_t1_support_bracket/A
Comp1CPD3/A x 2
Partitions in the active VPS that do not have any design elements assigned in the subset are not displayed unless
both of the following are true:
The partition is located in the hierarchical structure between the root partition of the VPS and a partition
that has assigned design elements.
Assembly Navigator
637
NX 9.0
003512/A
003512/A
CollabDesign1
CollabDesign1
cpd_cho_t28_prt/A
cpd_cho_t37_prt/A
cpd_cho_t28_prt/A
cpd_dwg_t02_asm1/A
cpd_cho_t37_prt/A
cpd_dwg_t02_prt2/A
cpd_dwg_t02_asm1/A
cpd_dwg_t02_prt3/A
cpd_dwg_t02_prt2/A
cpd_dwg_t02_prt3/Z
When the Show Subset Structure command is not active, the subordinate design elements and their parent reuse
design elements are displayed in the Assembly Navigator as a flat list. Parent design elements that are not part of
the subset themselves are not displayed.
Assembly Navigator
638
NX 9.0
Assembly Navigator
Assemblies
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Mirror Assembly
639
NX 9.0
The Teamcenter preference ModelElement_Mapped_Properties determines the attributes that are loaded for a
design element. The ATTRIBUTE_GOUP_TYPE qualifier is now added to the preference to let you specify an
attribute group or groups to be loaded. You can still specify individual attributes but you can now also specify
attribute groups.
For example, in the ModelElement_Mapped_Properties preference:
TYPE=Cpd1_DesEle1
TYPE=Cpd1_DesEle2
TYPE=Cpd1_DesEle3
PROPERTY_NAME=property_x
ATTRIBUTE_GROUP_TYPE=AttrGrp_a
ATTRIBUTE_GROUP_TYPE=AttrGrp_a, CustomGrp1
You can view the attribute groups in NX in the Design Element Properties, Attributes tab.
Teamcenter Integration
Prerequisite
Assembly Navigator
Application
Teamcenter
Menu
EditOptions
Note
In order to set variant rules on a collaborative design, you must run Teamcenter 10.1 or a later release.
640
NX 9.0
Assembly Navigator
The lifecycle of the attributes in the Attributes Group is the same as the lifecycle of the
design element.
For every Attribute Group that contains a common attribute, NX displays a separate group
on the Attributes tab in the Properties dialog box.
If you edit an attribute, NX applies the changes to all instances of that Attribute Group for
all selected objects.
Managed Attribute
Group
The lifecycle of the attributes in the Managed Attributes Group is independent of the
lifecycle of the design element. The lifecycle of these attributes depends on effectivity and
variant configuration.
For every Managed Attribute Group that contains a common attribute, NX displays a
separate group on the Attributes tab in the Properties dialog box.
If you edit an attribute NX, applies the changes to all instances of that Managed Attribute
Group for all selected objects.
Assembly Navigator
641
NX 9.0
You must be in 4GD, and a preview must have been saved for your
collaborative design.
Assembly Navigator
Design features
What is it?
Design features have the following enhancements, which makes their behavior more consistent with design element
behavior:
You can add design features to or remove design features from partitions.
You can search for design features in the subset recipe using attribute searches and partition searches.
Note
In NX 9.0, the only design features available in 4GD are welds.
The following table shows an example of a design feature as displayed in the Assembly Navigator. In this
example, a welding joint design feature was created between two shape DEs. The design feature is the child of a
design control element.
Workset
Subset
Design Control Element
Welding Joint Design Feature
Shape DE 1
Shape DE 2
642
NX 9.0
Assembly Navigator
Edit Effectivity
Prerequisite
Assembly Navigator
Search
Prerequisite
Resource bar
Collaborative Design Navigator
Location in dialog box
Find groupenter the design feature IDExecute Search
Attribute Search Term
Prerequisite
Menu
You can select multiple design elements to check out or check in.
Note
NX attempts to check out (or check in) all of the selected design elements and their source items.
You receive a warning if any of the objects could not be checked out or in.
When you select a single design element to check out or check in, you can specify whether you want the
design element, the source item, or both.
643
NX 9.0
Assembly Navigator
Assembly Navigator
A name that has the format source product ID_source product revision ID_CD.
A partition for each subassembly node. The default type is a physical partition.
A design element (DE) for each leaf or component node. The DE IDs are automatically generated, and the
DE names are derived from their source items. The default type is a reuse DE.
Configures the assembly with the Latest Working revision rule and the latest revision of the source
assembly item. Optionally, you can specify a different revision rule and item revision.
Places the collaborative design in the Newstuff folder of your 4GD environment.
For more information, see the 4th Generation Design Guide in the Teamcenter help library.
644
NX 9.0
Note
You can run the utility with the -h switch for help.
Check-Mate in 4GD
What is it?
In the 4GD environment, Check-Mate has the following enhancements to support the testing of 4GD objects.
The Parts to Test table and the Results table have two new columns, Design Element and Remark,
which provide information about 4GD objects that are being tested by Check-Mate.
When you set up Check-Mate tests using the All Parts in Folder option, you can also select the new
Include Source Part of Design Element option to automatically add the source parts of the design
elements in the specified folder to the Parts to Test table.
Information about design elements is included as appropriate in Check-Mate Info View windows.
Check-Mate results saved in the Teamcenter database are associated with the source item revisions of the
design elements.
The Design Element column lists the names of design elements that are being tested.
The Remark column displays Workset if one of the tested parts is the workset. For design elements, the
Remark column is blank.
Subsets, promissory design elements, and design control elements are not included in the Parts to Test
table or the Results table.
Command Finder
Set Up Tests
Location in dialog box
645
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Set Up Tests
Location in dialog box
Results table
Prerequisite
You must run one or more Check-Mate tests in 4GD. For more information
about setting up and running tests, see the Check-Mate help.
Command Finder
HD3D Tools
Location in dialog box
Check-Mate
Results group
Command Finder
HD3D Tools
Location in dialog box
646
Check-Mate
NX 9.0
Create and modify issue worksets. To do this, use the Issue Workset dialog box.
Select objects from the graphics window or the Assembly Navigator to add the design elements as issue
attachments.
Search the issue related to the current workset. To do this, use the Current Workset option.
You must be in 4GD and set up the Issue Management tool integrated
with Teamcenter.
Resource bar
647
NX 9.0
Functions
mqc_inquiry_func.dfa
mqc_drawing_askNoteOrigin
mqc_isValidObjectToCheck
mqc_isInternalObjectToCheck
mqc_modeling_func.dfa
mqc_modeling_analyzePocket
mqc_modeling_askOutOfDatePartModules
mqc_checker_func.dfa
mqc_updateAllFeaturesWithOptions
mqc_part_func.dfa
mqc_askUserAttributesInfo
mqc_askInformationOfAnAttribute
mqc_askUnsetAttributes
mqc_askArrayAttributeSize
mqc_isArrayAttribute
mqc_isUnsetAttribute
mqc_isDBAttribute
mqc_isAttributeLocked
mqc_askUnitName
mqc_askUnitAbbreviation
The following new Check-Mate checkers are provided with this release:
Categories
Checker name
ModelingFeatures
Analyze Pocket
Get InformationModeling
Function name
Enhancement
649
NX 9.0
mqc_inquiry_func.dfa
mqc_askSuppressedFeatures
Checker name
Enhancement
TemplateDrafting
TemplateDrafting
Check Color of Drawing Objects Makes the color option index specified in the
customization dialog consistent with the NX
color index.
TemplateFile
Structure
TemplateFile
Structure
Get
Report Solid Body with Default
InformationModeling Density Setting
Get
Report Solid Body with Specified Adds an option to check internal solid bodies.
InformationModeling Density Setting
Get
Report Solid Body without
InformationModeling Density Setting
ModelingFeatures
The following new NX/Open examples have been added to the Check-Mate kit at
kits\design_tools\checkmate\examples\NXOpenExamples/C++, .NET, and Java folders:
ReportIndexOfFontName folder
ReportTabularNoteCellStyle folder
ReportColorNameStringFromIndex folder
A new NX/Open example ExecuteCheckerAndGetResults has been added to the .NET, C++, JAVA folders under
%UGII_BASE_DIR%\ugopen\SampleNXOpenApplications\ so that you can learn how to get Check-Mate results
programmatically. The new NX/Open example has the following specifications:
650
NX 9.0
HD3D ToolsCheck-Mate
Check-Mate profiles
What is it?
When you run a Check-Mate quick access profile from the toolbar area, the target parts are now synchronized with
the parts listed on the Parts tab of the Set Up Tests dialog box.
HD3D ToolsCheck-Mate
651
NX 9.0
An Apply button is now available in the Tolerance Operation and Inspection Feature dialog boxes.
Use this button to create multiple tolerances and inspection features of the same type without having to
reopen the dialog box.
To aid in the creation of templates, a Sensor Strategy list has been added to all feature types in the
Inspection Method dialog box. Sensor strategies include Create as needed, which creates a new,
best-fit sensor, and Use existing only, which uses the best existing sensor for the job at hand.
You can now define specific sensor strategies, tips, and angles when using the Multi Feature
Paths
command. The Create Paths dialog box features a Sensor group identical to that used in
inspection path sub-operations.
To provide access to the number of points in a measurement operation during posting, a new MOM
variable, mom_cmm_total_ptmeas_count, is now available when postprocessing the event
MOM_cmm_output_meas. This variable contains the count of all DMIS PTMEAS statements in all suboperations within the measurement block.
CMMs
New virtual CMMs that you can load from the CMM library include nine new machines manufactured by Brown
and Sharpe, Hexagon, Wenzel, Mitutoyo, Renishaw, and Zeiss.
652
NX 9.0
Templates
Four new inspection setup templates are available from the New dialog box in both English and metric formats. To
see these templates, you must download the file ugs_inspection_templates.pax from GTAC and overwrite the file of
the same name in your installed NX directory.
The 0.7mm Steel Setup file, called 18ga Steel Setup when
using inch units, changes default CMM Inspection
Programming methods related to 2D features. The default
offset distance for curve, line, arc, circle, closed slot and
tab, and edge point inspection features is set to half the
thickness of the sheet metal part. The relative
measurement settings for these feature types are also
changed from None to Automatic, with an offset
distance of 1.0 mm metric, or .04 inches English.
The BS Rotary Machine Setup file loads your inspection
part onto the Brown and Sharpe CMM, loads the
Renishaw PH10M head, and places the TP 20 Renishaw
probe on the head. The template also inserts a Part
Coordinate System (PCS) to Machine Coordinate System
(MCS) alignment example and two rotate table examples.
The latter could be used to seat the part by rotating the
table 30 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise.
653
NX 9.0
Note
In the Program Order view of the Inspection Navigator, alignment examples appear in the
PART_ALIGNMENT group, and rotate table examples appear in the Unused Items group. In the
Machine and Inspection Method views, alignment and rotate table examples appear in the Unused
Items group.
Offsets for arc, circle, and closed slot or tab features are based on the feature's normal direction.
Offsets for line and curve features are based on the cross product of the surface normal and curve tangent.
In the example below, an offset circle feature is used to measure the cylinder diameter. This offers an alternative to
applying a point set to the cylinder feature, which is required by DMIS to measure at least two cross sections.
654
NX 9.0
Feature view
Prerequisite
655
NX 9.0
Adjacent surface/face
Selected point
Offset direction
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Edge Point
Inspection Navigator
656
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
657
NX 9.0
Use the Define Device command to insert a device definition to define any device attached to an actual
CMM. You can then access devices later in your inspection program.
Use the Save DML command to open a connection with a device and save feature, tolerance, and
measurement data to that device relative to a predefined Part Coordinate System (PCS). Data is saved in the
Dimensional Markup Language (DML) format.
You can initialize storage devices, terminals, printers, communication ports, and incremental file names using the
Define Device command. You can then use the Save DML command to send or save DML data to any of these
devices.
Prerequisite
2.
658
NX 9.0
Probe dialog boxTip Type list and Axial Percent text box.
659
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Resequence Paths
Inspection Navigator
660
NX 9.0
Example
T(DIA_4_HOLES_3)=TOL/DIAM,-.1,.1
OUTPUT/FA(HOLE_4),TA(DIA_4_HOLES_3)
Tip
Any inspection program created in NX 8.5.2 or earlier and opened in NX 9 will retain its outputs just as
before. If you want to remove outputs from an older inspection program, in the Inspection Navigator,
right-click the OUTPUTS program group and choose ObjectRemove Output Operations.
Prerequisite
You must create inspection features, tolerances, and inspection paths and
generate your inspection program.
Inspection Navigator
The OUTPUTS group still exists but all outputs are now in the
postprocessed DMIS output.
661
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
662
NX 9.0
Automatic relative
measurement points
Prerequisite
Unless you let NX automatically create relative point features, you must
create a reference feature and an inspection path on that feature. The
reference feature and inspection path must precede the target feature in your
inspection program.
663
NX 9.0
Requirements Validation
Units in the HD3D Requirements Validation tool
What is it?
The values in the Value column of the Requirements Validation results tree now include units. NX determines
the unit type in the following order.
1.
2.
If the unit type cannot be determined from the check formula, or if there is a conflict, NX attempts to find
the unit type in the requirement formula.
3.
If the unit type cannot be determined from either the check formula or the requirement formula, NX uses
the default analysis unit of the evaluated dimensionality of the check formula. You can specify the default
analysis unit with AnalysisUnits.
2.
If the unit of the expression cannot be determined, NX looks in the formula for units enclosed by square
brackets. For example, if a formula includes 100[mm], NX determines that the unit type is mm. If the
formula includes 100mm, NX cannot determine the unit type from the formula.
Resource bar
664
NX 9.0
NX removes the features that have a smaller length than the specified offset distance.
This command is useful, for example, when you want to create a profile needed for machining the part.
Modeling
Command Finder
3D Curve Offset
Tooling Design
665
NX 9.0
3D Curve Blend
What is it?
Use the 3D Curve Blend command to blend the concave corners of a 3D curve with a specified radius in a
specified direction. You can blend all the concave corners of a curve or blend a string of curves in one operation.
NX automatically blends concave corners of a curve that has a blend radius that is less than the specified blend
radius.
Modeling
Command Finder
3D Curve Blend
666
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Match Surface
What is it?
Use the Match Surface command to create a matching surface from the selected edge of the target surface to the
selected edge or curve of the reference surface.
You can:
Retain the same geometric properties for both the target and the matching surface.
View the maximum deviation between the target and the matching surface.
Target Surface
Reference Surface
Matching Surface
The edges or curves of the target surface and the reference surface must not be closed.
This command is useful, for example, when you want to deform the sheet metal to create a die face.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Match Surface
Tooling Design
667
NX 9.0
Specify the radius range for the die faces whose radius you want to reduce. NX displays the list of die faces
that fall within the range of the specified radius.
Reduce the radius by setting it to a percentage of the current radius, to a reduction value, or to a target
value.
Modeling
Command Finder
Reduce Surface Radius
668
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Guided Extension
What is it?
Use the Guided Extension command to extend the selected edges tangentially from the faces of a sheet body.
NX creates guidelines to form segments after you select the edges, and creates a new sheet body after you extend the
edges.
You can improve the quality of the extended surface by changing the segment type or by changing the rotation angle
of segment guidelines.
You can also merge, restore, and split the segments that you want to extend.
Extended surface
Segment
Segment guideline
Distance handle
This command is useful, for example, when you want to model the casting shapes from the original die surfaces.
Modeling
Command Finder
Guided Extension
Tooling Design
669
NX 9.0
Calculate accurate analysis results for formability, stress, strain, thickness, and thinning.
Correct the geometry based on the formability analysis results and verify if the parts can be manufactured
without rips and tears.
670
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Geometry Preparation
Use the Geometry Preparation command to prepare die, punch, binder, and blank geometry for incremental
sheet metal formability analysis.
You can:
Specify the thickness and material of the blank. You can also set the tensile strength of the blank sheet.
Set the percentage of the restraining force that you want to apply to the selected draw bead.
Die
Blank
Binder
Punch
You can use the Mesh and Solver command to mesh the sheet body based on the geometry that you define using
the Geometry Preparation command.
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Geometry Preparation
Tooling Design
671
NX 9.0
Save the generated LS-DYNA keyword file on your local hard disk.
Use the LS DYNA solver to analyze the saved file. You can save the formability analysis results as an
animation file on your local hard disk.
Before you use the Mesh and Solver command, you must set the following customer defaults:
To specify the folder path for the LS-DYNA executable file, set the LS-DYNA Manger Solver default.
To specify the folder path for the LS-PrePost executable file, set the LS-PrePost default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Mesh and Solver
672
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Display Results
Use the Display Results command to view the animated analysis results for formability, stress, strain, thickness,
and thinning in a color coded plot. You can also view the formability limit diagram (FLD) and analysis results at the
specified state.
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Display Results
Tooling Design
673
NX 9.0
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Command Finder
Object Attribute Management
Color ID Color
Name
User
Defined
Hole
Symbol
Manufacturing
Instruction
212
ST
ST
MW_HOLE_THREAD
SB
Positive
Counterbored
PDW_HOLE_SHCS_C_BORE
SB
Back Counterbored
PDW_HOLE_SHCS_C_BORE
674
Color
Deep
Blue
Manufacturing Face
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Color
Color ID Color
Name
User
Defined
Hole
Symbol
Manufacturing
Instruction
Manufacturing Face
SC
Positive Drill
Through Hole
PDW_HOLE_SHCS_CLR
DB
Dowel Hole,
PDW_HOLE_DOWEL_C_BORE
Unilateral
clearance+0.002Wire
EDW, Positive
Milling
DF
Dowel
PDW_HOLE_DOWEL_FIT
Hole,Unilateral
Clearance+0.002Wire
EDW
DC
Dowel
Hole,Unilateral
Clearance+0.05Wire
EDW
10
PB
Location
PDW_HOLE_PILOT_C_BORE
Hole,Unilateral
Clearance+0.005Wire
EDW,Positive
Milling
11
PF
Location
PDW_HOLE_PILOT_FIT
Hole,Unilateral
Clearance+0.005Wire
EDW
186
Red
PDW_HOLE_DOWEL_CLR
The template spreadsheet is available in the templates folder in the Mold Wizard, Progressive Die Wizard, and
Electrode Design engineering databases.
The default location for the folder is controlled by the Face Color Management customer default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Tooling Design
675
NX 9.0
When you select a hole face and specify a color, you automatically associate hole type and manufacturing
instruction attributes with the face. These attributes also let you create a note using the Hole Manufacturing Note
command.
Mold and die assemblies can contain thousands of objects. Having visual cues that identify manufacturing methods
provides useful information to workers on the shop floor.
Command Finder
Face Color Management
Use the Face Color Management command to assign colors and manufacturing instructions to circular
holes in your mold or die part or assembly.
2.
Create a top view drawing of the part or assembly in the Drafting application.
3.
Use the Hole Manufacturing Note command in the Mold Wizard or Progressive Die Wizard application
to create a drawing that identifies the holes and shows the manufacturing information in the note.
This example shows a portion of a die drawing, with holes identified by number. The corresponding note identifies
the type of hole and manufacturing method.
676
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
NX automatically generates the hole manufacturing information for classes of circular holes. You do not need to
create notes for thousands of holes manually.
Command Finder
Hole Manufacturing Note
Die Design
Die Engineering
Electrode Design
Mold Wizard
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Tooling Design
677
NX 9.0
Mold Wizard
Mold Base Library enhancements
What is it?
The Mold Base Library is integrated into the Reuse Library. You can have multiple database locations and you
can configure your own mold base libraries.
Edit a mold base by right-clicking it either in the graphics window or in the Assembly Navigator and
choosing Edit Tooling Component.
Mold Wizard
Command Finder
Mold Base Library
Resource bar
Reuse Library
678
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Workpiece enhancements
What is it?
When you use the default Mold V.1 template, you can now specify workpiece dimensions measured from a
reference point. In previous releases, this option was available only with the Original template.
Mold Wizard
Prerequisite
The workpiece must be sketch-based, and you must be using the Mold V.1
or the Original template.
Command Finder
Workpiece
Location in dialog box
Tooling Design
679
NX 9.0
No.
Part Name
Size
Count
Process
Camera_Core_ej_pin_153
6.00 x 204.79 2
Headcut
Camera_Core_ej_pin_stepped_263
3.00 x 2.00
x 250.00
C-1
C-2
A mold assembly can contain hundreds of ejector pins and sleeves of various types. This command provides
important information automatically and categorizes it in a table on the drawing.
Mold Wizard
Command Finder
Ejector Pin Table
680
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Weld Assistant
Fabrication Information
The Fabrication Information command replaces the InformationWelding command.
Use the Fabrication Information command to view information about welding objects, BIW locators, or structure
welding joints.
You can also view information on:
The length and volume of the welding joints and arc welds.
Weld material required for the selected welding joints and arc welds.
Modeling
Command Finder
Fabrication Information
Menu
InformationFabrication
Tooling Design
681
NX 9.0
Joint Mark
Use the Joint Mark command to indicate the location of a laser beam weld. The Joint Mark feature is defined by a
custom curve, a point, and attributes. You can specify the placement and orientation of Joint Marks to create single,
multiple, or mirrored joint marks. The joint marks can be published to Teamcenter to be managed and used by
downstream manufacturing operations.
You can:
Modeling
Command Finder
Joint Mark
The locations of weld points, datum pin locators, datum surface locators, and measurement locators to
either a CSV file or an Information window.
Datum information that indicates the size of the datum pin locators and datum surface locators.
For the selected datum, NX exports the following attributes: Solid Type, Radius, Above Length, and
Total Length.
682
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Modeling
Command Finder
Export CSV File
Export to groupType listCSV File or Information Window
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Modeling
Command Finder
Import CSV File
Main Menu
Tooling Design
683
NX 9.0
Group changes
Option
Change description
Edge
preparation
Weld Extent
This is the new name for the previous Edge Sets group.
Options for preparing the edges that you want to weld that were previously available in the
Settings group are now moved to this new group.
Change description
Single Face This check box is moved to the Face Sets group. It was previously available in the Settings
Set
group.
Use Fill In
This check box is moved to the Cross Section group.
Construction
It is available when Type is set to Flared V Groove or Flared Bevel Groove.
It was previously available in the Settings group.
Field Weld
This check box is available in the Welding Characteristics group when you add the following
value to the Weld Assistant Characteristics customer default for Groove:
NONE: Field Weld : FIELD WELD
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click
Find Default
Show
Handles
684
Use the options in the Limits group in the Groove Weld dialog box.
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Modeling
Command Finder
Groove Weld
Use the Datum Surface Locator and Datum Pin Locator commands to create up to seven custom
types of datum pin locator and datum surface locator features.
To do this, you must set up the Datum Surface Locator and Datum Pin Locator customer defaults.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Customize the Part Navigator icons for datum surface locators and datum pin locators using the
NXOpen.Weld.DatumIconBuilder callback.
Two new checks related to datum surface locators and datum pin locators are available in Check-Mate.
Minimum Distance to Edge Check
Evaluates the distance between the center of the specified datum and the nearest edge of the part
on which the datum lies.
Connected Parts Check
Identifies if a connected part file exists anywhere in the current assembly structure. The type of
datum does not affect the check.
Use the Datum Surface Locator command to mirror an existing datum surface locator to create a new
non-associative datum surface locator using the new Mirror option.
In the example, an existing datum surface locator (1) is mirrored about the plane (2) to create a new datum
surface locator (3).
Tooling Design
685
NX 9.0
Modeling
Prerequisite
You must set up the Datum Surface Locator and Datum Pin Locator
customer defaults to see the locator type lists in the command dialog boxes.
Command Finder
Datum Surface Locator
Datum Pin Locator
Location in dialog box
686
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Resource bar
HD3D Tools tab
Double-click Check-Mate
Settings
groupSet Up Tests
Command Finder
Set Up Tests
Location in dialog box
Tooling Design
687
NX 9.0
Bead
Datums
By default, Teamcenter saves a new version of the changed feature when you publish a part or assembly that
contains changed weld or datum features.
Use the following Teamcenter integration preferences to enable publishing of welding and datum features:
Spot Weld
Arc Weld
Welding Joint
Surface Weld
To publish weld and datum features as PS Connection occurrences instead of publishing separate item-based
objects, use the Weld Publishing Method customer default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
688
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Example
For a two panel resistance spot weld, set the customer default number for the point marker to 38. When you
publish the weld, NX associates the JT file weld_38.jt in the UGII_Base_DIR\ugweld\jt_files folder with
the corresponding weld object in Teamcenter.
Note
When you publish a spot weld that uses a solid body as a representation instead of a point marker, NX creates
the JT files based on the specific solid representation.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Tooling Design
689
NX 9.0
Find missing connected part faces for the Datum Pin Locator and Datum Surface Locator features.
Save the faces found by this command as links to the components. For example, if you save the additional
connected parts of the Datum Pin Locator and Datum Surface Locator features, NX saves a link to the
component, and not a face in the component.
The Connected Face Finder dialog box is redesigned. You can now use the Connected Face Finder dialog
box to find the missing connected part faces using a minimum number of clicks.
Modeling
Command Finder
Connected Face Finder
Modeling
Command Finder
Compound Weld
690
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Structure Welding
Fabrication PMI
Use the Fabrication PMI command to apply PMI symbols on structure welds.
You can:
Use the parameters defined in the welding joint feature to define the symbol.
View the created PMI symbols under the PMI node in the Part Navigator.
PMI
Weld (1)
Modeling
Command Finder
Fabrication PMI
Tooling Design
691
NX 9.0
Surface Weld
Use the Surface Weld command to build up material on a face using sketch curves as a reference. NX estimates
the volume of material that is added and saves it as an attribute on the Surface Weld feature.
When you create a surface weld and then use the Auto Weld Symbol or the Fabrication PMI command to create
weld symbols, NX customizes the weld symbol to depict the surface weld.
Modeling
Command Finder
Surface Weld
692
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Corner joint
Lap joint
You can also define joint limits and splits while creating joints.
Tooling Design
693
NX 9.0
Backing plates
You can now define a backing plate for the joint when you create welding joints manually.
When you define a backing plate and then use the Auto Weld Symbol command or the Fabrication PMI
command to create weld symbols, the weld symbol shows that the weld has a backing plate.
Gaps
NX can automatically define a maximum tolerance for gaps between faces when creating butt welds, T-joints, lap
joints and corner joints. You can determine if the two components being welded touch each other. To do this, use the
Maximum Face Gap option.
694
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Gaps appear in the model if you introduce tolerancing errors when you model the components or when you import
data from other CAD software. Sometimes a larger gap is deliberately engineered between the two components
being welded.
Modeling
Prerequisites
When you define a backing place for welding joints, the Create Method
list must be set to Manual Single.
When you define a tolerance for maximum gaps between faces, the Create
Method list must be set to Automatic.
Command Finder
Welding Joint
Location in dialog box
Create step
[Creating corner, lap, socket, or mechanical type joints]
Joint Type listCorner or Lap or Socket or Mechanical
[Defining a backing plate for maximum gaps between faces]
Select Backing Face
[Defining a tolerance for maximum gaps between faces]
Settings groupMaximum Face Gap
Tooling Design
695
NX 9.0
Modeling
Command Finder
Edit Joint Definition
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
All NX applications.
Main Menu
696
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Modeling
Command Finder
Export Welding Joints
Main Menu
Tooling Design
697
NX 9.0
By default, Teamcenter saves a new version of the changed feature when you publish a part or assembly that
contains changed weld or datum features.
Use the following Teamcenter integration preferences to enable publishing of welding and datum features:
Spot Weld
Arc Weld
Welding Joint
Surface Weld
To publish weld and datum features as PS Connection occurrences instead of publishing separate item-based
objects, use the Weld Publishing Method customer default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
698
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Example
For a two panel resistance spot weld, set the customer default number for the point marker to 38. When you
publish the weld, NX associates the JT file weld_38.jt in the UGII_Base_DIR\ugweld\jt_files folder with
the corresponding weld object in Teamcenter.
Note
When you publish a spot weld that uses a solid body as a representation instead of a point marker, NX creates
the JT files based on the specific solid representation.
Modeling
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Tooling Design
699
NX 9.0
Die Design
Lower Binder
Use the Lower Binder command to create a lower binder which supports and holds the sheet metal in position
during the drawing operation. This command is similar to the Lower Binder (Legacy) command but it has
additional options and enhanced performance.
You can create or edit the Lower Binder feature in an assembly.
When you use the Lower Binder command, you can use:
Templates from the Reuse Library to add details such as a rib, a keyway, or a handling hole.
Die Design
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Lower Binder
700
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Trim Post
Use the Trim Post command to create a cast trim post to support the sheet metal during the trimming operation.
This command is similar to the Trim Post (Legacy) command but it has additional options and enhanced
performance.
You can:
Die Design
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Trim Post
Die Design
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Draw Punch
Tooling Design
or Draw Die
701
NX 9.0
To assign colors, use the following customer defaults for the listed commands.
Command
Customer defaults
Draw Punch
Forming Faces
Belt Wall Faces
Base Faces
Non-machined Faces
Draw Die
Forming Faces
Base Faces
Non-machined Faces
Lower Binder
Trim Post
Forming Faces
Belt Wall Faces
Trim Profile Edges
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
702
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Die Engineering
Die Analysis using LS-DYNA
Die Analysis using LS-DYNA
The NX CAD environment offers you the ability to analyze the stamping draw process using the LS-DYNA
incremental solver, and eliminates the risk of losing design data and associativity during the manual file transfer
between the CAD and CAE software.
You can:
Calculate accurate analysis results for formability, stress, strain, thickness, and thinning.
Correct the geometry based on the formability analysis results and verify if the parts can be manufactured
without rips and tears.
Tooling Design
703
NX 9.0
Geometry Preparation
Use the Geometry Preparation command to prepare die, punch, binder, and blank geometry for incremental
sheet metal formability analysis.
You can:
Specify the thickness and material of the blank. You can also set the tensile strength of the blank sheet.
Set the percentage of the restraining force that you want to apply to the selected draw bead.
Die
Blank
Binder
Punch
You can use the Mesh and Solver command to mesh the sheet body based on the geometry that you define using
the Geometry Preparation command.
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Geometry Preparation
704
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Save the generated LS-DYNA keyword file on your local hard disk.
Use the LS DYNA solver to analyze the saved file. You can save the formability analysis results as an
animation file on your local hard disk.
Before you use the Mesh and Solver command, you must set the following customer defaults:
To specify the folder path for the LS-DYNA executable file, set the LS-DYNA Manger Solver default.
To specify the folder path for the LS-PrePost executable file, set the LS-PrePost default.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Mesh and Solver
Tooling Design
705
NX 9.0
Display Results
Use the Display Results command to view the animated analysis results for formability, stress, strain, thickness,
and thinning in a color coded plot. You can also view the formability limit diagram (FLD) and analysis results at the
specified state.
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Display Results
706
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Reverse the trim side of the selected trimming curve using a vector.
The Trim Side group used to reverse the trim side is no longer available.
Hide the trim angle segments that are in the safe zone.
To do this, select the new Hide Safe Zone check box.
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Die Engineering
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Trim Angle Check
Tooling Design
707
NX 9.0
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
Die Engineering
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Stamping Operation
Tip
To find a customer default, choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find
Default
708
Tooling Design
NX 9.0
Die Engineering
Prerequisite
Command Finder
Die Tip
Tooling Design
709
NX 9.0
You can also export dimension as blocks to get the same display as NX dimensions. To do this, set the following
keyword in the DXF/DWG settings file.
EXPORT_DIMENSIONS_AS=BLOCK
Controlling text aspect ratio for the text imported from DXF/DWG
file
What is it?
When you import text from DXF/DWG file, you can now specify how the translator controls the text aspect ratio by
setting one of the following Text Aspect Ratio options.
Calculate
Calculates the text aspect ratio based on the bounding box length of the AutoCAD text and
tries to match the length in NX. This option is useful if AutoCAD fonts are available on the
machine.
The corresponding settings file value is AUTOMATIC_CALCULATION.
Scale DXF/DWG
Width Factor
Calculates the text aspect ratio by scaling the AutoCAD width factor value with the scale
factor specified in the font mapping table. This option is useful for non-English text.
The corresponding settings file value is
SCALE_ACAD_WIDTHFACTOR_WITH_SPECIFIED_VALUE
Use DXF/DWG
Width Factor
Uses the AutoCAD width factor value as the text aspect ratio. This is useful to reimport the
data that is exported using Use NX Aspect Ratio option.
The corresponding settings file value is SAME_AS_ACAD_WIDTHFACTOR
Specify NX Aspect
Ratio
Uses the text aspect value based on the value specified in the mapping file.
The corresponding settings file value is USE_VALUE_SPECIFIED_IN_MAPPING_FILE
711
NX 9.0
AUTOMATIC_CALCULATION
SCALE_ACAD_WIDTHFACTOR_WITH_SPECIFIED_VALUE
SAME_AS_ACAD_WIDTHFACTOR
USE_VALUE_SPECIFIED_IN_MAPPING_FILE
AutoCAD DXF/DWG
712
R12
R13
R14
2000
20042013
Data translation
NX 9.0
The STEP shape representation coordinate system to NX as a legacy coordinate system or a datum
coordinate system. By default, the STEP translator imports it as a legacy coordinate system. To import the
shape representation coordinate system as a datum coordinate system, set the following keyword:
IMPORT_AXIS2_PLACEMENT_3D_AS_DATUM_CSYS=YES
713
NX 9.0
NX to JT
JT version 10 files
What is it?
You can now generate JT version 10 files from NX to JT translator. JT version 10 files support the following:
To generate JT version 10 files, in the JT configuration file, you must set the following:
JtFileFormat = 10
If you use Teamcenter Visualization to view JT files, you need version 10.1 or later to view JT version 10 files.
Note
The sorted display order is retained only in version 10 JT files. To generate version 10 JT files, in
the JT configuration file, you must set the following:
JtFileFormat = 10
If you use Teamcenter Visualization to view JT files, you need version 10.1 or later to view version
10 JT files.
Example
The example shows the display of model views sorted in alphabetical order.
NX
JT
Model Views
Model Views
A1
Sort_MODEL
A10
A1
A100
A10
A2
714
Data translation
NX 9.0
A20
A100
A200
A2
A3
A20
A30
A200
A300
A3
Back
A30
Bottom
A300
Front
Isometric
Left
Right
Top
Trimetric (Work)
Back
Bottom
Front
Isometric
Left
Right
Top
Trimetric
715
NX 9.0
Components
PMIs
To retain the layer visibility settings of solid bodies and sheet bodies in the JT file, in the ugconfig section of the JT
configuration file, set the following:
mergeSolids = false
mergeSheets = false
716
Data translation
NX 9.0
To view the lightweight section view in the JT file, use a JT viewer such as Teamcenter Visualization.
Note
Version 10 JT files produce better visualization of crosshatch patterns and cutting plane symbols in
JT viewers such as Teamcenter Visualization. To generate version 10 JT files, in the JT
configuration file, you must set the following:
JtFileFormat = 10
If you use Teamcenter Visualization to view JT files, you need version 10.1 or later to view version
10 JT files.
Writes the weld joint marks along with its guide curves and clamp symbols.
Names the Note PMI with the name of the respective weld joint mark features.
717
NX 9.0
To write the weld joint marks and their elements, set the following keyword in the JT configuration file:
activateWeldPMI = true
To write the hole and thread callout associated with the linear and radial dimension PMIs, set the following keyword
in the JT configuration file:
activateDimPMI = true
718
Data translation
NX 9.0
Note
Geometry sharing information is retained in the JT file only when:
The JT file contains the XT B-rep data. To write the XT B-rep data to the JT file, in the JT
configuration file, you must set the following:
XTbrep = true
You create JT files of version 10. To generate version 10 JT files, in the JT configuration file, you
must set the following:
JtFileFormat = 10
719
NX 9.0
Curves
Sketches
Bodies
Components
When you select PMI in a JT viewer such as Teamcenter Visualization, the objects associated with the selected PMI
are highlighted in the graphics window.
Note
720
The NX to JT translator already supports PMI associations to the faces and edges of a body in an
NX part.
The size of the JT file increases if PMIs are associated to an entire solid body instead of its
constituting element such as an edge or a face.
Data translation
NX 9.0
Split the concave body into multiple convex bodies and use the Multi Convex collision shape. Apply the
Convex Factor slider in the Collision Body dialog box to further enhance the detail of the collision
body.
You can also set the collision body to highlight when it contacts other geometry.
To set an individual body to highlight, select the Highlight on Collision check box in the Collision
Body dialog box.
To set all collision bodies in your model to highlight when they collide with another body, select the
Highlight Shape on Collision check box in the Mechatronics Concept Designer Preferences
dialog box.
Command Finder
Collision Body
Location in the dialog box
721
NX 9.0
Actuator enhancements
More controls and restraints are available for Position Control and Speed Control actuators. This enhancement
lets you:
Select either a linear or angular axis type within the actuator window.
When angular Position Actuators are used, you can define the rotational behavior by setting the angular path to:
Command Finder
Position Control
Speed Control
722
Whats New in NX 9
NX 9.0
Cam enhancements
You can apply motion segments to a Cam profile that will automatically create fifth order polynomials to make
smooth transversals between segments. This lets you create different motion relationships between the axes with
smooth transitions. Motion segments include line, sine, and arcsine.
You can now create or modify motion profiles in the SCOUT software and use them in your Mechatronics Concept
Designer model using the following commands:
Import Cam Profile Lets you import cam profiles created or modified in SCOUT.
You can also use the Export to SCOUT and Import from SCOUT options within the Cam Profile
dialog box to import a preexisting cam profile or export the cam profile currently being displayed.
Use the Electronic Cam command to create a physics object that makes the motion of one axis joint dependent on
the motion of a master axis joint. The motions reaction force is not transferred back to the master axis. Use
electronic cams to represent servo drives.
Use the Mechanical Cam command to create a physics object that makes the motion of one axis joint dependent
on the motion of a master axis joint. The motions reaction force is transferred back to the master axis.
Command Finder
Cam Profile
Export Cam Profile
Import Cam Profile
Electronic Cam
Mechanical Cam
723
NX 9.0
Operation enhancements
When you create an operation, you can set the operation type to Pause Operation so that you can create a time
based or event based operation that pauses the simulation.
Command Finder
Operation
Location in the dialog box
724
Change the units and convert the value to the new units.
Whats New in NX 9
NX 9.0
In addition, you can now change the units of a parameter in the Runtime Inspector dialog box. This displays the
parameter values in the new unit while the unit in the runtime object remains unchanged.
Physics engine
Refresh rate
Customer default settings are used to set preferences globally. Preferences set in the Mechatronics Concept
Designer Preferences dialog box are stored and used in the work part and override the customer default settings.
Command Finder
725
NX 9.0
Create dependencies
Use the Dependency command to create trace links and dependencies between requirements, functions, logical
items, components, and physics objects.
Command Finder
Dependency
You can set a Logical to one of three Aspect types: Function, Location and Product. When using the
Product logical type you can add ECAD specific information in the Parameters group of the logical
item or through the Electrical folder in the Dependency panel.
In the Behavioral folder in the Dependency panel you can select physics objects to link to the selected
logical.
Dependency panel
Requirement folder
Electrical folder
Behavioral folder
Select Physics
Derive Logical
End Tracelink
726
Whats New in NX 9
Start Tracelink
End Tracelink
NX 9.0
Start Tracelink
The following shortcut commands are available in Teamcenter Integration from the Dependency panel:
Requirement folder
Function folder
Logical folder
End Tracelink
Resource bar
In conjunction with the plug-in for ePLAN, items in the logical structure and devices in an ePLAN project
can be exchanged through .xml files.
The Logical Type filter is added to both the Import from ECAD and Export to ECAD command
dialog boxes. It lets you filter the logical types you want to import or export.
Multiple logical objects can now be exported through the Export to ECAD command.
The Import from ECAD dialog box now has a Results table which displays comparison results. You can
also resolve conflicts and choose if the imported data shall be applied to the logical model or not.
Electrical Part Numbers imported from ECAD are stored in the logical model and can be used to search for
a reuse component to be placed in the assembly.
727
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Import from ECAD
Export to ECAD
Simulating NC code
You can now simulate NC code in Mechatronics Concept Designer by using the Runtime NC command. Machine
Tool Builder and Mechatronics Concept Designer work together to make machine simulation solutions. Two more
commands have been added. Convert from MCD is located in the Machine Tool Builder application. Convert
from MTB is located in Mechatronics Concept Designer.
Application
Command Finder
728
Whats New in NX 9
NX 9.0
Command Finder
Convert from MTB
Command Finder
SHM Signal Mapping
729
NX 9.0
SCOUT Integration
You can now create or modify motion profiles in the SCOUT software and use them in your model using the
following commands:
Import Cam Profile Lets you import cam profiles created or modified in SCOUT.
Command Finder
Export Cam Profile
Import Cam Profile
SIZER Integration
You can now import motors from the SIZER software and use them in your Mechatronics Concept Designer model.
Use the Export to SIZER command to export actuator data to SIZER. You can then use this data in
SIZER to select a motor to be imported to Mechatronics Concept Designer.
Use the Import from SIZER command to import 3D geometry and input parameters for one or more
motor selections from SIZER. The geometry is added to your model as a component and the motor data is
stored in the logical item associated with the actuator physics object.
Command Finder
Import from SIZER
Export to SIZER
730
Whats New in NX 9
NX 9.0
Snap.NX.Component objects, which are used to represent the parent-child relationships in an assembly.
Easy-to-use functions for cycling through an assembly tree without writing complex recursive code
A new chapter of the Getting Started with SNAP guide describes assemblies concepts and provides sample code.
The SNAP Reference Guide describes the new assemblies functionality in detail along with examples.
Block UI Styler
New properties for blocks
What is it?
You can set PageIncrement, LineIncrement, and AdaptiveScaleLimits properties for the following blocks.
Linear Dimension
Angular Dimension
On Path Dimension
Radius Dimension
Expression
Programming Tools
731
NX 9.0
Result
NX closes the dialog box and retains both the original and the new
displayed parts.
For a secondary dialog box, NX retains only the original part.
Click Apply.
NX closes the dialog box, displays the original part and then reopens
the dialog box.
Note
732
Changing the displayed part and operations that you perform in the new part must be within the
same callback. For instance, if the part that is displayed before an Update callback is run is different
from the part that is displayed after callback run is over, then NX closes the dialog box.
You cannot recover undo marks that are deleted by any operation.
Programming Tools
NX 9.0
Explorer block
Use the Explorer block to organize a large set of inputs in a dialog box for easy navigation.
You can organize the inputs into nodes on a tree, and create up to three levels of nodes in the tree. Each node
contains groups and individual inputs similar to an NX dialog box.
Navigation tree
Groups
You can also place an Explorer Node block in the Explorer block. Within each Explorer Node block, you can
place any other block available in the Block Catalog.
The following table lists the block-specific properties for an Explorer block.
Property Name
Description
Access
CurrentNode
Property Type
List of Values
Integer
Means
Creation
This property can be modified interactively in the Block UI Styler when you design
the dialog box.
Initialize
This property can be modified at run time using the NXOpen API, but only during
the Initialize callback.
Get
This property can be read using the NXOpen API in any callback.
Set
This property can be modified at run time using the NXOpen API in any callback.
Block UI Styler
Resource Bar
Programming Tools
733
NX 9.0
Class names let you invoke callbacks anytime Edit Parameters or Edit with Rollback are used to edit a user
defined feature. The class name is saved in each instance of the user defined feature that is using the definition. If an
edit callback is not registered with the user defined feature, then the default edit user interface is opened instead.
You can:
Specify class names when you create or edit user defined features.
Implement callback using API libraries that are invoked when you edit and update a user defined feature
and its component features, to customize the edit user interface, perform parameter validation and perform
additional calculations required for robust feature updates.
Provide a custom icon in the Part Navigator for user defined features with class names using callbacks.
The custom code for the callbacks is located in the directory specified in the custom_dirs.dat file. The code is
contained in the three standard subdirectories required by NX Open: startup, udo, and application. For
information on creating, organizing, and implementing custom code, see the NX Open Programmers Guide.
Custom code can be created for the following callbacks:
Icon Customizes the part navigator icon. The bitmaps for the icons must be located in the application
subdirectory.
Component feature create Enables additional computations of parameter values and references for the
component feature that is used. Use this callback when initially creating component features.
Component feature update Enables computations of parameter values and references when component
features are updated. Use this callback when updating component features.
Component feature copy Used when a UDF feature is copied (after EditPaste).
UDF instantiation feature Performs additional checks after component features have been implemented,
such as the validity of the parameters of the UDF and whether business rules were followed.
735
NX 9.0
Modeling
Prerequisite
Menu
736
NX 9.0
If it is not possible for the features to be rearranged without changing the relative order of the Feature Groups, a
message appears giving you the option to allow or deny the operation.
Prerequisite
Menu
FileUtilitiesCustomer DefaultsModelingFeature
GroupPrefer Sequential Timestamp Order
737
NX 9.0
U/V Direction
What is it?
Use the U/V Direction command to modify the U and V directions of B-surfaces that are not part of a
feature.
You can reverse the U direction, reverse the V direction, and/or swap U and V.
You can use any or all of the options.
Start
Reverse U
Reverse V
Reverse U and V
Swap U and V
738
NX 9.0
Note
As shown in both examples below, the end points of the internal (non-boundary) curves are ignored.
Toolbar
Surface
Menu
Settings
739
NX 9.0
PMI
Find PMI Associated to Geometry enhancements
What is it?
The Find PMI Associated to Geometry command has been enhanced. In addition to being able to find PMI
objects that are associated to the selected geometry, you can now use the following new options:
Attached PMI Finds PMI objects that have a leader or extension line that terminates on (attaches to)
the selected geometry, even if that geometry is not associated to the PMI.
PMI Referencing Member Objects Finds PMI objects associated to any face, edge, or other
geometric elements that are part of a selected body or assembly occurrence.
All Occurrences of Selected Components Finds PMI objects associated to any occurrence of the
component corresponding to a selected assembly occurrence.
Identify PMI objects that have leaders or extension lines attached to the selected geometry.
Identify PMI objects associated to any portion of a selected body or assembly occurrence.
Identify PMI objects that are associated to any occurrence of an assembly component.
PMI
Menu
Shortcut menu
740
NX 9.0
Add PMI objects to an assembly that includes component occurrences representing multiple configurations
of a product.
2.
3.
In NX, with customer defaults set to enable PMI Effectivity Management, load a configured assembly.
4.
(Optional) To change the PMI Effectivity Management based display of PMI objects for the current
session, change option values in the PMI Preferences dialog box.
Condition display of effectivity filtered PMI objects based on whether All or Any associated occurrences
are loaded.
Display nodes in the Part Navigator for PMI objects that have been filtered out of the graphics display.
PMI
Prerequisite
Customer Defaults
FileUtilitiesCustomer DefaultsPMIPMI
GeneralEffectivity tab
PMI Preferences
PreferencesPMIPMIEffectivity tab
741
NX 9.0
Routing
Wind Catcher
What is it?
Use this command to create a piece of duct that diverts the air from one duct to another duct.
You can:
Create the ducts at an angle to the direction of the wind. This angle should be between five degrees and 176
degrees.
The example shows two views of an arc type duct created at a forty five degree angle. The direction of the wind is
indicated by the arrow.
The example shows two views of a triangle type duct created at a ninety degree angle. The direction of the wind is
indicated by the arrow.
742
The duct that the wind is diverted from, that is the parent duct, is larger than the duct that the wind is
diverted to.
NX 9.0
RoutingHVAC
Toolbar
Routing MechanicalTools Drop-down listWind Catcher
Menu
ToolsWind Catcher
743
NX 9.0
Example
The following image shows the first part of a duct system with branch IDs assigned using the following
parameters and displayed on the branches.
Prefix = wtr_line_
Start Value = 1
RoutingHVAC
Toolbar
Menu
744
NX 9.0
Platform Creator
What is it?
Use this command to create platforms and supports for platforms, using sketches. You can also add stock or stock
components for outer and inner frames of the platform.
After you create the platform, you can:
Create stairways or ladders, or both, for access to the platforms by using templates created in Product
Template Studio.
This example shows a platform with supports, handrails, a stairway, and a ladder.
This example shows the bottom of the platform with an additional support that is created using the Linear Path
command.
Additional support
745
NX 9.0
Routing MechanicalPlatform
Toolbar
Menu
746
NX 9.0
Shipbuilding
Assign manufacturing information to openings
What is it?
You can assign manufacturing information as attributes when you create or edit any steel features that define
openings. For example, you can assign grinder, tap, and radius information when you create a cutout. This capability
was previously only available when you used the Profile Cutout command.
You can:
Configure the attributes in the customer defaults and customize them for your site or project. You can
specify the attribute title, attribute value, object type, and whether a user can modify it.
Assign the attributes to edges, curves, faces, bodies, features, or parts associated to the opening.
Specify the manufacturing information when you use the following commands:
Profile Cutout
Corner Cut
Along Guide Cut
Cutout
Edge Cut
The dialog boxes for the commands include a Manufacturing Information group.
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
Prerequisite
Toolbar
Ship Structure Basic DesignProfile Cutout
or
747
NX 9.0
Cutout
Ship Structure Detail DesignProfile Cutout
Cut
, Cutout
, Corner
, or Edge
Cut
Menu
748
NX 9.0
Cutout_FL_N
Cutout_FL_N_Flipped
Cutout_FL_P
Tight
Cutout_FL_H
Cutout_FL_K
After section subtypes are defined in the registration spreadsheet, users can select a subtype from a list in the dialog
box when they create or edit the steel feature.
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults
749
NX 9.0
Manufacturing
Operation Navigator enhancements
Starting in NX 8.5, the Operation Navigator was enhanced to include the following:
The number of characters supported for the names of operation, program, tool, geometry, and method
objects increased from 30 to 132. There are no changes to the special characters allowed.
Note
You must update any application, such as an API program or post, so that it can read the object
names with the increased character limit.
You can drag an object to the first position in a group. NX displays the drop location as you move the
object.
750
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Solver version support
For each released version of NX, the following tables list the supported solver versions for import, export, and the
post-processing of results. Note:
The version listed in the Import ASCII and Import Binary rows is the solver version that was generally
available when the NX version was released. In general, the import of the solver ASCII and binary files
should be upwards compatible. Therefore, you should be able to import them into the most recent version
of NX. However, in general:
o
ASCII files are backwards compatible for import into NX. If you import an ASCII file from a
newer version of the solver than is officially supported, the software simply ignores any new
fields/options that aren't supported in the current NX release.
Binary files are not backwards compatible. For example, you can import a binary file created by
NX Nastran 5.0 into NX 6.0.2, but you might not be able to import a binary file created by NX
Nastran 6.1 into NX 5.
The version listed in the Export ASCII rows is the solver version that was available when the NX version
was tested. In general, the exported solver input file is upwards compatible for that solver. Backwards
compatibility is not guaranteed. For NX Nastran, the Model Setup Check function in Advanced
Simulation tries to flag potential version incompatibility issues.
The version listed in the Post-processing Results rows is the version of the solver results that was tested in
the listed NX version. In general, results from earlier solver versions are also supported.
751
NX 9.0
NX 8 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 8
NX 8.0.1
NX 8.0.2
NX 8.0.3
NX 8.5
NX 8.5.1
Import ASCII 8
NX
Nastran (.dat)
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
Import Binary 8
(.op2)
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
Export ASCII 8
(.dat)
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
Post8
processing of
Results (.op2)
8.1
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
2011.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2011.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2011.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
Post2011.1
processing of
Results (.op2)
2011.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
2012.1
6.10
6.10
6.10
6.12
6.12
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.10
6.10
6.10
6.12
6.12
Post6.11
processing of
Results (.fil)
6.11
6.11
6.12-1
6.12-1
6.12-1
Post6.10-EF1 6.11
processing of
Results (.odb)
6.11
6.11
6.12
6.12
13
14
14
14
14
Import Binary 13
(.rst, .rth)
13
14
14
14
14
Export ASCII 13
(.inp)
13
14
14
14
14
Post13
processing of
Results
13
14
14
14
14
752
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 8
NX 8.0.1
NX 8.0.2
NX 8.0.3
NX 8.5
NX 8.5.1
LSDYNA
971R5.0
971R5.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
971R5.0
971R5.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
Post971R5.0 971R5.0
processing of
Results
971R5.0
971R5.0
971R6.0
971R6.0
N/A
NX7 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 7
NX 7.5
NX 7.5.1
NX 7.5.2
NX 7.5.3
NX 7.5.4
NX 7.5.5.
Import
6.1
NX
Nastran ASCII (.dat)
7.0
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
Import
Binary
(.op2)
6.1
7.0
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
Export
6.1
ASCII (.dat)
7.0
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
Postprocessing
of Results
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
Export
2008r1
ASCII (.dat)
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
Postprocessing
of Results
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2010
2010
2011.1
6.91
6.91
6.9-1
6.10
6.10
6.10
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export
6.8-1
ASCII (.inp)
6.9
6.9
6.9
6.10
6.10
6.10
Postprocessing
6.9.2
6.9.2
6.10-1
6.10-1
6.10-1
6.11-1
6.1
Import
2008r1
MSC
Nastran ASCII (.dat)
Import
Binary
(.op2)
2008r1
6.8-1
Abaqus Import
ASCII (.inp)
Import
Binary
N/A
6.8-EF2
753
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 7
NX 7.5
NX 7.5.1
NX 7.5.2
NX 7.5.3
NX 7.5.4
NX 7.5.5.
6.8-EF2
6.9-EF1
6.9-EF2
6.9-EF2
6.10-EF1
6.10-EF1
6.10-EF1
12
12.1
12.1
12.1
13
13
13
Import
12
Binary (.rst,
.rth)
12.1
12.1
12.1
13
13
13
Export
12
ASCII (.inp)
12.1
12.1
12.1
13
13
13
Postprocessing
of Results
12
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
Import
ASCII
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Import
Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export
ASCII (.k)
971R3.2.1 971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
Postprocessing
of Results
N/A
N/A
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
NX 6
NX 6.0.1
NX 6.0.2
NX 6.0.3
NX 6.0.4
NX 6.0.5
of Results
(.fil)
Postprocessing
of Results
(.odb)
ANSYS Import
ASCII
(PREP7,
CDB)
LSDYNA
NX 6 releases
Solver
File Type
NX
Nastran
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
7.0
Import Binary
(.op2)
6.0
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
7.0
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
7.0
Post-processing of
Results
6.0
6.1
6.1
7.0
7.0
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
MSC
754
6.0
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 6
NX 6.0.1
NX 6.0.2
NX 6.0.3
NX 6.0.4
NX 6.0.5
Nastran
Import Binary
(.op2)
2007r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
Post-processing of
Results
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
2008r1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
6.8-1
Post-processing of
Results (.fil)
6.7-5
6.8-1
6.8-3
6.8-EF2
6.8-EF2
6.8-EF2
Post-processing of
Results (.odb)
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.8-EF
6.8-EF2
6.9-EF2
Import ASCII
(PREP7, CDB)
11
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.0
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.0
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.0
Post-processing of
Results
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
11 SP1
12.0
12.1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
971R2
971R2
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
971R3.2.1
Post-processing of
Results
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Abaqus
ANSYS
2007r1
N/A
NX 5 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 5
NX Nastran
Import ASCII
(.dat)
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
Import Binary
(.op2)
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
Export ASCII
(.dat)
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
Post-processing of 5.0
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
6.0
755
NX 9.0
Solver
File Type
NX 5
2005
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2007r1
Import Binary
(.op2)
2005
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2007r1
Export ASCII
(.dat)
2005
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2007r1
Post-processing of 2005
Results
2005
2007
2007
2007
2007
2008r1
Import ASCII
(.inp)
6.6
6.6
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Export ASCII
(.inp)
6.6
6.6
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
Post-processing of 6.6
Results
6.6
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.7-1
6.8-1
Import ASCII
(PREP7, CDB)
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
10
11
11
11
11
11
Export ASCII
(.inp)
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
Post-processing of 10
Results
11
11
11
11
11
11 SP1
Results
Abaqus
ANSYS
NX 4 releases
Solver
File Type
NX 4
NX 4.0.1
NX 4.0.2
NX 4.0.3
NX 4.0.4
4.0
4.1
4.1
5.0
5.0
4.0
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.0
4.1
4.1
5.0
5.0
Post-processing of
Results
4.0
4.1
4.1
5.0
5.0
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
MSC
Nastran
756
NX 9.0
Solver
Abaqus
ANSYS
File Type
NX 4
NX 4.0.1
NX 4.0.2
NX 4.0.3
NX 4.0.4
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
Post-processing of
Results
2005
2005
2005
2005
2005
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.6
6.6
Import Binary
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.6
6.6
Post-processing of
Results
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.5-1
6.6
6.6-3
10
10
10
10
10
10
Post-processing of
Results
10
10
757
NX 9.0
NX Laminate Composites
Modifying the selection on imported plies
What is it?
You can now edit an imported ply by:
Adding elements or polygon faces that are connected to existing selections. NX interpolates fiber
orientations from existing fiber orientations.
In previous releases, you could not change the elements or faces that reference the imported ply after import.
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Imported layup
Simulation Navigator
758
NX 9.0
Example
The following example has 2 ply meshes named Mud_guard_layup-Plies-1-2-3-4 and
Mud_guard_layup-Ply5 and 2 extrusion resin meshes both named Resin Elements. The Auto-create
Inflated Mesh FE Groups command creates the following groups:
Mud_guard_layup-Plies-1-2-3-4
Mud_guard_layup-Ply5
Resin Elements
Resin Elements(1)
Under the 3D Elements node, there are two entries for the Mud_guard_layup-Plies-1-2-3-4 mesh
indicated by the red arrows. This is because there are two underlying zones for that mesh. The
Mud_guard_layup-Plies-1-2-3-4 group indicated by the blue arrow is created by the Auto-create
Inflated Mesh FE Groups command. Use this group to select and deselect both meshes in one step.
Viewports
Fringe Plots
Post View 1
3D Elements
Mud_guard_layup-Ply5
Resin Elements
Resin Elements
Mud_guard_layup-Plies-1-2-3-4
Mud_guard_layup-Plies-1-2-3-4
Annotations
Result CSYS
Groups
Resin Elements
759
NX 9.0
Resin Elements(1)
Mud_guard_layup-Plies-1-2-3-4
Mud_guard_layup-Ply5
Advanced Simulation
Simulation Navigator
760
NX 9.0
Advanced Simulation
Prerequisite
Toolbar
LaminateView Laminate
Simulation Navigator
support_sim1.sim
support_fem1.fem
support_fem1.fem
support_fem1_i.prt
support_fem1_i.prt
Polygon Geometry
Polygon Geometry
2D Collectors
2D Collectors
3D Collectors
3D Collectors
Fields
Fields
Layups
Layups
CSYS
Layups Offset
Groups
Material Orientation
761
NX 9.0
DOFSets
Regions
Zones
Laminate Inflation
Fields
Simulation Object Container
Load Container
Extrude Setup 1
CSYS
Groups
762
NX 9.0
Durability
Evaluate Damage enhancements
What is it?
You can now view the damage evaluation results for each selected function in separate worksheets of the Excel
spreadsheet, or in separate CSV files. In the Excel worksheet, you can highlight the nonzero values in the histogram
matrices.
In previous versions, you could view only the cumulative damage evaluation results over all functions.
In the Durability Damage Evaluation dialog box.
Use the new Enable Detailed Output option to display the damage evaluation results for each selected
function in the specified output files.
Use the new Highlight Nonzero Damage Values option to display in red the nonzero values in the
Excel spreadsheet.
Advanced Simulation
Toolbar
Durability Evaluate Damage
Menu
Output group
763
NX 9.0
Note
This is applicable for Teamcenter 9.1.2 and higher.
The Child Revision Option preference is added to the General Preferences in the NX Relations Browser
preferences. You can choose one of the following level of revisions to be displayed:
All Revisions
Shows all of the revisions of the children that reference the part.
In the Parts tab, Checked Out By, Release Status, Name, and Description are added to provide additional
general information for the part selected.
In the Relations tab, NX Status and Teamcenter Status columns are added to provide the status of the link in
NX and the link in Teamcenter. The status can be Up To Date, Out Of Date, Broken, Frozen, or Suppressed.
Note
The Teamcenter Status column is applicable only if the link is referencing a product interface.
A tooltip for each relation node is added, which gives the part Name, Description, Checked Out By, and
Release Status.
Teamcenter Integration
Menu
AssembliesWAVERelations Browser
Right-click on an Item, Item Revision, or dataset in Teamcenter
Navigator and choose Relations Browser
764
NX 9.0
Dialog Box
NX Relations Browser
765
NX 9.0
User Defined
This context lets you manually select the options on the Assembly Load Options dialog box. You can
change these options as needed to define different loading configurations.
Load as Saved
This context does not allow any changes to be made to the assembly load options. The assembly is loaded
with the options that were specified when the assembly was saved.
From Teamcenter
This context uses the configuration context specified in TeamcenterStructure Manager. When an
assembly is sent from Structure Manager to NX, the configuration context is also sent and the settings
are applied to NX before an assembly is opened.
The From Teamcenter configuration context is not available until an assembly has been loaded into NX from
Teamcenter Structure Manager. After the From Teamcenter configuration context becomes available, you can
switch between it and the other two contexts; it does not need to be loaded again. When the From Teamcenter
configuration context is selected, the settings it applies in the Assembly Load Options dialog box are grayed out.
To enable the From Teamcenter configuration context, set the following Teamcenter preference:
NX_Supports_VISSC=True.
Note
The From Teamcenter configuration context is supported with Teamcenter 8.3.3.6 and higher and
Teamcenter 9.1.2 and higher.
Once the NX session ends, the From Teamcenter and User Defined context settings are removed. The next NX
session starts with the default assembly load options.
For additional information on configuration contexts, see the Teamcenter documentation.
Teamcenter Integration
Menu
Dialog Box
766
NX 9.0
767
NX 9.0
Teamcenter Integration
Menu
768
NX 9.0
Note that some red and yellow points appear to lie outside the part material. The profile tolerance on each blade has
a rotational degree of freedom around the Zaxis. When the analysis engine virtually rotated the part to get the data
to fit as close as possible, the yellow points moved outside the tolerance zone in the plus material direction and the
red points moved outside the tolerance zone in the minus material direction. You are seeing the deviation relative to
the best fit location of the tolerance zone.
769
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
You must:
Toolbar
OperationsMeasured Data
Menu
Measured Data
770
NX 9.0
Establishing an orientation that pushes the deviations to areas of lesser importance or to areas that are easier
to fixfor example, areas that can be cut rather than welded.
Refining alignments by using more features in more complex relationships, sometimes with bonus
tolerances applied.
Pushing deviations to their limits to bring nonconforming features into tolerance. This approach sometimes
results in a new set of feature deviations that when reanalyzed, provide a better indication of the problem
can be fixed without rework.
Prerequisite
Toolbar
OperationsInspection Analyze
Menu
Inspection Analyze
771
NX 9.0
The Curve Inspection Feature and Surface Inspection Feature dialog boxes now include a Point
Definition group. A Point Data list lets you add:
By default, the Point Data list is set to None. Defining point data on the feature does not automatically create an
inspection path on that feature, and if you add additional point features using an inspection path sub-operation, the
points in that sub-operation do not have to match the points defined on the feature. When you create manual points
or use a point set for your curve or surface point definition, the points appear on the curve or surface much as they
would when creating a point-set sub-operation.
Note
Points created on a feature affect Extract Feature operations on curve features. Any curves that have points
created for them automatically use those points as extract points. For example, you could create three curve
features that touch one another and lie on the same surface or plane. You could then add a point set on curve
1, individual points on curve 2, and no points on curve 3. When you add an extract feature operation, curve 1
uses the point set points as extract points, curve 2 uses the individual points as extract points. Extract points
are calculated for curve C, based on the extract point parameters, as they were in previous releases.
772
NX 9.0
Prerequisite
773
NX 9.0
Data translation
AutoCAD DXF/DWG Import Wizard dialog box enhancement
What is it?
Use the following options in the Text Aspect Ratio list on the Fonts step to specify the method used to control
the bounding box length of the AutoCAD text imported into NX. The Text Aspect Ratio list corresponds to the
new ASPECT_RATIO_CALCULATION_ON_IMPORT keyword in the DXF/DWG translator settings file. Each option
on the Text Aspect Ratio list corresponds to a value that you can specify for this keyword.
Calculate
Calculates the aspect ratio for the NX font in order to match the bounding box length of the
text in NX with the length of the text in AutoCAD. This option works well when the native
AutoCAD fonts used in the DXF/DWG file are present on the system. Corresponding
keyword valueAUTOMATIC_CALCULATION.
Use DXF/DWG
Width Factor
Matches the text length in NX using the width factor of the AutoCAD text as the aspect
ratio in NX. You can use this option if you are importing DXF/DWG files that were
previously exported from NX. Corresponding keyword value
SAME_AS_ACAD_WIDTHFACTOR.
Specify NX Aspect
Ratio
Matches the text length in NX using the aspect ratio that you specify in the Aspect Ratio
column in the Font mapping table. Corresponding keyword value
USE_VALUE_SPECIFIED_IN_MAPPING_FILE.
Scale DXF/DWG
Width Factor
Matches the text length in NX by multiplying the width factor of AutoCAD text with the
value that you specify in the Scale Factor column in the Font mapping table.
Corresponding keyword valueSCALE_ACAD_WIDTHFACTOR_WITH_SPECIFIED_VALUE.
The following keywords are obsolete in the DXF/DWG translator settings file:
IMPORT_ASPECT_RATIO
EXPORT_ASPECT_RATIO
MAP_ACAD_WIDTHFACTOR_AS_ASPECT_RATIO
FileImportAutoCAD DXF/DWG
774
NX 9.0
Curves
Sketches
Bodies
Components
When you select PMI in a JT viewer such as Teamcenter Visualization, the objects associated with the selected PMI
are highlighted in the graphics window.
Note
The NX to JT translator already supports PMI associations to the faces and edges of a body in an
NX part.
The size of the JT file increases if PMIs are associated to an entire solid body instead of its
constituting element such as an edge or a face.
775
NX 9.0
When you import logicals using the Import from ECAD command, selecting a component from the
ECAD Reuse Library for the logical is no longer mandatory. This lets you update the attribute values of a
logical without updating or modifying the component. It also lets you import a new logical from ECAD
without assigning any geometry to it.
The Components and Placement groups in the dialog box are now combined into one group that is
called Placement.
In the EPLAN tab of the Mechatronics Concept Designer Customer Defaults, the Attribute Mapping
List is separated into two lists, one for import and one for export.
Attribute Mapping List for Export This list defines the mapping of the logical object
attribute names exported by Mechatronics Concept Designer to the number codes of the
corresponding EPLAN attributes. The EPLAN number codes are available in the Overview of
the EPLAN Properties of the EPLAN help. The MCD attribute is separated by a colon from the
subsequent EPLAN number code. Mapping of the Logical_Item_Name, Logical_Item_ID,
and Reference_Designator attributes is the minimum requirement.
Attribute Mapping List for Import This list defines the mapping from imported EPLAN
attribute names to the corresponding logical object attributes of Mechatronics Concept Designer.
The EPLAN attribute name is separated by a colon from the subsequent Mechatronics Concept
Designer attribute name. The EPLAN attribute names can be localized names depending on the
language setting of the EPLAN application that the XML file was generated in. Mapping of the
Reference_Designator attribute is the minimum requirement.
A value for the Logical_Item_Name attribute is no longer required in the imported XML file. When the
attribute is missing in the XML file:
o
If the logical object in the XML is found in the logical tree in the System Navigator main
panel, the name of the matched logical is used for the Logical_Item_Name attribute in the
dialog box.
If the logical object in the XML is not found in the logical tree in the System Navigator main
panel, a temporary logical name is automatically generated in the dialog box.
Toolbar
Menu
776